User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

TABLE OF CONETNTS

1. INTRODUTION .................................................................................................................... 20

1.1 Packet Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 20

1.2 Product Description ................................................................................................................................... 20

1.3 How to Use This Manual ............................................................................................................................ 22

1.4 Product Features ........................................................................................................................................ 23

1.5 Product Specification ................................................................................................................................ 26

2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 29

2.1 Hardware Description ................................................................................................................................ 29

2.1.1 Switch Front Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 29

2.1.2 LED Indications ................................................................................................................................................... 30

2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 31

2.2 Install the Switch ........................................................................................................................................ 32

2.2.1 Desktop Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 32

2.2.2 Rack Mounting..................................................................................................................................................... 33

2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver .............................................................................................................................. 35

2.2.4 Connecting DC Power Supply – SFC4000T-DC .................................................................................................. 36

3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT .................................................................................................... 38

3.1 Requirements.............................................................................................................................................. 38

3.2 Management Access Overview ................................................................................................................. 39

3.3 Administration Console ............................................................................................................................. 39

3.4 Web Management ....................................................................................................................................... 41

3.5 SNMP-Based Network Management ......................................................................................................... 42

4. WEB CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................... 43

4.1 Main Web Page ........................................................................................................................................... 46

4.2 System ......................................................................................................................................................... 48

4.2.1 System Information .............................................................................................................................................. 49
4.2.2 IP Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 50

4.2.3 IPv6 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 51

2
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2.4 Users Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 52

4.2.5 Privilege Levels ................................................................................................................................................... 54

4.2.6 NTP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 56

4.2.7 UPnP ................................................................................................................................................................... 57

4.2.8 DHCP Relay ........................................................................................................................................................ 59

4.2.9 DHCP Relay Statistics ......................................................................................................................................... 61

4.2.10 CPU Load .......................................................................................................................................................... 62

4.2.11 System Log ........................................................................................................................................................ 63

4.2.12 Detailed Log ...................................................................................................................................................... 64

4.2.13 Remote Syslog .................................................................................................................................................. 65

4.2.14 SMTP Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 66

4.2.15 Web Firmware Upgrade ..................................................................................................................................... 68

4.2.16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................... 69

4.2.17 Configuration Backup ........................................................................................................................................ 69

4.2.18 Configuration Upload ......................................................................................................................................... 71

4.2.19 Image Select...................................................................................................................................................... 73

4.2.20 Factory Default .................................................................................................................................................. 74

4.2.21 System Reboot .................................................................................................................................................. 75

4.3 Simple Network Management Protocol .................................................................................................... 76

4.3.1 SNMP Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 76

4.3.2 SNMP System Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 77

4.3.3 SNMP Trap Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 78

4.3.4 SNMP System Information .................................................................................................................................. 80

4.3.5 SNMPv3 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 81

4.3.5.1 SNMPv3 Communities .............................................................................................................................. 81

4.3.5.2 SNMPv3 Users .......................................................................................................................................... 82

4.3.5.3 SNMPv3 Groups........................................................................................................................................ 83

4.3.5.4 SNMPv3 Views .......................................................................................................................................... 84

4.3.5.5 SNMPv3 Access ........................................................................................................................................ 85

4.4 Port Management ....................................................................................................................................... 87

4.4.1 Port Configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 87

4.4.2 Port Statistics Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 89

4.4.3 Port Statistics Detail ............................................................................................................................................. 90

4.4.4 SFP Information ................................................................................................................................................... 92

4.4.5 Port Mirror............................................................................................................................................................ 93

4.5 Link Aggregation ........................................................................................................................................ 96

4.5.1 Static Aggregation ................................................................................................................................................ 98

4.5.2 LACP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 99

4.5.3 LACP System Status ......................................................................................................................................... 101

3
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.5.4 LACP Port Status ............................................................................................................................................... 102

4.5.5 LACP Port Statistics........................................................................................................................................... 103

4.6 VLAN .......................................................................................................................................................... 105

4.6.1 VLAN Overview ................................................................................................................................................. 105

4.6.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ........................................................................................................................................... 106

4.6.3 VLAN Basic Information..................................................................................................................................... 109

4.6.4 VLAN Port Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 110

4.6.5 VLAN Membership ............................................................................................................................................ 113

4.6.6 VLAN Membership Status .................................................................................................................................. 115

4.6.7 VLAN Port Status ............................................................................................................................................... 116

4.6.8 Private VLAN ..................................................................................................................................................... 118

4.6.9 Port Isolation...................................................................................................................................................... 119

4.6.10 VLAN setting example: .................................................................................................................................... 121

4.6.10.1 Two separate 802.1Q VLAN .................................................................................................................. 121

4.6.10.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switch ............................................................................... 124

4.6.10.3 Port Isolate ............................................................................................................................................ 126

4.6.11 MAC-based VLAN............................................................................................................................................ 128

4.6.12 MAC-based VLAN Status ................................................................................................................................ 129

4.6.13 IP Subnet-based VLAN.................................................................................................................................... 130

4.6.14 Protocol-based VLAN ...................................................................................................................................... 131

4.6.15 Protocol-based VLAN Mambership ................................................................................................................. 133

4.7 Spanning Tree Protocol ........................................................................................................................... 135

4.7.1 Theory ............................................................................................................................................................... 135

4.7.2 STP System Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 141

4.7.3 Bridge Status ..................................................................................................................................................... 143

4.7.4 CIST Port Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 144

4.7.5 MSTI Priorities ................................................................................................................................................... 147

4.7.6 MSTI Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 148

4.7.7 MSTI Ports Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 149

4.7.8 Port Status ......................................................................................................................................................... 151

4.7.9 Port Statistics ..................................................................................................................................................... 152

4.8 Multicast .................................................................................................................................................... 154

4.8.1 IGMP Snooping ................................................................................................................................................. 154

4.8.2 IGMP Snooping Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 157

4.8.3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration ................................................................................................................. 159

4.8.4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering ................................................................................................................. 161

4.8.5 IGMP Snooping Status ...................................................................................................................................... 162

4.8.6 IGMP Group Information .................................................................................................................................... 163

4.8.7 IGMPv3 Information ........................................................................................................................................... 164

4
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.8.8 MLD Snooping Configuration............................................................................................................................. 165

4.8.9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration .................................................................................................................. 167

4.8.10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering ................................................................................................................. 169

4.8.11 MLD Snooping Status ...................................................................................................................................... 170

4.8.12 MLD Group Information ................................................................................................................................... 171

4.8.13 MLDv2 Information .......................................................................................................................................... 172

4.8.14 MVR................................................................................................................................................................. 173

4.8.15 MVR Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 176

4.8.16 MVR Groups Information ................................................................................................................................. 177

4.8.17 MVR SFM Information ..................................................................................................................................... 178

4.9 Quality of Service ..................................................................................................................................... 180

4.9.1 Understand QOS ............................................................................................................................................... 180

4.9.2 Port Policing ...................................................................................................................................................... 181

4.9.3 Port Classification .............................................................................................................................................. 182

4.9.4 Port Scheduler ................................................................................................................................................... 183

4.9.5 Port Shaping ...................................................................................................................................................... 184

4.9.5.1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers ................................................................................................ 185

4.9.6 Port Tag Remarking ........................................................................................................................................... 187

4.9.6.1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking............................................................................................................. 188

4.9.7 Port DSCP ......................................................................................................................................................... 189

4.9.8 DSCP-Based QoS ............................................................................................................................................. 190

4.9.9 DSCP Translation .............................................................................................................................................. 192

4.9.10 DSCP Classification......................................................................................................................................... 193

4.9.11 QoS Control List............................................................................................................................................... 194

4.9.11.1 QoS Control Entry Configuration ........................................................................................................... 196

4.9.12 QoS Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 198

4.9.13 Storm Control Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 200

4.9.14 QoS Statistics .................................................................................................................................................. 200

4.9.15 Voice VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 201

4.9.16 Voice VLAN OUI Table..................................................................................................................................... 203

4.10 Access Control Lists .............................................................................................................................. 205

4.10.1 Access Control List Status ............................................................................................................................... 205

4.10.2 Access Control List Configuration .................................................................................................................... 206

4.10.3 ACE Configuration ........................................................................................................................................... 208

4.10.4 ACL Ports Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 217

4.10.5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 219

4.11 Authentication ......................................................................................................................................... 221

4.11.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Authentication .................................................................................. 222

4.11.2 Authentication Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 225

5
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.11.3 Network Access Server Configuration.............................................................................................................. 226

4.11.4 Network Access Overview ............................................................................................................................... 236

4.11.5 Network Access Statistics ................................................................................................................................ 237

4.11.6 Authentication Server Configuration................................................................................................................. 244

4.11.7 RADIUS Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 247

4.11.8 RADIUS Details ............................................................................................................................................... 248

4.11.9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration ............................................................................................ 255

4.11.10 802.1X Client Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 260

4.12 Security ................................................................................................................................................... 263

4.12.1 Port Limit Control ............................................................................................................................................. 263

4.12.2 Access Management ....................................................................................................................................... 267

4.12.3 Access Management Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 268

4.12.4 HTTPs ............................................................................................................................................................. 268

4.12.5 SSH ................................................................................................................................................................. 269

4.12.6 Port Security Status ......................................................................................................................................... 271

4.12.7 Port Security Detail .......................................................................................................................................... 273

4.12.8 DHCP Snooping .............................................................................................................................................. 274

4.12.9 DHCP Snooping Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 275

4.12.10 IP Source Guard Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 276

4.12.11 IP Source Guard Static Table ......................................................................................................................... 278

4.12.12 ARP Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 279

4.12.13 ARP Inspection Static Table ........................................................................................................................... 280

4.13 Address Table ......................................................................................................................................... 281

4.13.1 MAC Address Table Configuration ................................................................................................................... 281
4.13.2 MAC Address Table Status .............................................................................................................................. 283

4.13.3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table ........................................................................................................................ 284

4.13.4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table...................................................................................................................... 285

4.14 LLDP ........................................................................................................................................................ 287

4.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol ......................................................................................................................... 287

4.14.2 LLDP Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 287

4.14.3 LLDP MED Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 291

4.14.4 LLDP-MED Neighbor ....................................................................................................................................... 297

4.14.5 Neighbor .......................................................................................................................................................... 300

4.14.6 Port Statistics ................................................................................................................................................... 302

4.15 Network Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................. 304

4.15.1 Ping ................................................................................................................................................................. 304
4.15.2 IPv6 Ping ......................................................................................................................................................... 305

4.15.3 Remote IP Ping Test ........................................................................................................................................ 306

6
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.15.4 Cable Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 307

4.16 Loop Protection ...................................................................................................................................... 310

4.16.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 310

4.16.2 Loop Protection Status..................................................................................................................................... 311

4.17 sFlow ....................................................................................................................................................... 312

4.17.1 sFlow Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 313

4.17.2 sFlow Status .................................................................................................................................................... 315

4.18 RMON....................................................................................................................................................... 318

4.18.1 RMON Alarm Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 318

4.18.2 RMON Alarm Detail ......................................................................................................................................... 320

4.18.3 RMON Alarm Status......................................................................................................................................... 321

4.18.4 RMON Event Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 322

4.18.5 RMON Event Detail ......................................................................................................................................... 323

4.18.6 RMON Event Status......................................................................................................................................... 324

4.18.7 RMON History Configuration ........................................................................................................................... 324

4.18.8 RMON History Detail ....................................................................................................................................... 325

4.18.9 RMON History Status....................................................................................................................................... 327

4.18.10 RMON Statistics Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 328

4.18.11 RMON Statistics Detail ................................................................................................................................... 329

4.18.12 RMON Statistics Status .................................................................................................................................. 331

5. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 334

5.1 Accessing the CLI .................................................................................................................................... 334

Logon to the Console .......................................................................................................................................... 334

Configure IP address ........................................................................................................................................... 335

5.2 Telnet Login .............................................................................................................................................. 337

6. Command Line Mode ....................................................................................................... 338

6.1 System Command .................................................................................................................................... 339

System Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 339

System Log Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 339

System Version ................................................................................................................................................... 340

System Log Server Mode .................................................................................................................................... 340

System Name ...................................................................................................................................................... 341

System Contact ................................................................................................................................................... 341

System Log Server Address ................................................................................................................................ 342

System Location .................................................................................................................................................. 342

7
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

System Log Level ................................................................................................................................................ 343

System Timezone ................................................................................................................................................ 343

System Log Lookup ............................................................................................................................................. 344

System Log Clear ................................................................................................................................................ 345

System Reboot .................................................................................................................................................... 345

System Restore Default....................................................................................................................................... 346

System Load ....................................................................................................................................................... 346

6.2 IP Command .............................................................................................................................................. 347

IP Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... 347

IP DHCP .............................................................................................................................................................. 348

IP Setup............................................................................................................................................................... 348

IP Ping ................................................................................................................................................................. 349

IP DNS ................................................................................................................................................................ 349

IP DNS Proxy ...................................................................................................................................................... 350

IPv6 AUTOCINFIG .............................................................................................................................................. 350

IPv6 Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 351

IPv6 Ping ............................................................................................................................................................. 352

IP NTP Configuration........................................................................................................................................... 353

IP NTP Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 353

IP NTP Server Add .............................................................................................................................................. 354

IP NTP Server IPv6 Add ...................................................................................................................................... 354

IP NTP Server Delete .......................................................................................................................................... 355

6.3 Port Management Command................................................................................................................... 356

Port Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 356
Port Mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 356

Port Flow Control ................................................................................................................................................. 357

Port State............................................................................................................................................................. 358

Port Maximum Frame .......................................................................................................................................... 358

Port Power........................................................................................................................................................... 359

Port Excessive..................................................................................................................................................... 359

Port Statistics....................................................................................................................................................... 360

Port VeriPHY ....................................................................................................................................................... 360

Port SFP .............................................................................................................................................................. 361

Port Description ................................................................................................................................................... 361

6.4 MAC Address Table Command ............................................................................................................... 362

MAC Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 362
MAC Add ............................................................................................................................................................. 362

MAC Delete ......................................................................................................................................................... 363

MAC Lookup........................................................................................................................................................ 363

8
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MAC Age Time .................................................................................................................................................... 364

MAC Learning ..................................................................................................................................................... 364

MAC Dump .......................................................................................................................................................... 365

MAC Statistics ..................................................................................................................................................... 365

MAC Flush........................................................................................................................................................... 366

6.5 VLAN Configuration Command .............................................................................................................. 367

VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 367

VLAV PVID .......................................................................................................................................................... 367

VLAN Frame Type ............................................................................................................................................... 368

VLAN Ingress Filter ............................................................................................................................................. 369

VLAN Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 369

VLAN Link Type ................................................................................................................................................... 370

VLAN Q-in-Q Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 370

VLAN Ethernet Type ............................................................................................................................................ 371

VLAN Add ............................................................................................................................................................ 371

VLAN Forbidden Add ........................................................................................................................................... 372

VLAN Delete........................................................................................................................................................ 372

VLAN Forbidden Delete....................................................................................................................................... 373

VLAN Forbidden Lookup ..................................................................................................................................... 373

VLAN Lookup ...................................................................................................................................................... 373

VLAN Name Add ................................................................................................................................................. 374

VLAN Name Delete ............................................................................................................................................. 375

VLAN Name Lookup ............................................................................................................................................ 375

VLAN Status ........................................................................................................................................................ 376

6.6 Private VLAN Configuration Command ................................................................................................. 377

PVLAN Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 377

PVLAN Add ......................................................................................................................................................... 377

PVLAN Delete ..................................................................................................................................................... 378

PVLAN Lookup .................................................................................................................................................... 378

PVLAN Isolate ..................................................................................................................................................... 379

6.7 Security Command ................................................................................................................................... 380

Security Switch User Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 380

Security Switch User Add .................................................................................................................................... 380

Security Switch User Delete ................................................................................................................................ 381

Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration ..................................................................................................... 381

Security Switch Privilege Level Group ................................................................................................................. 382

Security Switch Privilege Level Current ............................................................................................................... 383

Security Switch Authentication Configuration ...................................................................................................... 383

Security Switch Authentication Method ............................................................................................................... 384

9
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SSH Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 385

Security Switch SSH Mode.................................................................................................................................. 385

Security Switch HTTPs Configuration ................................................................................................................. 386

Security Switch HTTPs Mode .............................................................................................................................. 386

Security Switch HTTPs Redirect ......................................................................................................................... 387

Security Switch Access Configuration ................................................................................................................. 387

Security Switch Access Mode.............................................................................................................................. 388

Security Switch Access Add ................................................................................................................................ 388

Security Switch Access IPv6 Add ........................................................................................................................ 389

Security Switch Access Delete ............................................................................................................................ 390

Security Switch Access Lookup ........................................................................................................................... 390

Security Switch Access Clear .............................................................................................................................. 390

Security Switch Access Statistics ........................................................................................................................ 391

Security Switch SNMP Configuration .................................................................................................................. 391

Security Switch SNMP Mode ............................................................................................................................... 391

Security Switch SNMP Version ............................................................................................................................ 392

Security Switch SNMP Read Community ............................................................................................................ 393

Security Switch SNMP Write Community ............................................................................................................ 393

Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode....................................................................................................................... 394

Security Switch SNMP Trap Version.................................................................................................................... 394

Security Switch SNMP Trap Community ............................................................................................................. 395

Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination.............................................................................................................. 395

Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination ..................................................................................................... 396

Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure ............................................................................................. 396

Security Switch SNMP Trap Link-up .................................................................................................................... 397

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode ........................................................................................................... 397

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout ........................................................................................................ 398

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times ................................................................................................. 398

Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID ....................................................................................... 399

Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID .................................................................................................. 399

Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name ........................................................................................................ 400

Security Switch SNMP Engine ID ........................................................................................................................ 400

Security Switch SNMP Community Add .............................................................................................................. 400

Security Switch SNMP Community Delete .......................................................................................................... 401

Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup ......................................................................................................... 401

Security Switch SNMP User Add ......................................................................................................................... 402

Security Switch SNMP User Delete ..................................................................................................................... 403

Security Switch SNMP User Changekey ............................................................................................................. 403

Security Switch SNMP User Lookup ................................................................................................................... 404

Security Switch SNMP Group Add....................................................................................................................... 404

10
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Group Delete .................................................................................................................. 405

Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup ................................................................................................................. 405

Security Switch SNMP View Add ......................................................................................................................... 406

Security Switch SNMP View Delete..................................................................................................................... 406

Security Switch SNMP View Lookup ................................................................................................................... 407

Security Switch SNMP Access Add ..................................................................................................................... 407

Security Switch SNMP Access Delete ................................................................................................................. 408

Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup................................................................................................................ 409

Security Switch RMON Statistics Add .................................................................................................................. 409

Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete.............................................................................................................. 409

Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup ............................................................................................................ 410

Security Switch RMON History Add ..................................................................................................................... 410

Security Switch RMON History Delete ................................................................................................................ 410

Security Switch RMON History Lookup ............................................................................................................... 411

Security Switch RMON Alarm Add ....................................................................................................................... 411

Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete .................................................................................................................. 412

Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup ................................................................................................................. 412

Security Switch RMON Event Add ....................................................................................................................... 413

Security Switch RMON Event Delete .................................................................................................................. 413

Security Switch RMON Event Lookup ................................................................................................................. 413

Security Network Psec Switch ............................................................................................................................. 414

Security Network Psec Port ................................................................................................................................. 414

Security Network Limit Configuration .................................................................................................................. 415

Security Network Limit Mode ............................................................................................................................... 415

Security Network Limit Aging ............................................................................................................................... 416

Security Network Limit Agetime ........................................................................................................................... 417

Security Network Limit Port ................................................................................................................................. 417

Security Network Limit Limit ................................................................................................................................ 418

Security Network Limit Action .............................................................................................................................. 418

Security Network Limit Reopen ........................................................................................................................... 419

Security Network NAS Configuration ................................................................................................................... 419

Security Network NAS Mode ............................................................................................................................... 420

Security Network NAS State ................................................................................................................................ 421

Security Network NAS Reauthentication ............................................................................................................. 421

Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod .................................................................................................................. 422

Security Network NAS EapolTimeout .................................................................................................................. 422

Security Network NAS Agetime ........................................................................................................................... 423

Security Network NAS Holdtime .......................................................................................................................... 423

Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS ................................................................................................................. 424

Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN ............................................................................................................... 424

11
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN ................................................................................................................... 425

Security Network NAS Authenticate .................................................................................................................... 426

Security Network NAS Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 426

Security Network ACL Configuration ................................................................................................................... 427

Security Network ACL Action ............................................................................................................................... 428

Security Network ACL Policy ............................................................................................................................... 428

Security Network ACL Rate ................................................................................................................................. 429

Security Network ACL Add .................................................................................................................................. 429

Security Network ACL Delete .............................................................................................................................. 431

Security Network ACL Lookup ............................................................................................................................. 431

Security Network ACL Clear ................................................................................................................................ 432

Security Network ACL Status ............................................................................................................................... 432

Security Network ACL Port State ......................................................................................................................... 433

Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration ...................................................................................................... 433

Security Network DHCP Relay Mode .................................................................................................................. 433

Security Network DHCP Relay Server................................................................................................................. 434

Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ............................................................................................... 435

Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy ............................................................................................... 435

Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics ............................................................................................................. 436

Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration ................................................................................................ 436

Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode ............................................................................................................ 436

Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode ..................................................................................................... 437

Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics ....................................................................................................... 438

Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration ............................................................................................... 438

Security Network IP Source Guard Mode ............................................................................................................ 439

Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode .................................................................................................... 439

Security Network IP Source Guard Limit ............................................................................................................. 440

Security Network IP Source Guard Entry ............................................................................................................ 440

Security Network IP Source Guard Status ........................................................................................................... 441

Security Network IP Source Guard Translation ................................................................................................... 441

Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration .................................................................................................. 441

Security Network ARP Inspection Mode .............................................................................................................. 442

Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode ...................................................................................................... 442

Security Network ARP Inspection Entry............................................................................................................... 443

Security Network ARP Inspection Status ............................................................................................................. 443

Security Network ARP Inspection Translation ..................................................................................................... 444

Security AAA Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 444

Security AAA Timeout .......................................................................................................................................... 445

Security AAA Deadtime ....................................................................................................................................... 446

Security AAA RADIUS ......................................................................................................................................... 446

12
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS .............................................................................................................................. 447

Security AAA TACACS+ ...................................................................................................................................... 447

Security AAA Statistics......................................................................................................................................... 448

6.8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command ........................................................................................................ 449

STP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 449

STP Version ........................................................................................................................................................ 449

STP Tx Hold ........................................................................................................................................................ 450

STP MaxHops ..................................................................................................................................................... 450

STP MaxAge ....................................................................................................................................................... 451

STP FwdDelay .................................................................................................................................................... 451

STP CName ........................................................................................................................................................ 452

STP BPDU Filter.................................................................................................................................................. 452

STP BPDU Guard................................................................................................................................................ 453

STP Recovery ..................................................................................................................................................... 453

STP Status .......................................................................................................................................................... 454

STP MSTI Priority ................................................................................................................................................ 454

STP MSTI Map .................................................................................................................................................... 455

STP MSTI Add ..................................................................................................................................................... 455

STP Port Configuration........................................................................................................................................ 456

STP Port Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 456

STP Port Edge .................................................................................................................................................... 457

STP Port AutoEdge ............................................................................................................................................. 457

STP Port P2P ...................................................................................................................................................... 458

STP Port RestrictedRole ..................................................................................................................................... 458

STP Port RestrictedTcn ....................................................................................................................................... 459

STP Port bpduGuard ........................................................................................................................................... 459

STP Port Statistic................................................................................................................................................. 460

STP Port Mcheck................................................................................................................................................. 460

STP MSTI Port Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 461

STP MSTI Port Cost ............................................................................................................................................ 461

STP MSTI Port Priority ........................................................................................................................................ 462

6.9 Link Aggregation Command ................................................................................................................... 463

Aggregation Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 463

Aggregation Add .................................................................................................................................................. 463

Aggregation Delete .............................................................................................................................................. 463

Aggregation Lookup ............................................................................................................................................ 464

Aggregation Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 464

6.10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command .................................................................................... 466

LACP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 466

13
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

LACP Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 466

LACP Key ............................................................................................................................................................ 467

LACP Priority ....................................................................................................................................................... 467

LACP System Priority .......................................................................................................................................... 468

LACP Role........................................................................................................................................................... 468

LACP Status ........................................................................................................................................................ 469

LACP Statistics .................................................................................................................................................... 469

LACP Timeout ..................................................................................................................................................... 470

6.11 LLDP Command ...................................................................................................................................... 471

LLDP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 471

LLDP Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 471

LLDP Optional TLV .............................................................................................................................................. 472

LLDP Interval ....................................................................................................................................................... 473

LLDP Hold ........................................................................................................................................................... 473

LLDP Delay ......................................................................................................................................................... 474

LLDP Reinit ......................................................................................................................................................... 474

LLDP Statistics .................................................................................................................................................... 475

LLDP Info ............................................................................................................................................................ 476

LLDP CDP Aware ................................................................................................................................................ 476

6.12 LLDPMED Command ............................................................................................................................. 477

LLDPMED Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 477

LLDPMED Civic ................................................................................................................................................... 477

LLDPMED ECS ................................................................................................................................................... 478

LLDPMED Policy Delete...................................................................................................................................... 479

LLDPMED Policy Add .......................................................................................................................................... 479

LLDPMED Port Policy ......................................................................................................................................... 480

LLDPMED Coordinates ....................................................................................................................................... 481

LLDPMED Datum ................................................................................................................................................ 481

LLDPMED Fast ................................................................................................................................................... 482

LLDPMED Info .................................................................................................................................................... 482

6.13 Quality of Service Command ................................................................................................................ 483

QoS Configuration ............................................................................................................................................... 483

QoS Port Classification Class.............................................................................................................................. 483

QoS Port Classification DPL................................................................................................................................ 483

QoS Port Classification Tag ................................................................................................................................. 484

QoS Port Classification Map ................................................................................................................................ 485

QoS Port Classification DSCP............................................................................................................................. 485

QoS Port Policer Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 486

QoS Port Policer Rate ......................................................................................................................................... 486

14
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS Port Policer Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 487

QoS Port Policer Flow Control ............................................................................................................................. 487

QoS Port Scheduler Mode................................................................................................................................... 488

QoS Port Scheduler Weight ................................................................................................................................ 488

QoS Port QueueShaper Mode ............................................................................................................................ 489

QoS Port QueueShaper Rate .............................................................................................................................. 489

QoS Port QueueShaper Excess .......................................................................................................................... 490

QoS Port TagRemarking Mode ............................................................................................................................ 490

QoS Port TagRemarking PCP ............................................................................................................................. 491

QoS Port TagRemarking DEI ............................................................................................................................... 491

QoS Port TagRemarking Map .............................................................................................................................. 492

QoS Port DSCP Translation ................................................................................................................................ 492

QoS Port DSCP Classification ............................................................................................................................. 493

QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark .......................................................................................................................... 494

QoS DSCP Map .................................................................................................................................................. 494

QoS DSCP Translation ........................................................................................................................................ 495

QoS DSCP Trust ................................................................................................................................................. 495

QoS DSCP Classification Mode .......................................................................................................................... 495

QoS DSCP Classification MAP ........................................................................................................................... 496

QoS DSCP EgressRemap................................................................................................................................... 496

QoS Port Storm Unicast ...................................................................................................................................... 497

QoS Port Storm Multicast .................................................................................................................................... 497

QoS Port Storm Broadcast .................................................................................................................................. 498

QoS QCL Add ...................................................................................................................................................... 499

QoS QCL Delete.................................................................................................................................................. 500

QoS QCL Lookup ................................................................................................................................................ 500

QoS QCL Status .................................................................................................................................................. 500

QoS QCL Refresh ............................................................................................................................................... 501

6.14 Mirror Command .................................................................................................................................... 502

Mirror Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 502

Mirror Port ........................................................................................................................................................... 502

Mirror Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 503

6.15 Configuration Command ....................................................................................................................... 504

Configuration Save .............................................................................................................................................. 504

Configuration Load .............................................................................................................................................. 504

6.16 Firmware Command ............................................................................................................................... 505

Firmware Load .................................................................................................................................................... 505

Firmware IPv6 Load ............................................................................................................................................ 505

Firmware Information .......................................................................................................................................... 505

15
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Firmware Swap ................................................................................................................................................... 505

6.17 UPnP Command ..................................................................................................................................... 507

UPnP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 507

UPnP Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 507

UPnP TTL ............................................................................................................................................................ 508

UPnP Advertising Duration .................................................................................................................................. 508

6.18 MVR Command ....................................................................................................................................... 509

MVR Configuration .............................................................................................................................................. 509

MVR Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 509

MVR VLAN Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 510

MVR VLAN Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 510

MVR VLAN Port .................................................................................................................................................. 511

MVR VLAN LLQI ................................................................................................................................................. 511

MVR VLAN Channel ............................................................................................................................................ 512

MVR VLAN Priority .............................................................................................................................................. 512

MVR Immediate Leave ........................................................................................................................................ 512

MVR Status ......................................................................................................................................................... 513

MVR Groups ........................................................................................................................................................ 513

MVR SFM ............................................................................................................................................................ 513

6.19 Voice VLAN Command ........................................................................................................................... 515

Voice VLAN Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 515

Voice VLAN Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 516

Voice VLAN ID..................................................................................................................................................... 517

Voice VLAN Agetime ........................................................................................................................................... 517

Voice VLAN Traffic Class ..................................................................................................................................... 518

Voice VLAN OUI Add ........................................................................................................................................... 518

Voice VLAN OUI Delete....................................................................................................................................... 519

Voice VLAN OUI Clear ........................................................................................................................................ 519

Voice VLAN OUI Lookup ..................................................................................................................................... 519

Voice VLAN Port Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 520

Voice VLAN Security ........................................................................................................................................... 520

Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol .......................................................................................................................... 521

6.20 Loop Protect Command ......................................................................................................................... 522

Loop Protect Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 522

Loop Protect Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 522

Loop Protect Transmit ......................................................................................................................................... 522

Loop Protect Shutdown ....................................................................................................................................... 523

Loop Protect Port Configuration .......................................................................................................................... 523

16
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Loop Protect Port Mode....................................................................................................................................... 523

Loop Protect Port Action ...................................................................................................................................... 524

6.21 IPMC Command ...................................................................................................................................... 525

IPMC Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 525

IPMC Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 525

IPMC Flooding..................................................................................................................................................... 526

IPMC Leave Proxy .............................................................................................................................................. 526

IPMC Proxy ......................................................................................................................................................... 527

IPMC SSM........................................................................................................................................................... 527

IPMC VLAN Add .................................................................................................................................................. 528

IPMC VLAN Delete .............................................................................................................................................. 528

IPMC State .......................................................................................................................................................... 529

IPMC Querier ...................................................................................................................................................... 529

IPMC Compatibility .............................................................................................................................................. 530

IPMC Fastleave ................................................................................................................................................... 530

IPMC Throttling ................................................................................................................................................... 531

IPMC Filtering...................................................................................................................................................... 532

IPMC Router........................................................................................................................................................ 532

IPMC Status ........................................................................................................................................................ 532

IPMC Groups ....................................................................................................................................................... 533

IPMC Version ...................................................................................................................................................... 533

IPMC SFM ........................................................................................................................................................... 534

IPMC Parameter RV ............................................................................................................................................ 534

IPMC Parameter QI ............................................................................................................................................. 535

IPMC Parameter QRI .......................................................................................................................................... 535

IPMC Parameter LLQI ......................................................................................................................................... 536

IPMC Parameter URI .......................................................................................................................................... 536

6.22 sFlow Command ..................................................................................................................................... 538

sFlow Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 538

sFlow Receiver .................................................................................................................................................... 538

sFlow FlowSampler ............................................................................................................................................. 538

sFlow CounterPoller ............................................................................................................................................ 539

sFlow Statistics Receiver ..................................................................................................................................... 539

sFlow Statistics Samplers .................................................................................................................................... 540

6.23 VLAN Control List Command ................................................................................................................ 541

VCL MAC-based VLAN Configuration ................................................................................................................. 541
VCL MAC-based VLAN Add ................................................................................................................................ 541

VCL MAC-based VLAN Delete ............................................................................................................................ 541

VCL Stasus .......................................................................................................................................................... 542

17
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add Ethernet II ......................................................................................................... 542

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add SNAP ................................................................................................................ 542

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add LLC ................................................................................................................... 543

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete Ethernet II ..................................................................................................... 543

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete SNAP ............................................................................................................ 543

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete LLC ............................................................................................................... 544

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add ........................................................................................................................... 544

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete ....................................................................................................................... 544

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................................ 545

VCL IP-based VLAN Configuration...................................................................................................................... 545

VCL IP-based VLAN Add ..................................................................................................................................... 545

VCL IP-based VLAN Delete ................................................................................................................................ 546

6.24 SMTP Command ..................................................................................................................................... 547

SMTP Configuration ............................................................................................................................................ 547

SMTP Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 547

SMTP Server ....................................................................................................................................................... 547

SMTP Auth .......................................................................................................................................................... 548

SMTP Auth_user ................................................................................................................................................. 548

SMTP Auth_pass ................................................................................................................................................. 548

SMTP Mail From.................................................................................................................................................. 549

SMTP Mail Subject .............................................................................................................................................. 549

SMTP Mail to 1 .................................................................................................................................................... 549

SMTP Mail to 2 .................................................................................................................................................... 549

7. SWITCH OPERATION ....................................................................................................... 551

7.1 Address Table ........................................................................................................................................... 551

7.2 Learning .................................................................................................................................................... 551

7.3 Forwarding & Filtering ............................................................................................................................. 551

7.4 Store-and-Forward ................................................................................................................................... 551

7.5 Auto-Negotiation ...................................................................................................................................... 552

8. TROUBLE SHOOTING ...................................................................................................... 553

APPENDEX A ........................................................................................................................ 555

A.1 Switch's RJ-45 Pin Assignments ........................................................................................................... 555

A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100Base-TX ................................................................................................................... 555

18
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

APPENDEX B : GLOSSARY ................................................................................................. 557

19
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1. INTRODUTION

The SOLTECH Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch series –WSGW switch are all multiple ports Gigabit Ethernet Switched with

SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features; the description of these models as below:

SFC4000T : 24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch

SFC4000T-DC : 24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch / Redundant Power

Terms of “Managed Switch” means the Switches mentioned titled in the cover page of this User’s manual, i.e. SFC4000T /

SFC4000T-DC.

1.1 Packet Contents

Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain the following items:

Check the contents of your package for following parts:

 The Managed Switch x1

 User’s Manual CD x1

 Quick Installation Guide x1

 Rack Mount Accessory Kit x1

 Power Cord x1

 RubberFeet X4

 RS-232 DB9 Male Console Cable x1

 SFP Dust Caps X8

If any of these are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer immediately, if possible, retain the carton including the

original packing material, and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair.

1.2 Product Description

Cost-effective IPv6 Managed Gigabit Switch solution for SMB

Nowadays, lots of electronic products or mobile devices can browse the Internet, which means the need of IP Address

increases. However, the current IPv4 network infrastructure is not capable enough to provide IP Address to each single

users/Clients. The situation forces the ISP to build up the IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) network infrastructure speedily.

To fulfill the demand, SOLTECH releases the IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch, SFC4000 series Managed Switch.

It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions. It can work with original network structure (IPv4) and also support the
new network structure (IPv6) in the future. With easy and friendly management interfaces and plenty of management

functions included, the SFC4000 series Managed Switch is the best choice for ISP to build the IPv6 FTTx edge service and

for SMB to connect with IPv6 network.

20
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

High-Performance / Cost-effective / Telecom class Gigabit solution for Enterprise backbone and Data Center

Networking

The SOLTECH Managed Switch is a L2/L4 Managed Gigabit Switch. Since Gigabit network interface had become the basic

equipment and requirement of Enterprise and Network Servers, with 48Gbps switching fabric, the Managed Switch can

handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to a backbone or high capacity servers. The powerful

QoS and Network Security features make it to meets the needs of effective data traffic control for both Campus and Enterprise,

such VoIP, video streaming and multicast application.

High Performance

The Managed Switch provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports with 4 shared Gigabit SFP slots. It boasts a high

performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non-blocking switch fabric and wire-speed throughput as high as

48Gbps, which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increase bandwidth demands.

Robust Layer 2 Features

The Managed Switch can be programmed for basic switch management functions such as port speed configuration, Port

aggregation, VLAN, Spanning Tree protocol, QoS, bandwidth control and IGMP Snooping. The Managed Switch provides

802.1Q Tagged VLAN, Q-in-Q VLAN trunning and private VLAN, the VLAN groups allowed on the Managed Switch will be

maximally up to 255. Via supporting port aggregation, the Managed Switch allows the operation of a high-speed trunk

combining multiple ports, up to eight groups of maximum to 8-ports for trunking, and it supports fail-over as well.

Excellent Traffic Control

The Managed Switch is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms.

The functionality includes QoS features such as wire-speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular

useful for multi-tenant unit, multi business unit, Telco, or Network Service Provide applications. It also empowers the
enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance at VoIP and Video

conferencing transmission.

Efficient Management

For efficient management, the series of Managed Switch is equipped with console, WEB and SNMP management interfaces.

With its built-in Web-based management, it offers an easy-to-use, platform-independent management and configuration

facility. The Managed Switch supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and can be managed via any

standard-based management software. For text-based management, it can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port.

Powerful Security

The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. Its protection

mechanisms also comprise of port-based 802.1x and MAC-based user and device authentication. The port-security is

effective in limit the numbers of clients pass through, so that network administrators can now construct highly secured
corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before.

21
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Flexibility and Extension solution

The 4 mini-GBIC slots are compatible with 1000Base-SX/LX and WDM SFP(Small Factor Pluggable) fiber-optic modules. The

distance can be extended from 550 meters (Multi-Mode fiber) up to above 10/20/30 /40/50/70/120 kilometers (Single-Mode

fiber or WDM fiber). They are well suited for using within the enterprise data centers and distributions.

AC / DC Power Redundant to ensure continuous operation

The SFC4000T-DC Managed Switch equip with one 100~240V AC power supply unit and one DC -48V power supply unit on

its standard package, it provides redundant power supply installation. A redundant power system is also provided to enhance

the reliability with either 100~240V AC power supply unit or DC -48V power supply unit. The continuous power systems are

specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity available.

1.3 How to Use This Manual

This User Manual is structured as follows:

Section 2, INSTALLATION
The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch.

Section 3, SWITCH MANAGEMENT

The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch.

Section 4, WEB CONFIGURATION

The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface.

Section 5, COMMAND LINE INTERFACE

The section describes how to use the Command Line interface (CLI).

Section 6, CLI CONFIGURATION

The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface.

Section 7, SWITCH OPERATION

The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch.

Section 8, TROUBSHOOTING

The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch.

Appendix A

The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch.

22
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1.4 Product Features

 Physical Port

 24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45 copper

 4 100/1000Base-X mini-GBIC/SFP slots , shared with Port-21 to Port-24

 RS-232 DB9 console interface for basic management and setup

 Layer 2 Features

 Prevents packet loss with back pressure (Half-Duplex) and IEEE 802.3x PAUSE frame flow control (Full-Duplex)

 High performance of Store-and-Forward architecture and runt/CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize

the network bandwidth

 Storm Control support:

 broadcast / Unicast

 Support VLAN
 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN

 Up to 256 VLANs groups, out of 4095 VLAN IDs

 Provider Bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q) support (IEEE 802.1ad)

 Private VLAN Edge (PVE)

 Protocol-based VLAN

 MAC-based VLAN

 Voice VLAN

 Support Spanning Tree Protocol

 STP, IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol

 RSTP, IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

 MSTP, IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol, spanning tree by VLAN

 BPDU Guard

 Support Link Aggregation

 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)

 Cisco ether-channel (Static Trunk)

 Maximum 14 trunk groups, up to 8 ports per trunk group

 Up to 16Gbps bandwidth(Duplex Mode)

 Provide Port Mirror (many-to-1)

 Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port

 Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops

 Quality of Service
 8 priority queues on all switch ports
 Traffic classification:
- IEEE 802.1p CoS
- IP TOS / DSCP / IP Precedence
- IP TCP/UDP port number

23
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

- Typical network application

 Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) CoS policies
 Traffic-policing policies on the switch port
 DSCP remarking

 Multicast

 Supports IGMP Snooping v1, v2 and v3

 Support MLD Snooping v1 and v2

 Querier mode support

 IGMP Snooping port filtering

 MLD Snooping port filtering

 MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)

 Security

 IEEE 802.1x Port-Based / MAC-Based network access authentication

 Build-in RADIUS client to co-operate with the RADIUS servers

 TACACS+ login users access authentication

 RADIUS / TACACS+ users access authentication

 IP-Based Access Control List (ACL)

 MAC-Based Access Control List

 Source MAC / IP address binding

 DHCP Snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages

 Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding

 IP Source Guard prevents IP spoofing attacks

 IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder

 Management

 Switch Management Interfaces

- Console / Telnet Command Line Interface
- Web switch management
- SNMP v1, v2c, and v3 switch management
- SSH / SSL secure access
 Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events)

 IPv6 IP Address / NTP / DNS management

 Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client

 BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment

 Firmware upload/download via HTTP / TFTP

 DHCP Relay

 DHCP Option82
 User Privilege levels control

 NTP (Network Time Protocol)

24
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Protocol

 Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues
 Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default
 SOLTECH Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management

 Redundant Power System (SFC4000T-DC Only)

■ 100~240V AC / 48V DC Dual power redundant

■ Active-active redundant power failure protection

■ Backup of catastrophic power failure on one supply

■ Fault tolerance and resilience.

25
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1.5 Product Specification

Product SFC4000T / SFC4000T-DC

Hardware Specification

Hardware Version Version 2

Copper Ports 24 10/ 100/1000Base-T RJ-45 Auto-MDI/MDI-X ports

4 100/1000Base-X SFP interfaces, shared with Port-21 to Port-24

SFP/mini-GBIC Slots
Compatible with 100Base-FX SFP

Console 1 x RS-232 DB9 serial port (115200, 8, N, 1)

Switch Architecture Store-and-Forward

Switch Fabric 48Gbps / non-blocking

Throughput 35.7Mpps@64Bytes

Address Table 16K entries, automatic source address learning and ageing

Share Data Buffer 4Mbits

IEEE 802.3x Pause Frame for Full-Duplex

Flow Control
Back pressure for Half-Duplex

Jumbo Frame 9Kbytes

< 5 sec: System reboot

Reset Button
> 5 sec: Factory Default
Dimension (W x D x H) 440 x 200 x 44.5 mm, 1U high

Weight 2740g
Power, ,
LED 1000 Link/Act and 10/100 Link/Act for per Gigabit port,
1000 Speed and Link/Act for per fiber port
100~240V AC, 50/60Hz
Power Requirement
-48V DC @ 0.6A, Range: -36 ~ -60V (SFC4000T-DC Only)
Power Consumption Max 21.0 watts / 71.652BTU

ESD Protection 6KV DC

Layer 2 Function

Basic Management Interfaces Console, Telnet, Web Browser, SNMP v1, v2c

Secure Management Interfaces SSH, SSL, SNMP v3

Port disable / enable

Port Configuration Auto-Negotiation 10/100/1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection

Flow Control disable / enable

Display each port’s speed duplex mode, link status, Flow control status, Auto
Port Status
negotiation status, trunk status

TX / RX / Both
Port Mirroring
Many-to-1 monitor

VLAN 802.1Q Tagged Based VLAN, up to 256 VLAN groups

26
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Q-in-Q tunneling

Private VLAN Edge (PVE)

MAC-Based VLAN

Protocol-Based VLAN

Voice VLAN

MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)

Up to 255 VLAN groups, out of 4094 VLAN IDs
IEEE 802.3ad LACP / Static Trunk
Link Aggregation
Support 12 groups of 16-Port trunk support

Traffic classification based, Strict priority and WRR

8-Level priority for switching

QoS - Port Number

- 802.1p priority
- 802.1Q VLAN tag
- DSCP/TOS field in IP Packet
IGMP (v1/v2/v3) Snooping, up to 255 multicast Groups
IGMP Snooping
IGMP Querier mode support

MLD (v1/v2) Snooping, up to 255 multicast Groups

MLD Snooping
MLD Querier mode support

IP-Based ACL / MAC-Based ACL

Access Control List
Up to 256 entries

RFC-1213 MIB-II
IF-MIB
RFC-1493 Bridge MIB
RFC-1643 Ethernet MIB
RFC-2863 Interface MIB
RFC-2665 Ether-Like MIB
RFC-2819 RMON MIB (Group 1, 2, 3 and 9)
SNMP MIBs
RFC-2737 Entity MIB
RFC-2618 RADIUS Client MIB
RFC-2933 IGMP-STD-MIB
RFC-3411 SNMP-Frameworks-MIB
IEEE 802.1X PAE
LLDP
MAU-MIB
Standards Conformance

Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A, CE

IEEE 802.3 10Base-T

IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX/100Base-FX

IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX

Standards Compliance
IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back pressure

IEEE 802.3ad Port trunk with LACP

27
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IEEE 802.1D Spanning tree protocol

IEEE 802.1w Rapid spanning tree protocol

IEEE 802.1s Multiple spanning tree protocol

IEEE 802.1p Class of service

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging

IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network Control

IEEE 802.1ab LLDP

RFC 768 UDP

RFC 793 TFTP

RFC 791 IP

RFC 792 ICMP

RFC 2068 HTTP

RFC 1112 IGMP version 1

RFC 2236 IGMP version 2

RFC 3376 IGMP version 3

RFC 2710 MLD version 1

FRC 3810 MLD version 2

Environment

Temperature: 0 ~ 50 Degree C
Operating
Relative Humidity: 20 ~ 95% (non-condensing)
Temperature: -20 ~ 70 Degree C
Storage
Relative Humidity: 20 ~ 95% (non-condensing)

28
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

2. INSTALLATION

This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount. For easier

management and control of the Managed Switch, familiarize yourself with its display indicators, and ports. Front panel

illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch, please

read this chapter completely.

2.1 Hardware Description

2.1.1 Switch Front Panel

The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the switch. Figure 2-1 & Figure 2-2 show the front panel of the

Managed Switches.

SFC4000T Front Panel

Figure 2-1 SFC4000T front panel.

SFC4000T-DC Front Panel

Figure 2-2 SFC4000T-DC front panel.

■ Gigabit TP interface

10/100/1000Base-T Copper, RJ-45 Twist-Pair: Up to 100 meters.

■ SFP slots

100/1000Base-X mini-GBIC slot, SFP (Small Factor Pluggable) transceiver module: From 550 meters (Multi-mode fiber),

up to 10/30/50/70/120 kilometers (Single-mode fiber).

■ Reset button

At the left of front panel, the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power. The

following is the summary table of Reset button functions:

29
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Reset Button Pressed and Released Function

< 5 sec: System reboot Reboot the Managed Switch

Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration.

The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default
settings as below:
。 Default Username: admin
> 5 sec: Factory Default
。 Default Password: admin
。 Default IP address: 192.168.0.100
。 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
。 Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254

■ Console Port

The console port is a DB9, RS-232 male serial port connector. It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly. Through

the console port, it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting, factory reset, port management, link

status and system setting. Users can use the attached RS-232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the

device. After the connection, users an run any terminal emulation program (Hyper Terminal, ProComm Plus, Telix, Winterm

and so on) to enter the startup screen of the device.

2.1.2 LED Indications

The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links, data activity and system power; helps monitor and troubleshoot when

needed. Figure 2-3 shows the LED indications of these Managed Switches.

SFC4000T / SFC4000T-DC LED indication

Figure 2-3 SFC4000T / SFC4000T-DC LED for Front Panel

■ System

LED Color Function

PWR Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power.

■ Per 10/100/1000Mbps Port

LED Color Function

1000 Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed and successfully established.
Green
LNK/ACT Blink: indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

30
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

10/100 Lights to indicate the port is running in 10/100Mbps speed and successfully established.
Orange
LNK/ACT Blink: indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

■ Per 100/1000Base-X SFP Interfaces

LED Color Function

Lights to indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps.

1000 Green
Off to indicate the port is operating at 100Mbps or no link.

Lights to indicate the port is successfully established.

LNK/ACT Orange
Blink: indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.

2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel

The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket, which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC,

50-60Hz. Figure 2-4 & Figure 2-5 shows the rear panel of these Managed Switches

SFC4000T Rear Panel

Figure 2-4 Rear panel of SFC4000T

SFC4000T-DC Rear Panel

Figure 2-5 Rear panel of SFC4000T-DC

■ AC Power Receptacle

For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world, the Managed Switch’s power supply automatically adjusts

to line power in the range 100-240VAC and 50/60 Hz.

Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the Managed Switch. Plug the other

end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready.

The device is a power-required device, it means, it will not work till it is powered. If your networks should

active all the time, please consider using UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) for your device. It will

Power Notice: prevent you from network data loss or network downtime.
In some area, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from

being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter.

31
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

■ DC Power Connector

The rear panel of the SFC4000T-DC contains a power switch and a DC power connector, which accepts DC power input

voltage from -36V to -60V DC. Connect the power cable to the Managed Switch at the input terminal block. The size of the

two screws in the terminal block is M3.5.

Figure 2-6 Rear Panel of SFC4000T-DC

Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of SFC4000T-DC, ensure that the power
Warning:
switch in the “OFF” position and the DC power is OFF

2.2 Install the Switch

This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch. Please read the

following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented. To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf,

simply complete the following steps.

2.2.1 Desktop Installation

To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf, please follows these steps:

Step1: Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch.

Step2: Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source, as shown in Figure 2-7.

32
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 2-7 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop

Step3: Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects.

When choosing a location, please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1,

Section 4, and Specification.

Step4: Connect the Managed Switch to network devices.

Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10/100/1000 RJ-45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch

Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers, workstations or routers…etc.

Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ-45 tips. For more

information, please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A.

Step5: Supply power to the Managed Switch.

Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch.

Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet.

When the Managed Switch receives power, the Power LED should remain solid Green.

2.2.2 Rack Mounting

To install the Managed Switch in a 19-inch standard rack, please follows the instructions described below.

Step1: Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface, with the front panel positioned towards the front side.

33
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Step2: Attach the rack-mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package.

Figure 2-8 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch.

Figure 2-8 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch.

You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets. Damage caused to the parts by

using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty.

Step3: Secure the brackets tightly.

Step4: Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side.

Step5: After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch, use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack,

as shown in Figure 2-9.

Figure 2-9 Mounting Managed Switch in a Rack

34
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Step6: Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2.2.1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply

power to the Managed Switch.

2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver

The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot.

The SFP transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. You can plug-in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP port

without having to power down the Managed Switch. As the Figure 2-10 appears.

Figure 2-10 Plug-in the SFP transceiver

 Approved SOLTECH SFP Transceivers

SOLTECH Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi-mode SFP transceiver. The following list of approved

SOLTECH SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication:

■ SFP-SX SFP (1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver / Multi-mode / 850nm / 220m~550m)

■ SFP-LX SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / Single mode / 1310nm / 10km)

■ SFP-LXWA SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / WDM Single mode / TX: 1550nm, RX: 1310nm/ 20km)

■ SFP-LXWB SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / WDM Single mode / TX: 1310nm, RX: 1550nm / 20km)

It recommends using SOLTECH SFPs on the Managed Switch. If you insert a SFP transceiver that

is not supported, the Managed Switch will not recognize it.

Before connect the other Managed Switches, workstation or Media Converter.

1. Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type, for example: 1000Base-SX to 1000Base-SX,

1000Bas-LX to 1000Base-LX.

2. Check the fiber-optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model.
 To connect to 1000Base-SX SFP transceiver, use the Multi-mode fiber cable- with one side must be male duplex LC

connector type.

35
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 To connect to 1000Base-LX SFP transceiver, use the Single-mode fiber cable-with one side must be male duplex LC

connector type.

 Connect the fiber cable

1. Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to a device – switches with SFP installed, fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media

Converter..

3. Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch. Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating

correctly.

4. Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed. Co works with some fiber-NICs or Media Converters, set the Link

mode to “1000 Force” or “100 Force” is needed.

 Remove the transceiver module

1. Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator. Or through the management

interface of the switch/converter (if available) to disable the port in advance.

2. Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently.

3. Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal.

4. Pull out the module gently through the handle.

Figure 2-11 Pull out the SFP transceiver

Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module. Direct pull

out the module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed

Switch.

2.2.4 Connecting DC Power Supply – SFC4000T-DC

The SFC4000T-DC supports -48VDC power input, connect the power cable to the switch at the input terminal block.

36
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1. The size of the three screws in the terminal block is M3.5.

2. The terminals are marked “V+”, “V-” & “FG“.

3. Loosen the three screws so you can slide the DC cable beneath it. Insert the DC cable into the connector first, and screw

it down tight.

4. Connect the power cable to the DC power supply. After power up or reset, the Managed Switch performs a cold start

procedure.

Figure 2-20 -48VDC connector

Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of Managed Switch, ensure that the
Warning:
power switch in the “OFF” position and the DC power is OFF

37
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT

This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch. It describes the

types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your

management device (workstation or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection

options.

This chapter covers the following topics:

 Requirements

 Management Access Overview

 Administration Console Access

 Web Management Access

 SNMP Access

 Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading

3.1 Requirements
 Workstations of subscribers running Windows 2000/XP, 2003, Vista/7, 2008, MAC OS9 or later, Linux, UNIX or

other platform compatible with TCP/IP protocols.

 Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card)

 Serial Port connect (Terminal)

 Above PC with COM Port (DB9 / RS-232) or USB-to-RS-232 converter

 Ethernet Port connect

 Network cables - Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45 connectors.
 Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug-in

It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7.0 or above to access Managed Switch.

38
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

3.2 Management Access Overview

The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods:

 An administration console

 Web browser interface

 An external SNMP-based network management application

The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are

available for immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three

management methods.

Method Advantages Disadvantages

Console  No IP address or subnet needed  Must be near switch or use dial-up connection

 Text-based  Not convenient for remote users

 Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal  Modem connection may prove to be unreliable

built into Windows or slow

95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP operating

systems

 Secure

Web Browser  Ideal for configuring the switch remotely  Security can be compromised (hackers need

 Compatible with all popular browsers only know the IP address and subnet mask)

 Can be accessed from any location  May encounter lag times on poor connections

 Most visually appealing

SNMP Agent  Communicates with switch functions at  Requires SNMP manager software
the MIB level  Least visually appealing of all three methods

 Based on open standards  Some settings require calculations

 Security can be compromised (hackers need

only know the community name)

Table 3-1 Management Methods Comparison

3.3 Administration Console

The administration console is an internal, character-oriented, and command line user interface for performing system

administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings. Using this method, you can view the administration

console from a terminal, personal computer, Apple Macintosh, or workstation connected to the switch's console (serial) port.

There are two ways to use this management method: via direct access or modem port access. The following sections describe

these methods. For more information about using the console, refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console

Management.

39
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 3-1 Console management

Direct Access
Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a

terminal-emulation program (such as HyperTerminal) to the Managed Switch console (serial) port.

When using this management method, a straight DB9 RS-232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC. After

making this connection, configure the terminal-emulation program to use the following parameters:

The default parameters are:

 115200 bps

 8 data bits

 No parity

 1 stop bit

Figure 3-2 Terminal parameter settings

You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can

remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port,

regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any

40
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator

such as TIP.

3.4 Web Management

The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the

network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After you set up your IP address for the switch, you can

access the Managed Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the

Managed Switch.

Figure 3-3 Web management

You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location,
just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch's console port. Web Management requires either Microsoft

Internet Explorer 7.0 or later, Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1.5 or later.

41
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 3-4 Web main screen of Managed Switch

3.5 SNMP-Based Network Management

You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch, such as SNMPc Network

Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management (NNM) or What’s Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP

agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management

method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Net-work

management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get

community string, it can only read MIBs. The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public.

Figure 3-5 SNMP management

42
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4. WEB CONFIGURATION

This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web-Based management.

About Web-based Management

The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the

network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer.

The Web-Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7.0. It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network

bandwidth consumption, enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen.

By default, IE7.0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets. The user has to

explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports.

The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection, make sure the manager PC must be set on same the

IP subnet address with the Managed Switch.

For example, the default IP address of the SFC4000 Managed Switch is 192.168.0.100, then the manager PC should be set at
192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1 and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.

If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via console,

then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative configuration on

manager PC.

Figure 4-1-1 Web Management

43
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Logging on the switch

1. Use Internet Explorer 7.0 or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface. The

factory-default IP Address as following:

http://192.168.0.100

2. When the following login screen appears, please enter the default username "admin" with password “admin” (or the

username/password you have changed via console) to login the main screen of Managed Switch. The login screen in

Figure 4-1-2 appears.

Figure 4-1-2 Login screen

Default User name: admin

Default Password: admin

After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as Figure 4-1-3.

44
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-1-3 Default main page

Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web

interface. The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch

provides.

1. It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7.0 or above to access Managed Switch.

2. The changed IP address take effect immediately after click on the Save button, you need to

use the new IP address to access the Web interface.

3. For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.
4. Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface.

45
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.1 Main Web Page

The SFC4000 Managed Switch provides a Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing it. This interface allows

you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the Managed

Switch’s Web browser interface to configure and manage it.

Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status

Figure 4-1-4 Main Page

Help Button
Main Screen
Panel Display

The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the

ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page.

The port states are illustrated as follows:

State Disabled Down Link

RJ-45 Ports

SFP / SFP+ Ports

Main Menu

Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the Managed Switch, and all its ports, or

monitor network conditions. Via the Web-Management, the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions
those listed in the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-1-5 appears.

46
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-1-5 Managed Switch Main Functions Menu

47
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2 System
Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under System the

following topics are provided to configure and view the system information: This section has the following items:

■ System Information The switch system information is provided here.

■ IP Configuration Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page.

■ IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch-managed IPv6 information on this page.

■ Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way

to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the

browser.

■ Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.

■ NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page.

■ UPnP Configure UPnP on this page.

■ DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page.

■ DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.

■ CPU Load This page displays the CPU load, using a SVG graph.

■ System Log The switch system log information is provided here.

■ Detailed Log The switch system detailed log information is provided here.

■ Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page.

■ SMTP Configuration Configuration SMTP parameters on this page.

■ Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch.

■ TFTP Firmware Upgrade Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server

■ Configuration Backup You can save the switch configuration. The configuration file is in XML format

with a hierarchy of tags.

■ Configuration Upload You can load the switch configuration. The configuration file is in XML format
with a hierarchy of tags.

■ Image Select Configuration active or alternate firmware on this page.

■ Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page. Only the IP

configuration is retained.

■ System Reboot You can restart the stack switch on this page. After restart, the stack switch
will boot normally.

48
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2.1 System Information

The System Info page provides information for the current device information. System Info page helps a switch administrator to

identify the hardware MAC address, software version and system uptime. The screen in Figure 4-2-1 appears.

Figure 4-2-1 System Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Contact The system contact configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Contact.

 Name The system name configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Name.

 Location The system location configured in Configuration | System | Information | System

Location.

 MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch.

 Power Status Indicate AC / DC power supply input of this switch.

 Temperature Indicate main chipset temperature.

 System Date The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the

configured SNTP Server, if any.

 System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational.

 Software Version The software version of the switch.

 Software Date The date when the switch software was produced.

49
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.

4.2.2 IP Configuration

The IP Configuration includes the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway. The Configured column is used to view or change the

IP configuration. Fill up the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device. The screen in Figure 4-2-2 appears.

Figure 4-2-2 IP Configuration page screenshot

The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration.

Object Description

 DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If DHCP fails and the configured IP

address is zero, DHCP will retry. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is

non-zero, DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used. The DHCP client

will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup.

 IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation.

 IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation.

 IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation.

 VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID. The allowed range is 1 through 4095.

 DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.

50
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled, DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured

DNS server on DUT, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to renew DHCP. This button is only available if DHCP is enabled.

4.2.3 IPv6 Configuration

Configure the switch-managed IPv6 information on this page.

The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration. The Current column is used to show the active IPv6

configuration. The screen in Figure 4-2-3 appears.

Figure 4-2-3 IPv6 Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto-configuration by checking this box. If fails, the configured IPv6

address is zero. The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few

seconds, the total time needed to complete auto-configuration can be

significantly longer.

 Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records

represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is

a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple

16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a

following legally IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

51
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch. The allowed range is 1 through 128.

 Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit

records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is

a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple

16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a

following legally IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

Provide the IPv6 SNTP Server address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit

records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is

a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple

16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a

following legally IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to renew IPv6 AUTOCONF. This button is only available if IPv6 AUTOCONF is enabled.

4.2.4 Users Configuration

This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to
close and reopen the browser. After setup completed, please press “Save” button to take effect. Please login web interface with
new user name and password, the screen in Figure 4-2-4 appears.

Figure 4-2-4 Users Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

52
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 User Name The name identifying the user. This is also a link to Add/Edit User.

 Privilege Level The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level

value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the

device. But others value need to refer to each group privilege level. User's

privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the

access of that group. By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the

read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access. And the

system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need user

privilege level 15. Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an

administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege

level 5 for a guest account.

Buttons

: Click to add a new user.

Add / Edit User

This page configures a user – add, edit or delete user.

Figure 4-2-5 Add / Edit User Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Username A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed

string length is 1 to 32. The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers

and underscores.

 Password The password of the user. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.

 Privilege Level The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level
value is 15, it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the

device. But others value need to refer to each group privilege level. User's

53
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the

access of that group. By default setting, most groups privilege level 5 has the

read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access. And the

system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need user

privilege level 15. Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an

administrator account, privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege

level 5 for a guest account.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users.

: Delete the current user. This button is not available for new configurations (Add new user)

Once the new user is added, the new user entry shown in the Users Configuration page.

Figure 4-2-6 User Configuration page screenshot

After change the default password, if you forget the password. Please press the “Reset” button
in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release, the current setting
includes VLAN, will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode.

4.2.5 Privilege Levels

This page provides an overview of the privilege levels. After setup completed, please press “Save” button to take effect. Please
login web interface with new user name and password, the screen in Figure 4-2-7 appears.

54
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-7 Privilege Levels Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Group Name The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group

consists of a single module (e.g. LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them
contains more than one. The following description defines these privilege level

groups in details:

55
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Log.

Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port,

MAC based and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection

and IP source guard.

IP: Everything except 'ping'.

Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.

Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.

Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password,

Configuration Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web- Users,

Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance.

Debug: Only present in CLI.

 Privilege Level Every privilege level group has an authorization level for the following sub

groups: configuration read-only, configuration/execute read-write,

status/statistics read-only, status/statistics read-write (e.g. for clearing of

statistics).

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.6 NTP Configuration

Configure NTP on this page.

NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems. NTP
uses UDP (data grams) as transport layer. You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone. The NTP Configuration
screen in Figure 4-2-8 appears.

56
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-8 NTP Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable NTP mode operation. When enable NTP mode operation, the

agent forward and to transfer NTP messages between the clients and the server

when they are not on the same subnet domain.

Disabled: Disable NTP mode operation.

 Time Zone Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch.

 Server # Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit

records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is

a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple

16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a

following legally IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.7 UPnP

Configure UPnP on this page.

UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to

simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in corporate

environments for simplified installation of computer components. The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-9 appears.

Figure 4-2-9 UPnP Configuration page screenshot

57
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.

Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.

When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP

related packets to CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is

disabled.

 TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages. Valid

values are in the range 1 to 255.

 Advertising Duration The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control

points how often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from

this switch. If a control point does not receive any message within the duration, it
will think that the switch no longer exists. Due to the unreliable nature of UDP, in

the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be

done at less than one-half of the advertising duration. In the implementation, the

switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one-half of the

advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid values are in the range 100 to

86400.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

58
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-10 UPnP devices shows on Windows My Network Places

4.2.8 DHCP Relay

Configure DHCP Relay on this page. DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and

the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.

The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding

client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server

DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment

policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options:

 Circuit ID (option 1)

 Remote ID (option2).

The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on.

The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.

The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The parameter of
"vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for the module ID (in

standalone switch it always equal 0, in stackable switch it means switch ID). The parameter of "port_no" is the fourth byte and it

means the port number.

59
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value is equal the DHCP relay agent’s MAC address. The DHCP Relay

Configuration screen in Figure 4-2-11 appears.

Figure 4-2-11 DHCP Relay Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When enable DHCP relay mode

operation, the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the

clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain. And the

DHCP broadcast message won't flood for security considered.

Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.

 Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address. A DHCP relay agent is used to

forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server

when they are not on the same subnet domain.

 Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. Possible modes

Mode are:

Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When enable DHCP

relay information mode operation, the agent insert specific information (option82)

into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a

DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client. It only works under DHCP

relay operation mode enabled.

Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.

 Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When enable DHCP relay

Policy information mode operation, if agent receive a DHCP message that already

contains relay agent information. It will enforce the policy. And it only works under

DHCP relay information operation mode enabled. Possible policies are:

Replace: Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message

that already contains it.

Keep: Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that

already contains it.

60
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Drop: Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains

relay information.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.9 DHCP Relay Statistics

This page provides statistics for DHCP relay. The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4-2-12 appears.

Figure 4-2-12 DHCP Relay Statistics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Server Statistics

Object Description

 Transmit to Server The packets number that relayed from client to server.

 Transmit Error The packets number that errors sending packets to clients.

 Receive from Server The packets number that received packets from server.

 Receive Missing Agent The packets number that received packets without agent information options.

Option

 Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which the Circuit ID option was

Circuit ID missing.

 Receive Missing The packets number that received packets which Remote ID option was missing.

Remote ID

 Receive Bad Circuit ID The packets number that the Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID.

 Receive Bad Remote The packets number that the Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID.

ID

61
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Client Statistics

Object Description

 Transmit to Client The packets number that relayed packets from server to client.

 Transmit Error The packets number that error sending packets to servers.

 Receive from Client The packets number that received packets from server.

 Receive Agent Option The packets number that received packets with relay agent information option.

 Replace Agent Option The packets number that replaced received packets with relay agent information

option.

 Keep Agent Optin The packets number that keepped received packets with relay agent information

option.

 Drop Agent Option The packets number that dropped received packets with relay agent information

option.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clear all statistics.

4.2.10 CPU Load

This page displays the CPU load, using a SVG graph.

The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms, 1sec and 10 seconds intervals. The last 120 samles are graphed, and

the last numbers are displayed as text as well.

In order to display the SVG graph, your browser must support the SVG format. Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on

browser support. Specifically, at the time of writing, Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support

SVG. The CPU Load screen in Figure 4-2-13 appears.

62
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-13 CPU Load page screenshot

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

If your browser can not displies anythings in this page, please download Adobe SVG tool and
install it in your computer.

4.2.11 System Log

The switch system log information is provided here. The System Log screen in Figure 4-2-14 appears.

Figure 4-2-14 System Log page screenshot

63
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 ID The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.

 Level The level of the system log entry. The following level types are supported:

Info: Information level of the system log.

Warning: Warning level of the system log.

Error: Error level of the system log.

All: All levels.

 Clear Level To clear the system log entry level. The following level types are supported:

Info: Information level of the system log.

Warning: Warning level of the system log.

Error: Error level of the system log.

All: All levels.

 Time The time of the system log entry.

 Message The message of the system log entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the system log entries, starting from the current entry ID.

: Flushes the selected log entries.

: Hides the selected log entries.

: Downloads the selected log entries.

: Updates the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

: Updates the system log entries, starting from the last entry currently displayed.

: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID.

4.2.12 Detailed Log

The switch system detailed log information is provided here. The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4-2-15 appears.

64
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-15 Detailed Log page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 ID The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.

 Message The message of the system log entry.

Buttons

: Download the system log entry to the current entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID.

: Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID.

: Print the system log entry to the current entry ID.

4.2.13 Remote Syslog

Configure remote syslog on this page. The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4-2-16 appears.

65
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-16 Remote Syslog page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the

syslog message will send out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on

UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not

send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and

it does not provide acknowledgments. The syslog packet will always send out

even if the syslog server does not exist. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable remote syslog mode operation.

Disabled: Disable remote syslog mode operation.

 Syslog Server IP Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch provide DNS

feature, it also can be a host name.

 Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server. Possible modes are:

Info: Send informations, warnings and errors.

Warning: Send warnings and errors.

Error: Send errors.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.2.14 SMTP Configuration

This page facilitates a SMTP Configure the switch. The SMTP Configure screen in Figure 4-2-17 appears.

66
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-17 SMTP Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 SMTP Mode Controls whether SMTP is enabled on this switch.

 SMTP Server Type the SMTP server name or the IP address of the SMTP server.

 SMTP Port Set port number of SMTP service.

 SMTP Authentication Controls whether SMTP authentication is enabled If authentication is required

when an e-mail is sent.

 Authentication User
Type the user name for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable.
Name

 Authentication
Type the password for the SMTP server if Authentication is Enable.
Password

 E-mail From Type the sender’s E-mail address. This address is used for reply e-mails.

 E-mail Subject Type the subject/title of the e-mail.

 E-mail 1 To
Type the receiver’s e-mail address.
 E-mail 2 To

Buttons

: Send a test mail to mail server to check this account is available or not.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

67
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2.15 Web Firmware Upgrade

This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch. The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-2-18

appears.

Figure 4-2-18 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot

To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling:

1. Click System -> Web Firmware Upgrade.

2. The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4-2-18.

3. Click the “ “button of the main page, the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware.

4. Select on the firmware then click “ ”, the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status.

5. Once the software be loaded to the system successfully. The following screen appears. The system will load the new

software after reboot.

Figure 4-2-19 Software successfully loaded notice screen

DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete.

Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the “OK” button - after the image be
loaded. Or the system won’t apply the new firmware. User has to repeat the firmware

upgrade processes again.

68
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2.16 TFTP Firmware Upgrade

The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP

server in the network. Before updating, make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP

server. The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-2-20 appears.

Figure 4-2-20 TFTP Firmware Update page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address.

 Firmware File Name The name of firmware image.

(Maximum length : 24 characters)

Buttons

: Click to upgrade firmware.

DO NOT Power OFF the Managed Switch until the update progress is complete.

Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the “OK” button - after the image be

loaded. Or the system won’t apply the new firmware. User has to repeat the firmware

upgrade processes again.

4.2.17 Configuration Backup

This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The

Configuration Backup screen in Figure 4-2-21 appears.

69
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-21 Configuration Save page screenshot

You can save/view or load the switch configuration. The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags:

Header tags: <?xml version="1.0"?> and <configuration>. These tags are mandatory and must be present

at the beginning of the file.

Section tags: <platform>, <global> and <switch>. The platform section must be the first section tag and

this section must include the correct platform ID and version. The global section is optional

and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports. The switch section is

optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports.

Module tags: <ip>, <mac>, <port> etc. These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the

configuration.

Group tags: <port_table>, <vlan_table> etc. These tags identify a group of parameters, typically a table.

Parameter tags: <mode>, <entry> etc. These tags identify parameters for the specific section, module and

group. The <entry> tag is used for table entries.

Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values. When saving the configuration from the switch, the entire

configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file. The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a

switch.

The examples below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning

mode per port. When loading this file, only the included parameters will be changed. This means that the age time will be set to

200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic.

 Save Configuration

1. Press the “Save Configuration” button to save the current configuration in manager workstation. The following screens in

Figure 4-2-22 & 4-2-23 appear

70
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-2-22 File Download screen

2. Chose the file save path in management workstation.

Figure 4-2-23 File save screen

4.2.18 Configuration Upload

This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The

71
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Configuration Upload screen in Figure 4-2-24 appears.

Figure 4-2-24 Configuration Upload page screenshot

 Configuration Upload

1. Click the “ ” button of the main page, the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved

configuration.

Figure 4-2-25 Windows file selection menu popup

2. Select on the configuration file then click “ ”, the bottom of the browser shows the upload status.

3. After down, the main screen appears “Transfer Completed”.

72
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2.19 Image Select

This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in the device, and allows you to revert

to the alternate image. The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images. The

Image Select screen in Figure 4-2-26 appears.

1. In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image" table is shown.

In this case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.

2. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual

intervention), uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary

image slot and activate this.

3. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases. This does

not constitute an error.

Figure 4-2-26 Software Image Selection page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Image The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary (preferred)

image is image, the alternate image is named image.bk.

 Version The version of the firmware image.

 Date The date where the firmware was produced.

Buttons

: Click to use the alternate image. This button may be disabled depending on system state.

73
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Cancel activating the backup image. Navigates away from this page.

4.2.20 Factory Default

You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained. The new configuration is

available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary. The Factory Default screen in Figure 4-2-27 appears.

Figure 4-2-27 Factory Default page screenshot

Buttons

: Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.

: Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration.

To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting, you can also press the hardware reset button

at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device be rebooted. You can login the management WEB

interface within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.

Hardware Reset button

74
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.2.21 System Reboot

The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location. Once the Reboot button is pressed, user have to

re-login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later, the System Reboot screen in Figure 4-2-28 appears.

Figure 4-2-28 System Reboot page screenshot

Buttons

: Click to reboot the system.

: Click to return to the Port State page without reboot the system.

You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not. If the SYS LED is blinking,

then it is in the firmware load stage; if the SYS LED light on, you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch.

75
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.3 Simple Network Management Protocol

4.3.1 SNMP Overview

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management

information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite.

SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network

growth.

An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components: Network management stations (NMSs), SNMP agents,
Management information base (MIB) and network-management protocol：

。 Network management stations (NMSs)：Sometimes called consoles, these devices execute management applications

that monitor and control network elements. Physically, NMSs are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers with

fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk space. At least one NMS must be present in

each managed environment.

。 Agents：Agents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect and store management information

such as the number of error packets received by a network element.

。 Management information base (MIB)：A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store.

Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules.

。 network-management protocol：A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents

and NMSs. SNMP is the Internet community's de facto standard management protocol.

SNMP Operations

SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response.

。 Get -- Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent.

。 Set -- Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent.
。 Trap -- Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to

replace the SNMPv1 trap message.

SNMP community

An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where

information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one

SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities. SNMP

default communities are:

。 Write = private

。 Read = public

Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's SNMP function. This section has the following items:

 System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page.

 Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page.

 System Information The system information is provides here.

76
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page.

 SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page.

 SNMPv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page.

 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page.

 SNMPv3 Accesses Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page.

4.3.2 SNMP System Configuration

Configure SNMP on this page. The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-1 appears.

Figure 4-3-1 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.

 Version Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:

SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.

SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.

SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.

 Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent.

The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII

characters from 33 to 126.

The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If

SNMP version is SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3

communities table. It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a

SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string. In addition to community string, a

particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet.

 Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent.

77
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII

characters from 33 to 126.

The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If

SNMP version is SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3

communities table. It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a

SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string. In addition to community string, a

particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet.

 Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number

between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.

Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.

4.3.3 SNMP Trap Configuration

Configure SNMP trap on this page. The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-2 appears.

Figure 4-3-2 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.

 Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.

SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.

78
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SNMP v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.

 Trap Community Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet. The

allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters

from 33 to 126.

 Trap Destination Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allow a valid IP address in dotted

Address decimal notation ('x.y.z.w').

And it also allow a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the

alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first

character must be an alpha character, and the first and last characters must not

be a dot or a dash.

 Trap Destination IPv6 Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit

Address records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separating each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::'

is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple

16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can appear only once. It can also

represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

 Trap Authentication Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps.

Failure Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.

 Trap Link-up and Indicates the SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation. Possible modes

Link-down are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.

 Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation.

 Trap Inform Timeout Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to 2147.

(seconds)

 Trap Inform Retry Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to 255.

Times

 Trap Probe Security Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible

Engine ID values are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.

 Trap Security Engine Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs

ID using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and
informs is needed. When "Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will

be probed automatically. Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The

79
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits

between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.

 Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM

for authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and

informs are enabled.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.4 SNMP System Information

The switch system information is provided here. The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4-3-3 appears.

Figure 4-3-3 System Information Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together

with information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to

255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.

 System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is

the node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn

from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are

permitted as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha character. And

the first or last character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0

to 255.

 System Location The physical location of this node(e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32

to 126.

80
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5 SNMPv3 Configuration

4.3.5.1 SNMPv3 Communities

Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page. The entry index key is Community. The SNMPv3 Communities screen in

Figure 4-3-4 appears.

Figure 4-3-4 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The

allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from

33 to 126. The community string will be treated as security name and map a

SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string.

 Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source

addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source

mask.

 Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.

Buttons

: Click to add a new community entry.

: Click to save changes.

81
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.2 SNMPv3 Users

Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page. The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name. The SNMPv3 Users screen in

Figure 4-3-5 appears.

Figure 4-3-5 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The

string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits

between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3

architecture uses the User-based Security Model (USM) for message security

and the View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for access control. For the

USM entry, the usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are the entry's keys. In a

simple agent, usmUserEngineID is always that agent's own snmpEngineID

value. The value can also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a remote SNMP

engine with which this user can communicate. In other words, if user engine ID

equal system engine ID then it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.

 User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed

string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to

126.

 Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security

models are:

NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.

Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.

Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.

The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That means

must first ensure that the value is set correctly.

 Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible

Protocol authentication protocol are:

82
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

None: None authentication protocol.

MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication

protocol.

SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol.

The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That means

must first ensure that the value is set correctly.

 Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For MD5 authentication

Password protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the

allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is the ASCII characters from

33 to 126.

 Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy

protocol are:

None: None privacy protocol.

DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol.

 Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32,
and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

: Click to add a new user entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.3 SNMPv3 Groups

Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page. The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name. The SNMPv3

Groups screen in Figure 4-3-6 appears.

Figure 4-3-6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot

83
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security

models are:

v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.

v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.

usm: User-based Security Model (USM).

 Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to.

The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII

characters from 33 to 126.

 Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.

The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII

characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

: Click to add a new group entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.4 SNMPv3 Views

Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree. The SNMPv3 Views

screen in Figure 4-3-7 appears.

Figure 4-3-7 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

84
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed

string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33

to 126.

 View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view type are:

included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.

excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.

General, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', it should be exist another view

entry which view type is 'included' and it's OID subtree overstep the 'excluded'

view entry.

 OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed

OID length is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk(*).

Buttons

: Click to add a new view entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.3.5.5 SNMPv3 Access

Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model and Security Level.

The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4-3-8 appears.

Figure 4-3-8 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed

string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33
to 126.

85
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security

models are:

any: Accepted any security model (v1|v2c|usm).

v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.

v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.

usm: User-based Security Model (USM)

 Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security

models are:

NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.

Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.

Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.

 Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may

request the current values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed

content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may
potentially SET new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed

content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

: Click to add a new access entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

86
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.4 Port Management

Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's ports. This section has the following items:

 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings

 Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics

 Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics

 SFP Module Information Display SFP information

 Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring

4.4.1 Port Configuration

This page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here. The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-4-1

appears.

Figure 4-4-1 Port Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port This is the logical port number for this row.

 Port Description Indicates the per port description.

 Link The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and
red that it is down.

87
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port.

 Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to

select the mode.

 Auto - Setup Auto negotiation for copper interface.

 10Mbps HDX - Force sets 10Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.

 10Mbps FDX - Force sets 10Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.

 100Mbps HDX - Force sets 100Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.

 100Mbps FDX - Force sets 100Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.

 1Gbps FDX - Force sets 10000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.

 Disable - Shutdown the port manually.

 Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control

capability that is advertised to the link partner.

When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx

column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the Current

Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx

and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.

Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the

setting for Configured Link Speed.

 Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS. The

allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.

 Excessive Collision Configure port transmit collision behavior.

Mode  Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).

 Restart: Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions.

 Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per

port. The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode

parameters per port.

 Disabled: All power savings mechanisms disabled.

 ActiPHY: Link down power savings enabled.

 Dynamic: Link up power savings enabled.

 Enabled: Link up and link down power savings enabled.

When set each port to run at 100M Full, 100M Half, 10M Full, and 10M Half-speed modes. The

Auto-MDIX function will disable.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.

88
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.4.2 Port Statistics Overview

This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports. The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure

4-4-2 appears.

Figure 4-4-2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot

The displayed counters are:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

 Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port.

 Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.

 Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete

transmissions per port.

 Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.

 Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for all ports.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

89
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.4.3 Port Statistics Detail

This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select which switch port details

to display. The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header. The displayed counters

are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and transmit, and the error counters for receive and transmit.

The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4-4-3 appears.

Figure 4-4-3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Receive Total and Transmit Total

Object Description

 Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets

 Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but

excludes framing bits.

 Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.

 Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.

90
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.

 Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have

an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.

Receive and Transmit Size Counters

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on their respective frame

sizes.

Receive and Transmit Queue Counters

The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.

Receive Error Counters

Object Description

 Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress

congestion.

 Rx CRC/Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.

 Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC.

 Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC.

 Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC.

 Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC.

 Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.

Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum
frame length for this port.

1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.

2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port.

Transmit Error Counters

Object Description

 Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.

 Tx Late/Exc. Coll. The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.

91
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for all ports.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.4.4 SFP Information

You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page. This page shows the

operational status, such as the transceiver type, speed, and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific

interface. You can also use the hyperlink of port no. to check the statistics on a speficic interface. The SFP Module Information

screen in Figure 4-4-4 appears.

Figure 4-4-4 SFP Module Information for Switch page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Type Display the type of current SFP module, the possible types are:

 1000Base-SX
 1000Base-LX
 100Base-FX
 Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module, the speed value or description is get

from the SFP module. Different vendors SFP modules might shows different

speed information.

 Wave Length(nm) Display the wavelength of current SFP module, the wavelength value is get from

the SFP module. Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes

are the matched while the fiber connection is failed.

 Distance(m) Display the supports distance of current SFP module, the distance value is get

from the SFP module.

92
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.4.5 Port Mirror

Configure port Mirroring on this page. This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming

or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied. It enables the manager to

keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary.

 To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be
attached to analyze the frame flow.

 The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol
analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.

Figure 4-4-5 Port Mirror application

The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:

 All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).

 All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).

 Mirror Port Configuration

The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4-4-6 appears.

93
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-4-6 Mirror Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port to mirror on Frames from ports that have either source (rx) or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are

mirrored to this port. Disabled disables mirroring.

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

 Mode Select mirror mode.

Rx only: Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port. Frames

transmitted are not mirrored.

Tx only: Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port. Frames

received are not mirrored.

Disabled: Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored.

Enabled: Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port.

94
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on

the mirror port. Because of this, mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

95
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.5 Link Aggregation

Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs). Port

Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy.

Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG, can be of different media types

(UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types), provided they operate at the same speed.

Aggregated Links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol

(LACP) on the relevant links.

Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes

to a non-aggregated port, including auto-negotiation, speed, Duplex setting, etc.

The device supports the following Aggregation links :

 Static LAGs (Port Trunk) – Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group.

 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP

ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG

between them.

Figure 4-5-1 Link Aggregation

96
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner

Systems that require high speed redundant links. Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single

dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network. LACP operation requires full-duplex mode,

more detail information refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.

Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Link

aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other

Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the Link aggregation Configuration

menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:

 The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ-45, 100 Mbps fiber).

 The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions (see below).

 Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation.

 The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports.

 None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port.

 All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.

 The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole.

 Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop.

 Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to
avoid creating a data loop.

It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to 5

groups). If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby

mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group, then the

number of ports must be the same as the group member ports.

The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow (for example, a TCP connection) are always
forwarded on the same link aggregation member port. Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible. The

aggregation code is based on the following information:

 Source MAC

 Destination MAC

 Source and destination IPv4 address.

 Source and destination TCP/UDP ports for IPv4 packets

Normally, all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link

aggregation member ports. Each link aggregation may consist of up to 10 member ports. Any quantity of link aggregation s may

be configured for the device (only limited by the quantity of ports on the device.) To configure a proper traffic distribution, the

ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed.

97
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.5.1 Static Aggregation

This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group. The aggregation hash mode settings are

global, whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.

Hash Code Contributors

The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4-5-2 appears.

Figure 4-5-2 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the

frame. Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to

disable. By default, Source MAC Address is enabled.

 Destination MAC The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for

Address the frame. Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck

to disable. By default, Destination MAC Address is disabled.

 IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check

to enable the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address

is enabled.

 TCP/UDP Port Number The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the

frame. Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to

disable. By default, TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.

Static Aggregation Group Configuration

The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4-5-3 appears.

98
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-5-3 Aggregation Group Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

.Object Description

 Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID

"Normal" indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.

 Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port

in an aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the

aggregation. By default, no ports belong to any aggregation group.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.2 LACP Configuration

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a

different device. LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the

same LAG.

This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The LACP port
settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header. The LACP Configuration screen in Figure

4-5-4 appears.

99
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-5-4 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number.

 LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an

aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner. LACP can

form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2G LAGs per stack.

 Key The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the

key as appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3.

Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the

same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group, while ports with

different keys cannot.

The default setting is “Auto”

 Role The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets

100
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

each second, while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if

spoken to).

 Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast will transmit

LACP packets each second, while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a

LACP packet.

 Priority The Prio controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a

larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control

which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role. Lower number

means greater priority.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.5.3 LACP System Status

This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances. The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation

Groups and LACP Port status. The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4-5-5 appears.

Figure 4-5-5 LACP System Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.

For LLAG the id is shown as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'

 Partner System ID The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.

 Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.

 Last changed The time since this aggregation changed.

 Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch/stack.
The format is: "Switch ID:Port".

101
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.5.4 LACP Port Status

This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports. The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4-5-6 appears.

Figure 4-5-6 LACP Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number.

 LACP 'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is

not enabled or that the port link is down. 'Backup' means that the port could not

join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves. Meanwhile it's LACP

status is disabled.

 Key The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate
together.

 Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.

102
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Partner System ID The partner’s System ID (MAC address).

 Partner Port The partner’s port number connected to this port.

 Partner Priority The partner's port priority.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.5.5 LACP Port Statistics

This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports. The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-5-7 appears.

Figure 4-5-7 LACP Statistics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number.

 LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.

 LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.

103
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each

port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for all ports.

104
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.6 VLAN

4.6.1 VLAN Overview

A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical

layout. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single

LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between

ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily.

VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.

A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with

each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be

equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the

broadcast was initiated.

1. No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN

membership, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing

function between the VLAN.

2. The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can be used

to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are

tag-unaware.

3. The Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN.

As new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from

the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list. The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.

This section has the following items:

 VLAN Basic Information Displaies VLAN information

 VLAN Port Configuration Enable VLAN group

 VLAN Memberships Configures the VLAN membership

 VLAN Membership Status Display VLAN membership status

 VLAN Port Status Display VLAN port status

 Private VLAN Creates/removes primary or community VLANs

 Port Isolation Enable/disable port isolation on port

 MAC-based VLAN Configures the MAC-based VLAN entries

 MAC-based VLAN Status Displaies MAC-based VLAN entries

 IP-based VLAN Configures the IP-based VLAN entries

 Protocol-based VLAN Configures the protocol-based VLAN entries

 Protocol-based VLAN Displaies the protocol-based VLAN entries

105
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Membership

4.6.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This Managed Switch

provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains.

VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks. This also

provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.

An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong

to the same physical segment.

VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any

physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups

(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).

VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having

to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through

a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.

This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features:

 Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard

 Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs

 End stations can belong to multiple VLANs

 Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices

 Priority tagging

■ IEEE 802.1Q Standard

IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the

entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).

VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only

be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast,

multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.

VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are

members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging.:

 The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags

in packet headers.

 The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and

allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally.

106
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Some relevant terms:

- Tagging - The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet.

- Untagging - The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header.

■ 802.1Q VLAN Tags

The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address. Their

presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the

packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority,

1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet

backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is

used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.

The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. All of the information originally contained

in the packet is retained.

802.1Q Tag

User Priority CFI VLAN ID (VID)

3 bits 1 bits 12 bits

TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) TCI (Tag Control Information)

2 bytes 2 bytes

Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS

Address Address Type

6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46-1500 bytes 4 bytes

The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original Ether Type/Length or Logical

Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be

recalculated.

Adding an IEEE802.1Q Tag

Dest. Addr. Src. Addr. Length/E. type Data Old CRC Original Ethernet
Packet

Dest. Addr. Src. Addr. E. type Tag Length/E. type Data New CRC

New Tagged Packet

Priority CFI VLAN ID

107
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

■ Port VLAN ID
Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network

device to another with the VLAN information intact. This allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices (and indeed, the entire

network – if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).

Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the switch. If no VLAN are

defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the

PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID, in so far as VLAN are concerned.

Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the

PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, the VID is.

Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network. The switch will compare the VID of

a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the

packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware

network devices can coexist on the same network.

A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them.

Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before

packets are transmitted – should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a

tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet

should be tagged.

■ Default VLANs
The Switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to

the "default". As new VLAN are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."

■ Assigning Ports to VLANs

Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default

all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more

VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports

on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or

dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the

intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to

the VLAN as an untagged port.

VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network interconnection

devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that

does not support VLAN tagging.

108
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

■ VLAN Classification
When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the

frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses

the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.

■ Port Overlapping
Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as

file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect

them by enabled routing on this switch.

■ Untagged VLANs
Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users

assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are

forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user

groups or subnets.

4.6.3 VLAN Basic Information

The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch.

The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4-6-1 appears.

Figure 4-6-1 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch

 Port-Based

 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

 Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch.

 Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch.

Supported VLANs

109
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Current number of Display the current number of VLANs

VLANs

 VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode. The Managed Switch supports IVL (IVL

Independent vlan learning).

 Configurable PVID Indicates whether or not configurable PVID tagging is implemented.

Tagging

4.6.4 VLAN Port Configuration

This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN. The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for

managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page. All

untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.

Understand nomenclature of the Switch

■ IEEE 802.1Q Tagged and Untagged

Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.

 Tagged: Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the

header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port

will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN information intact. The VLAN information in the

tag can then be used by other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make

packet-forwarding decisions.

 Untagged: Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into those

ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter the packet. Thus,

all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1Q VLAN

information. (Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is

used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network

device.

Frame Income
Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged
Frame Leave

Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted

Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged

Table 4-6-1 Ingress/Egress port with VLAN VID Tag/Untag table

■ IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q)

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks.

110
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers

use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer’s

frames when they enter the service provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.

A service provider’s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported.

VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing

through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer

configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of

4096.

The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge,

aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN (Metro Access Network) space. One of the
purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used

independent of the customers’ VLANs. This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering

the MAN. When leaving the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is again available.

This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering

with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used

for service provider tags.

In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the learning can be disabled for the particular

VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table

requirements is reduced.

VLAN Port Configuration

The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-2 appears.

111
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-6-2 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port This is the logical port number for this row.

 PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port. The range for the PVID is 1-4094.

The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port. The

PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group, or the

untagged traffic will be dropped.

Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box. This parameter affects

VLAN ingress processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not

a member of the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is discarded. By default,

ingress filtering is disabled (no checkmark).

 Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This

parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged

112
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

frames, untagged frames received on the port are discarded. By default, the field

is set to All.

 Link Type Allow 802.1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port.

When adding a VLAN to selected port, it tells the switch whether to keep or

remove the tag from a frame on egress.

- Untag: outgoing frames without VLAN-Tagged.

- Tagged: outgoing frames with VLAN-Tagged.

 Q-in-Q Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode, and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be

configured. The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode.

- Disable: The port operates in its normal VLAN mode. (This is the default.)

- MAN Port: Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) for an uplink port to

another device within the service provider network.

- Customer Port: Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) for a client access

port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the

service provider network.

Set Out layer VLAN tag The Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on

ether type a tunnel access port.

- 802.1Q Tag: 8100

- vMAN Tag: 88A8

Default : 802.1Q Tag

The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.6.5 VLAN Membership

 Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)

Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index. The VLAN membership configuration for the
selected stack switch / unit switch can be monitored and modified here. Up to 255 VLANs are supported. This page allows for

adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN. The VLAN Membership screen in

113
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-6-3 appears.

Figure 4-6-3 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete To delete a VLAN entry, check this box.

The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save.

 VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.

 VLAN Name Indicates the name of the VLAN. Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is

32. VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers. VLAN name should

contain atleast one alphabet. VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN

entries or it can be added to the new entries.

 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.

To include a port in a VLAN, check the box as .

To include a port in a forbidden port list, check the box as shown .

To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked

as shown .
By default, no ports are members, and for every new VLAN entry all boxes are

unchecked.

 Adding a New VLAN Click “Add New VLAN” to add a new VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the

table, and the VLAN can be configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID

are 1 through 4095.

The VLAN is enabled when you click on "Save". The “Delete” button can be used

to undo the addition of new VLANs.

Buttons

: Click to add new VLAN.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

114
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN ID" input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.6.6 VLAN Membership Status

This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users. The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4-6-4

appears.

Figure 4-6-4 VLAN Membership Status for Static User page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN User A VLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management

functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such

as PVID, UVID. Currently we support following VLAN :

- CLI/Web/SNMP : This are reffered as static.

- NAS : NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves

communications between a Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication

Server.

- Voice VLAN : Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic

typically originating from IP phones.

- MVR : MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for

subscribers in each VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a
single (multicast) VLAN.

- MSTP : The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to

115
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

create multiple spanning trees in a network, which significantly improves

network resource utilization while maintaining a loop-free environment.

 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.

If a port is included in a VLAN, an image will be displayed.

If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image will be displayed.

If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register

VLAN on same Forbidden port, then conflict port will be displayed as conflict port.

 VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members

for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by

a Combo Box). When ALL VLAN Users are selected, it shall show this

information for all the VLAN Users, and this is by default. VLAN membership

allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective

VLAN member ports.

Buttons

: Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.6.7 VLAN Port Status

This page provides VLAN Port Staus. The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4-6-5 appears.

116
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-6-5 VLAN Port Status for Static User page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

 PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port. The allowed values are 1 through 4095.

The default value is 1.

 Port Type Show the VLAN Awareness for the port.

If VLAN awareness is enabled, the tag is removed from tagged frames received

on the port. VLAN tagged frames are classified to the VLAN ID in the tag.

If VLAN awareness is disabled, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and

tags are not removed.

 Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress

processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of

the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is discarded.

 Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This

parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged

frames, untagged frames received on that port are discarded.

 Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.

 UVID Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). Port's UVID determines the packet's behavior

at the egress side.

117
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not. When a Volatile VLAN User

requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration, the following

conflicts can occur:

Functional Conflicts between feature.

Conflicts due to hardware limitation.

Direct conflict between user modules.

Buttons

: Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.8 Private VLAN

The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here. Private VLANs can be added

or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here.

Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This means that VLAN IDs and

Private VLAN IDs can be identical.

A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By default, all ports are VLAN

unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.

A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs.

The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-6 appears.

Figure 4-6-6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

118
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Object Description

 Delete To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during

the next save.

 Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.

 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To

include a port in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port

from the Private VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are

members, and all boxes are unchecked.

 Adding a New Private Click “Add New Private VLAN” to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is

VLAN added to the table, and the private VLAN can be configured as needed. The

allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number

range. Any values outside this range are not accepted, and a warning message

appears. Click "OK" to discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to

the editing and make a correction.

The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save".

The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.

Buttons

: Click to add new VLAN.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.9 Port Isolation

Overview

When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN, communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented. Two

application examples are provided in this section:

 Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN, but they are not allowed to communicate with each
other within that VLAN.

 Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to communicate with the outside world and
with database servers on the inside segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other

119
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

For private VLANs to be applied, the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place, one or

more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs. Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups:

 Promiscuous ports

— Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN
— Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN

 Isolated ports

— Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN

— Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN

The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port

in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN

mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to

just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN.

This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN. A port member of a VLAN can be isolated

to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN. The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4-6-7 appears.

120
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-6-7 Port Isolation Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port

isolation is enabled on that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on

that port. By default, port isolation is disabled on all ports.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.10 VLAN setting example:

 Separate VLAN

 802.1Q VLAN Trunk

 Port Isolate

4.6.10.1 Two separate 802.1Q VLAN

The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs. VLAN Group 2 and

VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN. Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the

same VLAN members. The screen in Figure 4-6-8 appears and Table 4-6-9 describes the port configuration of the Managed

Switches.

121
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-6-8 two separate VLAN diagram

VLAN Group VID Untagged Members Tagged Members

VLAN Group 1 1 Port-7 ~ Port-10 N/A

VLAN Group 2 2 Port-1,Port-2 Port-3

VLAN Group 3 3 Port-4,Port-5 Port-6

Table 4-1 VLAN and Port Configuration

The scenario described as follow:

 Untagged packet entering VLAN 2

1. While [PC-1] transmit an untagged packet enters Port-1, the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=2.

[PC-2] and [PC-3] will received the packet through Port-2 and Port-3.

2. [PC-4],[PC-5] and [PC-6] received no packet.

3. While the packet leaves Port-2, it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet.

4. While the packet leaves Port-3, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2.

 Tagged packet entering VLAN 2

5. While [PC-3] transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=2 enters Port-3, [PC-1] and [PC-2] will received the packet

through Port-1 and Port-2.

6. While the packet leaves Port-1 and Port-2, it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet.

 Untagged packet entering VLAN 3

122
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1. While [PC-4] transmit an untagged packet enters Port-4, the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag=3. [PC-5] and

[PC-6] will received the packet through Port-5 and Port-6.

2. While the packet leaves Port-5, it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet.

3. While the packet leaves Port-6, it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag=3.

At this example, VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN, but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic

flow

Setup steps

1. Create VLAN Group

Set VLAN Group 1 = Default-VLAN with VID (VLAN ID) =1

Add two VLANs – VLAN 2 and VLAN 3

VLAN Group 2 with VID=2

VLAN Group 3 with VID=3

2. Assign VLAN Member :

VLAN 2 : Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3

VLAN 3 : Port-4, Port-5 and Port-6

VLAN 1 : All other ports – Port-7~Port-10

3. Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1:

Remember to remove the Port 1 – Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership, since the Port 1 – Port 6 had be assigned to VLAN 2

and VLAN 3.

Figure 4-6-9 Add new VLAN group, assign VLAN members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and remove specify ports from VLAN 1

member

It’s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration. Or the ports would become
overlap setting. ( About the overlapped VLAN configuration, see next VLAN configure sample)

123
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4. Assign PVID for each port:

Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3 : PVID=2

Port-4,Port-5 and Port-6 : PVID=3

Port-7~Port-10 : PVID=1

5. Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports

Link Type: Port-3 (VLAN-2) and Port-6 (VLAN-3)

The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4-6-10 appears.

Figure 4-6-10 Port 1-Port 6 VLAN Configuration

4.6.10.2 VLAN Trunking between two 802.1Q aware switch

The most cases are used for “Uplink” to other switches. VLANs are separated at different switches, but they need to access

with other switches within the same VLAN group. The screen in Figure 4-6-11 appears.

124
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Setup steps

1. Create VLAN Group

Set VLAN Group 1 = Default-VLAN with VID (VLAN ID) =1

Add two VLANs – VLAN 2 and VLAN 3

VLAN Group 2 with VID=2

VLAN Group 3 with VID=3

2. Assign VLAN Member :

VLAN 2 : Port-1,Port-2 and Port-3

VLAN 3 : Port-4, Port-5 and Port-6

VLAN 1 : All other ports – Port-7~Port-10

About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts, please refer to 4.6.10.1 examples. The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk

125
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

port configuration.

1. Specify Port-8 to be the 802.1Q VLAN Trunk port.

2. Assign Port-8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration page.

3. Define a VLAN 1 as a “Public Area” that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members.

4. Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN – which wants to be aggregated. At this sample, add Port-8 to

be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port. The screen in Figure 4-6-12 appears.

Figure 4-6-12 VLAN overlap port setting & VLAN 1 – The public area member assign

5. Specify Port-8 to be the 802.1Q VLAN Trunk port, and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress. The Port-8

configuration as the following screen in Figure 4-6-13.

Figure 4-6-13 The configuration of VLAN Trunk port

That is, although the VLAN 2 members: Port-1 to Port-3 and VLAN 3 members: Port-4 to Port-6 also belongs to VLAN 1. But

with different PVID settings, packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN.

6. Repeat Step 1 to 5, setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk, repeat
Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port to the VLANs.

4.6.10.3 Port Isolate

The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports, and the each PCs are not able to access

each other PCs of each isolate port. But they all need to access with the same server/AP/Printer. The screen in Figure 4-6-14

appears. This section will show you how to configure the port for the server – that could be accessed by each isolate port.

126
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Setup steps

1. Assign Port Mode

Set Port-1~Port-4 in Isolate port.

Set Port5 and Port-6 in Promiscuous port. The screen in Figure 4-6-15 appears.

Figure 4-6-15 The configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous port

2. Assign VLAN Member :

VLAN 1 : Port-1,Port-2 ,Port-5 and Port-3

VLAN 2 : Port-3~Port-6. The screen in Figure 4-6-16 appears.

127
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-6-16 Private VLAN port setting

4.6.11 MAC-based VLAN

The MAC-based VLAN enties can be configured here. This page allows for adding and deleting MAC-based VLAN entries and

assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static entries. The MAC-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-17

appears.

Figure 4-6-17 MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry

will be deleted in the stack.

 MAC Address Indicates the MAC address.

 VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.

 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry.

To include a port in a MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude

the port from the MAC-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default,

no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.

 Adding a New Click “Add New Entry” to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is

MAC-based VLAN added to the table, and the MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as
needed. Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC-based VLAN

entry. No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed. Legal values for a

128
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.

The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save". A MAC-based

VLAN without any port members will be deleted when you click "Save".

The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC-based VLANs.

Buttons

: Click to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC-based VLAN Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.6.12 MAC-based VLAN Status

This page shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users. The MAC-based VLAN Status

screen in Figure 4-6-18 appears.

Figure 4-6-18 MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 MAC Address Indicates the MAC address.

 VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID.

 Port Members Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.

129
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.13 IP Subnet-based VLAN

The IP subnet-based VLAN enties can be configured here. This page allows for adding, updating and deleting IP subnet-based

VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static entries. The IP-based VLAN screen in

Figure 4-6-19 appears.

Figure 4-6-19 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be
deleted on the switch during the next Save.

 VCE ID Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. It's value ranges from

0-256. If a VCE ID is 0, application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry.

Deletion and lookup of IP subnet-based VLAN are based on VCE ID.

 IP Address Indicates the IP address.

 Mask Length Indicates the network mask length.

 VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.

 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN

entry. To include a port in a IP subnet-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or

exclude the port from the IP subnet-based VLAN, make sure the box is

unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.

 Adding a New IP Click “Add New Entry” to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. An empty row
subnet-based VLAN is added to the table, and the IP subnet-based VLAN entry can be configured as

needed. Any IP address/mask can be configured for the IP subnet-based VLAN

130
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

entry. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.

The IP subnet-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save". The

“Delete: button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet-based VLANs.

Buttons

: Click to add a new entry in mapping table.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.6.14 Protocol-based VLAN

This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries as well as allow you to see

and delete already mapped entries for the switch. The Protocol-based VLAN screen in Figure 4-6-20 appears.

Figure 4-6-20 Protocol to Group Mapping Table page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be

deleted on the switch during the next Save.

 Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values:

1. Ethernet

2. LLC
3. SNAP

Note: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text field will

131
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

vary depending on the new frame type you selected.

 Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected

from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu.

Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:

1. For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a

Frame Type is called etype. Valid values for etype ranges from

0x0600-0xffff

2. For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different

sub-values.

a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)

b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)

3. For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different

sub-values.

a.OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of

xx-xx-xx where each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges

from 0x00-0xff.

b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet

type (EtherType) field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if

the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization, the protocol ID is a value

assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP.

In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be

etype (0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then

valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.

 Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which

consists of a combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9).

Note: special character and underscore(_) are not allowed.

 Adding a New Group to Click “Add New Entry”to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is

VLAN mapping entry added to the table; Frame Type, Value and the Group Name can be configured

as needed.

The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Buttons

: Click to add a new entry in mapping table.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

132
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.6.15 Protocol-based VLAN Mambership

This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch. The Group Name to VLAN Mapping

Table screen in Figure 4-6-21 appears.

Figure 4-6-21 Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be

deleted on the switch during the next Save

 Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a

combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9), no special character is

allowed. Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in

Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing

mapping entry on this page.

 VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges

from 1-4095.

 Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID

mapping. To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude

the port from the mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports

are members, and all boxes are unchecked.

 Adding a New Group to Click “Add New Entry” to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is

VLAN mapping entry added to the table, the Group Name, VLAN ID and port members can be

configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.

The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

133
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

134
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.7 Spanning Tree Protocol

4.7.1 Theory

The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches,

bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route

exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link

goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:

 STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

 RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

 MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)

The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links

between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is

established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be

used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are

established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link

failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.

This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning

Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible

to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the

following before making any changes from the default values.

The Switch STP performs the following functions:

 Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements.

 Creates multiple spanning trees – from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified
groups.

 Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in

the tree.

 Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.

Bridge Protocol Data Units

For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:

 The unique switch identifier

 The path cost to the root associated with each switch port

 The port identifier

STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the

following information:
 The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch

 The path cost to the root from the transmitting port

 The port identifier of the transmitting port

135
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on

which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch

uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission.

The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:

 One switch is elected as the root switch

 The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch

 A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded

to the root.

 A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.

 Ports included in the STP are selected.

Creating a Stable STP Topology

It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC

address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch,

STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.

When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network

might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can

cause a root-port change.

STP Port States

The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that

transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new

network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for

the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to

allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must

transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.

Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:

 Blocking – the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets

 Listening – the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state

 Learning – the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets

 Forwarding – the port is forwarding packets

 Disabled – the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first

A port transitions from one state to another as follows:

 From initialization (switch boot) to blocking

 From blocking to listening or to disabled

 From listening to learning or to disabled

 From learning to forwarding or to disabled

 From forwarding to disabled

 From disabled to blocking

136
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-7-1 STP Port State Transitions

You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the

network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly

configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received
by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.

2. STP Parameters

STP Operation Levels

The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree

consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more

ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.

On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root

Bridge and the Designated Bridges.

On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports.

The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:

137
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameter Description Default Value

Bridge Identifier(Not user A combination of the User-set priority and 32768 + MAC

configurable the switch’s MAC address.

except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts:

below) a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC

address 32768 + MAC

Priority A relative priority for each switch – lower 32768

numbers give a higher priority and a greater

chance of a given switch being elected as

the root bridge

Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds

the hello message by the switch

Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU for a 20 seconds

port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded

when its age exceeds the value of the

maximum age timer.

Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds

learning and listening states waiting for a

BPDU that may return the port to the

blocking state.

The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:

Variable Description Default Value

Port Priority A relative priority for each 128

port –lower numbers give a higher priority

and a greater chance of a given port being

elected as the root port

Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths – 200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports

STP calculates path costs and selects the 20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet

path with the minimum cost as the active ports

path 0 - Auto

Default Spanning-Tree Configuration

Feature Default Value

Enable state STP disabled for all ports

Port priority 128

Port cost 0

Bridge Priority 32,768

138
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

User-Changeable STA Parameters

The Switch’s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings

as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows:

Priority – A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.

Hello Time – The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent

by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not

the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.

The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age. Otherwise, a configuration error will

occur.

Max. Age – The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from

the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it

turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.

Forward Delay Timer – The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the

Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.

Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters:

Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)

Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)

Port Priority – A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as

the Root Port.

Port Cost – A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be

chosen to forward packets.

3. Illustration of STP

A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram. In this example, you can anticipate

some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied.

If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch

A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example,

STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based

on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings.

Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there.

Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory

settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a particular
switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority

and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.

139
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-7-5 Before Applying the STA Rules

In this example, only the default STP values are used.

Figure 4-7-6 After Applying the STA Rules

140
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost

between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 20,000) on switch A are connected to one

(optional) Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps

Fast Ethernet link (default port cost = 200,000). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the

default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.

4.7.2 STP System Configuration

This page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or

switch Stack. The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols:

‧ Compatiable -- Spanning Tree Protocol (STP):Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and

eliminating loops.

‧ Normal -- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) : Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster

spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.

‧ Extension – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) : Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the

usefulness of virtual LANs (VLANs). This "Per-VLAN" Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate

Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning

Tree.

The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-7 appears.

Figure 4-7-7 STP Bridge Configuration page screenshot

141
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Basic Settings

Object Description

 Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP, RSTP and MSTP.

 Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge

priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC

address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.

For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority

of the STP/RSTP bridge.

 Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to

Forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30

seconds

-Default: 15

-Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]

-Maximum: 30

 Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the

Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds.

-Default: 20

-Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].

-Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)]

 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at

the boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can

distribute its BPDU information. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.

 Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded,

transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to

10 BPDU's per second.

Advanced Settings

Object Description

 Edge Port BPDU Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive

Filtering BPDUs.

 Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon

reception of a BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be

removed from the active topology.

 Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled

after a certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and

142
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

re-enabled for normal STP operation. The condition is also cleared by a system

reboot.

 Port Error Recovery The time that has to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be

Timeout enabled. Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).

The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree

protocol. While select “Compatibles” mode, the system use the RSTP (802.1w) to compatible and

co work with another STP (802.1d)’s BPDU control packets.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.3 Bridge Status

This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances.

The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, where the column displays the following information: The

Bridge Status screen in Figure 4-7-8 appears.

Figure 4-7-8 STP Bridge Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 MSTI The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status.

 Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.

 Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.

 Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role.

 Root Cost Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge this is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the
sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.

143
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance.

 Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.7.4 CIST Port Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The CIST Port

Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-9 appears.

144
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-7-9 STP CIST Port Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number of the logical STP port.

 STP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port.

 Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost

as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended

values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The

path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower

path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports.

Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.

 Priority Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having

identical port cost. (See above).

Default: 128

Range: 0-240, in steps of 16

 AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared. (The

initial operEdge state when a port is initialized).

 AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the

bridge port. This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are

received on the port or not.

 Restricted Role If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any

MSTI, even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be

selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can

cause lack of spanning tree connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator

to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning

tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control

of the administrator. This feature is also known as Root Guard.

 Restricted TCN If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change

notifications and topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary

loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result

of persistently incorrect learned station location information. It is set by a network

administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network, causing

address flushing in that region, possibly because those bridges are not under the

full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs
transits frequently.

 BPDU Guard If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary

to the similar bridge setting, the port Edge status does not effect this setting.

145
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port

Error Recovery setting as well.

 Point-to-point Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than a shared

medium. This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false.

Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for

shared media.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost

according to the values shown below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost

method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to

65,535.

Port Type IEEE 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1w-2001

Ethernet 50-600 200,000-20,000,000

Fast Ethernet 10-60 20,000-2,000,000

Gigabit Ethernet 3-10 2,000-200,000

Table 4-7-1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range

Port Type Link Type IEEE 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1w-2001

Ethernet Half Duplex 100 2,000,000

Full Duplex 95 1,999,999

Trunk 90 1,000,000

Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 19 200,000

Full Duplex 18 100,000

Trunk 15 50,000

Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 4 10,000

Trunk 3 5,000

Table 4-7-2 Recommended STP Path Costs

Port Type Link Type IEEE 802.1w-2001

Ethernet Half Duplex 2,000,000

Full Duplex 1,000,000

Trunk 500,000

Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 200,000

Full Duplex 100,000

146
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Trunk 50,000

Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10,000

Trunk 5,000

Table 4-7-3 Default STP Path Costs

4.7.5 MSTI Priorities

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly change them as

well. The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4-7-10 appears.

Figure 4-7-10 MSTI Priority page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 MSTI The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active.

 Priority Controls the bridge priority. Lower numerical values have better priority. The

bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC

address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

147
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.7.6 MSTI Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly change them as

well. The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-11 appears.

Figure 4-7-11 MSTI Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Configuration Identification

Object Description

148
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name

and revision (see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in

order to share spanning trees for MSTI's. (Intra-region). The name is at most 32

characters.

 Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer

between 0 and 65535.

MSTI Mapping

Object Description

 MSTI The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will

receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped.

 VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN's mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be separated with
comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. A unused MSTI

should just be left empty. (I.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.)

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.7 MSTI Ports Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly change them as well.

A MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical) port for each MSTI instance

configured and applicable for the port. The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration

options.

This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports. The aggregation settings are stack global. The MSTI

Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-12 & Figure 4-7-13appears.

Figure 4-7-12 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

149
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MSTI Port Configuration

Object Description

 Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration.

Figure 4-7-13 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

MSTx MSTI Port Configuration

Object Description

150
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.

 Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost

as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended

values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path

cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path

cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid

values are in the range 1 to 200000000.

 Priority Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having

identical port cost.

Buttons

: Click to set MSTx configuration

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.7.8 Port Status

This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.

The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4-7-14 appears.

Figure 4-7-14 STP Port Status page screenshot

151
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number of the logical STP port.

 CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port. The port role can be one of the

following values:

AlternatePort

BackupPort

RootPort

DesignatedPort

Disable

 State The current STP port state of the CIST port . The port state can be one of the

following values:

Disabled

Learning

Forwarding

 Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.7.9 Port Statistics

This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.

The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-7-15 appears.

Figure 4-7-15 STP Statistics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.

152
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

 RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

 STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the

port.

 TCN The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's

received/transmitted on the port.

 Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the

port.

 Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the

port.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to clear the information immediately.

153
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.8 Multicast

4.8.1 IGMP Snooping

The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) lets host and routers share information about multicast groups

memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU

for feature processing. The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are

a member of the multicast group.

About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping

Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will

become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this

information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case

where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the ‘queried’. This router then keeps

track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to

determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if

there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets

will not be forwarded to that sub network.

Figure 4-8-1 Multicast Service

154
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-2 Multicast flooding

Figure 4-8-3 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control

155
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IGMP Versions 1 and 2

Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to

communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group.

IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data.

The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:

IGMP Message Format

Octets
0 8 16 31

Type Response Time Checksum

Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)

The IGMP Type codes are shown below:

Type Meaning

0x11 Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)

Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is

0x11
Present)

0x16 Membership Report (version 2)

0x17 Leave a Group (version 2)

0x12 Membership Report (version 1)

IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks.

The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.

A host sends an IGMP “report” to join a group

A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).

A host will send a “leave” report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).

Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members

exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members

on the network.

The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.

IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave

156
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.

The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:

Figure 4-8-4 IGMP State Transitions

 IGMP Querier –

A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more

than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the

role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast

switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as

DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.

4.8.2 IGMP Snooping Configuration

This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration. The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-5 appears.

157
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-5 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.

 Unregistered IPMCv4 Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding.

Flooding Enabled The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled.

When IGMP Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always

active in spite of this setting.

 IGMP SSM Range SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers

run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.

158
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding

unnecessary leave messages to the router side.

 Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary

join and leave messages to the router side.

 Router Port Specify which ports act as IGMP router ports. A router port is a port on the

Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.

The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP router port.

 Auto:

Select “Auto” to have the Managed Switch automatically uses the port

as IGMP Router port if the port receives IGMP query packets.

 Static:

The Managed Switch always uses the specified port as an IGMP

Router port. Use this mode when you connect an IGMP multicast

server or IP camera which applied with multicast protocol to the port.

 None:

The Managed Switch will not use the specified port as an IGMP

Router port. The Managed Switch will not keep any record of an

IGMP router being connected to this port. Use this mode when you

connect other IGMP multicast servers directly on the non-querier

Managed Switch and don’t want the multicast stream be flood to

uplink switch throught the port that connected to the IGMP querier.

 Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port.

 Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.

When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be

the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
screen in Figure 4-8-6 appears.

159
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-6 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected.

 IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN.

 Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions

depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a

network. The allowed selection is IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced

IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3, default compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.

 RV Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected

packet loss on a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness

variable value is 2.

 QI Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent

by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is

125 seconds.

 QRI Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max

Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to

31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100 in tenths of

seconds (10 seconds).

 LLQI (LMQI for IGMP) Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value

represented by the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member

Query Count. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last

member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).

 URI Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between
repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range

is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

160
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For

example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting

access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a

port can join.

IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the

port. An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a

port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group

is permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report is

dropped.

IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number

of groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace”. If the action is set to deny, any

new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and

replaces it with the new multicast group. The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-7 appears.

Figure 4-8-7 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Port The logical port for the settings.

161
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered.

 Add New Filtering Click “Add New Filtering Group” to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table.

Group Specify the Port, and Filtering Group of the new entry. Click "Save".

Buttons

: Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.5 IGMP Snooping Status

This page provides IGMP Snooping status. The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4-8-8 appears.

Figure 4-8-8 IGMP Snooping Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

162
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Object Description

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 Querier Version Working Querier Version currently.

 Host Version Working Host Version currently.

 Querier Status Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".

 Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier.

 Querier Received The number of Received Querier.

 V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports.

 V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports.

 V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports.

 V2 Leave Received The number of Received V2 Leave.

 Router Port Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet

switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.

Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.

Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.

Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.

 Port Switch port number

 Status Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.8.6 IGMP Group Information

Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page. The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input

field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table.

The IGMP Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4-8-9 appears.

163
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.

 Groups Group address of the group displayed.

 Port Members Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.7 IGMPv3 Information

Entries in the IGMP SSM Information Table are shown on this page. The IGMP SSM Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID,
then by group, and then by Port No. Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SSM (Source Specific Multicast) Information table, default being 20, selected

through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the

IGMP SSM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "Group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SSM Information Table.

The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4-8-10 appears.

164
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-10 IGMP SSM Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.

 Group Group address of the group displayed.

 Port Switch port number.

 Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group

Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.

 Source Address IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source

addresses for filtering to be 128.

 Type Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

 Hardware Filter/Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the

source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.8 MLD Snooping Configuration

This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration. The MLD Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-11 appears.

165
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-11 MLD Snooping Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping.

 Unregistered IPMCv6 Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding.

Flooding enabled The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled.

When MLD Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is always

active in spite of this setting.

 MLD SSM Range SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers

run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range.

166
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Leave Proxy Enable Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding

unnecessary leave messages to the router side.

 Proxy Enable Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary

join and leave messages to the router side.

 Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet

switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.

If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation

will act as a router port. The allowed selection is Auto, Fix, Fone, default

compatibility value is Auto.

 Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port.

 Throtting Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.

When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be

the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration

screen in Figure 4-8-12 appears.

Figure 4-8-12 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

167
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 MLD Snooping Enable Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected.

 MLD Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN.

 Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions

depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a

network. The allowed selection is MLD-Auto, Forced MLDv1, Forced MLDv2,

default compatibility value is MLD-Auto.

 RV Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected

packet loss on a link. The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable

value is 2.

 QI Query Interval. The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General

Queries sent by the Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default

query interval is 125 seconds.

 QRI Query Response Interval. The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the

Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries. The

allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval

is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).

 LLQI Last Listener Query Interval. The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum

Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into

Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast

Listener Done messages. It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to

calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and

Source Specific Query messages. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of

seconds, default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).

 URI Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between

repetitions of a node's initial report of interest in a multicast address. The allowed

range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

168
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.8.10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering

In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users. For

example, an IP/TV service based on a specific subscription plan. The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting

access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a

port can join.

MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the

port. A MLD filter profile can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned to a

port. When enabled, MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is

permitted, the MLD join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the MLD join report is dropped.

MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time. When the maximum number of

groups is reached on a port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace”. If the action is set to deny, any

new MLD join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and

replaces it with the new multicast group. The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-13 appears.

Figure 4-8-13 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Port The logical port for the settings.

 Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered.

 Add New Filtering Click “Add New Filtering Group” to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table.

Group Specify the Port, and Filtering Group of the new entry. Click "Save".

Buttons

: Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

169
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.8.11 MLD Snooping Status

This page provides MLD Snooping status. The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4-8-14 appears.

Figure 4-8-14 MLD Snooping Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 Querier Version Working Querier Version currently.

 Host Version Working Host Version currently.

 Querier Status Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".

"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.

 Querier Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier.

 Querier Received The number of Received Querier.

 V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports.

170
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports.

 V1 Leave Received The number of Received V1 Leaves.

 Router Port Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet

switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.

Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.

Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.

Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.

 Port Switch port number.

 Status Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.8.12 MLD Group Information

Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page. The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input

field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table.

The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4-8-15 appears.

Figure 4-8-15 MLD Snooping Groups Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.

171
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Groups Group address of the group displayed.

 Port Members Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.13 MLDv2 Information

Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MLD SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table

also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by

Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry. Each page shows up to 99 entries from

the MLD SFM Information table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web

page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SFM Information Table.

The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4-8-16 appears.

Figure 4-8-16 MLD SSM Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.

 Group Group address of the group displayed.

172
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Port Switch port number.

 Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group

Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.

 Source Address IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source

addresses for filtering to be 128.

 Type Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

 Hardware Filter/Switch Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the

source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.14 MVR

The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs. In a multicast television application, a PC or a

network television or a set-top box can receive the multicast stream. Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one

subscriber port, which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box

or PC sends an IGMP/MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address. Uplink ports that send

and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports. It is allowed to create at maximun 8

MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN. There will be totally at maximun 256 group

addresses for channel settings.

This page provides MVR related configuration. The MVR screen in Figure 4-8-17 appears.

173
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-8-17 MVR Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 MVR Mode Enable/Disable the Global MVR.

The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in

IGMP/MLD Snooping.

It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group

174
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

table is full.

 Delete Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next

save.

 MVR VID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.

Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with

management VLAN ports.

 MVR Name MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR

VLAN. Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 32. MVR VLAN Name

can only contain alphabets or numbers. When the optional MVR VLAN name is

given, it should contain at least one alphabet. MVR VLAN name can be edited for

the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries.

 Mode Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode, MVR allows dynamic

MVR membership reports on source ports. In Compatible mode, MVR

membership reports are forbidden on source ports. The default is Dynamic

mode.

 Tagging Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as

Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID. The default is Tagged.

 Priority Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized

manner. The default Priority is 0.

 LLQI Define the maximun time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a

receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership. The

value is in units of tenths of a seconds. The range is from 0 to 31744. The default

LLQI is 5 tenths or one-half second.

 Interface Channel When the MVR VLAN is created, click the Edit symbol to expand the

Setting corresponding multicast channel settings for the specific MVR VLAN. Summary

about the Interface Channel Setting (of the MVR VLAN) will be shown besides

the Edit symbol.

 Port The logical port for the settings.

 Port Role Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following

roles.

Inactive: The designated port does not participate MVR operations.

Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source

ports. Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.

Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should

only receive multicast data. It does not receive data unless it becomes a member

of the multicast group by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.

Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with

management VLAN ports.

Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting.

175
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

I indicates Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates Receiver

The default Role is Inactive.

 Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port.

Buttons

: Click to add new MVR VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Save"

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.8.15 MVR Status

This page provides MVR status. The MVR Status screen in Figure 4-8-18 appears.

Figure 4-8-18 MVR Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID.

 IGMP/MLD Queries The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.

Received

 IGMP/MLD Queries The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.

Transmitted

 IGMPv1 Joins The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins.

Received

 IGMPv2/MLDv1 The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports, respectively.

Reports Received

 IGMPv3/MLDv2 The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins and MLDv2 Reports, respectively.

Reports Received

 IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leaves The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones, respectively.

Received

Buttons

176
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears all Statistics counters.

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.8.16 MVR Groups Information

Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page. The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input

field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table.

The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4-8-19 appears.

Figure 4-8-19 MVR Groups Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN VLAN ID of the group.

 Groups Group ID of the group displayed.

 Port Members Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table.

177
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.8.17 MVR SFM Information

Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MVR SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table

also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by

Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per

page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information

Table.

The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR SFM Information

Table.

The MVR SFM Information screen in Figure 4-8-20 appears.

Figure 4-8-20 MVR SFM Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group.

 Group Group address of the group displayed.

 Port Switch port number.

 Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group

Address) basis. It can be either Include or Exclude.

 Source Address IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source

addresses for filtering to be 128. When there is no any source filtering address,

the text "None" is shown in the Source Address field.

 Type Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

178
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

179
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.9 Quality of Service

4.9.1 Understand QOS

Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic. QoS

enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic, such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific,

time critical, and file-backup traffic.

QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and

allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat

selected applications and types of traffic. You can use QoS on your system to:

 Control a wide variety of network traffic by:

 Classifying traffic based on packet attributes.

 Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, to set higher priorities to time-critical or business-critical applications).

 Applying security policy through traffic filtering.

 Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing
delay and jitter.

 Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows.

 Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network.

 Manage network congestion.

QoS Terminology
 Classifier－classifies the traffic on the network. Traffic classifications are determined by protocol, application, source,

destination, and so on. You can create and modify classifications. The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to

schedule them with the appropriate service level.

 DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) － is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain

applications and/or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network.
 Service Level－defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic. You can create and modify service

levels.
 Policy－comprises a set of “rules” that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business. That

is, traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type.
 QoS Profile－consists of multiple sets of rules (classifier plus service level combinations). The QoS profile is assigned

to a port(s).
 Rules－comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic. Rules are

associated with a QoS Profile (see above).

To implement QoS on your network, you need to carry out the following actions:

1. Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic.

2. Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch.
3. Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier.

4. Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).

180
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.9.2 Port Policing

This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports. The Port Policing screen in Figure 4-9-1 appears.

Figure 4-9-1 QoS Ingress Port Policers page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.

 Enable Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.

 Rate Controls the rate for the policer. The default value is 500. This value is restricted

to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps" or "fps", and it is restricted to 1-3300

when the "Unit" is "Mbps" or "kfps".

 Unit Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps . The

default value is "kbps".

 Flow Control If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames

are sent instead of discarding frames.

181
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.3 Port Classification

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports. The Port Classification

screen in Figure 4-9-2 appears.

Figure 4-9-2 QoS Ingress Port Classification page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.

 QoS Class Controls the default QoS class, i.e., the QoS class for frames not classified in any

other way. There is a one to one mapping between QoS class, queue and priority.

182
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

A QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.

Note: If the QoS class has been dynamically changed, then the actual QoS class

is shown in parentheses after the configured QoS class.

 DP Level Controls the default Drop Precedence Level, i.e., the DP level for frames not

classified in any other way.

 PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames.

 DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames.

 Tag Class. Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.

Disabled: Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames.

Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.

Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and/or mapping.

 DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.4 Port Scheduler

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports. The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4-9-4

appears.

183
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-4 QoS Egress Port Schedule page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers.

For more detail, please refer to chapter 4.9.5.1.

 Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port.

 Q0 ~ Q5 Shows the weight for this queue and port.

4.9.5 Port Shaping

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports. The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4-9-5

appears.

184
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-5 QoS Egress Port Shapers page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers.

For more detail, please refer to chapter 4.9.5.1.

 Q0 ~Q7 Shows "disabled" or actual queue shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".

 Port Shows "disabled" or actual port shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".

4.9.5.1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers

The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific port are configured on this page. The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper

sscreen in Figure 4-9-6 appears.

185
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-6 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Schedule Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this

switch port.

 Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.

 Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper. The default value is 500. This value is

restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-3300

when the "Unit" is "Mbps".

 Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The

default value is "kbps".

 Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.

 Queue Scheduler Controls the weight for this queue. The default value is "17". This value is

Weight restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to

"Weighted".

 Queue Scheduler Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if

Percent "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".

 Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.

 Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper. The default value is 500. This value is

186
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

restricted to 100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to

1-13200 when the "Unit" is "Mbps".

 Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The

default value is "kbps".

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

4.9.6 Port Tag Remarking

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports. The Port Tag Remarking screen in

Figure 4-9-7 appears.

Figure 4-9-7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking.

For more detail, please refer to chapter 4.9.6.1.

187
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.

Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.

Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.

Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.

4.9.6.1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking

The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this page. The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking

sscreen in Figure 4-9-8 appears.

Figure 4-9-8 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port.

Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.

Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.

Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.

 PCP/DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default.

 DP level Configuration Controls the Drop Precedence level translation table when the mode is set to

Mapped.

The purpose of this table is to reduce the 2 bit classified DP level to a 1 bit DP

level used in the (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) mapping process.

 (QoS class, DP level) Controls the mapping of the classified (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) values

to (PCP, DEI) Mapping when the mode is set to Mapped.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

188
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

4.9.7 Port DSCP

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports. The Port DSCP screen in

Figure 4-9-9 appears.

Figure 4-9-9 QoS Port DSCP Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress

and egress settings.

 Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings
for individual ports.

There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:

189
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Translate
 Classify
 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox.

 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values.

 Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.

 DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.
 Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled
as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP.
 All: Classify all DSCP.
 Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of -

 Disable: No Egress rewrite.

 Enable: Rewrite enable without remapped.

 Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is

remarked with remapped DSCP value. The remapped DSCP value is

always taken from the 'DSCP Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table.

 Remap DP Aware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is

remarked with remapped DSCP value. Depending on the DP level of the

frame, the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the 'DSCP

Translation->Egress Remap DP0' table or from the 'DSCP

Translation->Egress Remap DP1' table.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.8 DSCP-Based QoS

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches. The

DSCP-Based QoS screen in Figure 4-9-10 appears.

190
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-10 DSCP-Based QoS Ingress Classification page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64.

 Trust Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted

DSCP values are mapped to a specific QoS class and Drop Precedence Level.
Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated as a non-IP frame.

191
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of (0-7)

 DPL Drop Precedence Level (0-1)

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.9 DSCP Translation

This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches. DSCP translation can be done in

Ingress or Egress. The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4-9-11 appears.

Figure 4-9-11 DSCP Translation page screenshot

192
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value

ranges from 0 to 63.

 Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP

for QoS class and DPL map.

There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation -

Translate

Classify

 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.

 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.

 Egress There is following configurable parameter for Egress side -

Remap

 Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP

value ranges form 0 to 63.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.10 DSCP Classification

This page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value. The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4-9-12

appears.

193
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-12 DSCP Classification page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7. QoS Class (0-7) can be mapped
to followed parameters.

 DSCP Select DSCP value (0-63) from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS

Class and DPL value

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.11 QoS Control List

This page shows the QoS Control List(QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row describes a QCE that is defined. The
maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch.

Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list.

The QoS Control List screen in Figure 4-9-13 appears.

194
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-13 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 QCE# Indicates the index of QCE.

 Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.

 Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames. Possible frame types

are:

Any: The QCE will match all frame type.

Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.

LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.

SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.

IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.

IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.

 SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address, i.e. first three octet (byte) of MAC

address.

 DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame. Possible

values are:

Any: All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed.

Unicast: Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed.

Multicast: Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed.

Broadcast: Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd.

The default value is 'Any'.

 VID Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the

range 1-4095 or 'Any'

 PCP Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or

range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.

 DEI Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0, 1 or

'Any'.

 Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters

configured are matched with the frame's content.

There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.

195
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Class: Classified QoS class.

DPL: Classified Drop Precedence Level.

DSCP: Classified DSCP value.

 Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons:
: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.
: Edits the QCE.
: Moves the QCE up the list.
: Moves the QCE down the list.
: Deletes the QCE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL.

4.9.11.1 QoS Control Entry Configuration

The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-14 appears.

Figure 4-9-14 QCE Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the

QCL entry. By default all ports will be checked

196
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Key Parameters Key configuration are discribed as below:

Tag Value of Tag field can be 'Any', 'Untag' or 'Tag'

VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'; user

can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs

PCP Priority Code Point: Valid value PCP are specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or

range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'

DEI Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0, 1

or 'Any'

SMAC Source MAC address: 24 MS bits (OUI) or 'Any'

DMAC Type Destination MAC type: possible values are unicast(UC),

multicast(MC), broadcast(BC) or 'Any'

Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values

1. Any

2. Ethernet

3. LLC

4. SNAP

5. IPv4

6. IPv6

Note: all frame types are explained below.

 Any Allow all types of frames.

 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600-0xFFFF or 'Any'

but excluding 0x800(IPv4) and 0x86DD(IPv6), default value is 'Any'.

 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP(Source Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to

0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'

DSAP Address Valid DSAP(Destination Service Access Point) can vary from

0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'

Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the

default value is 'Any'

 SNAP PID Valid PID(a.k.a ethernet type) can have value within 0x00-0xFFFF or 'Any',

default value is 'Any'

 IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'Any'

Source IP Specific Source IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'. IP and Mask

are in the format x.y.z.w where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and

255. When Mask is converted to a 32-bit binary string and read from left to right,

all bits following the first zero must also be zero

DSCP Diffserv Code Point value(DSCP): It can be specific value, range of value

or 'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or
AF11-AF43

IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option: yes|no|any

197
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable

for IP protocol UDP/TCP

Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range

applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP

 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'Any'

Source IP IPv6 source address: (a.b.c.d) or 'Any', 32 LS bits

DSCP Diffserv Code Point value(DSCP): It can be specific value, range of value

or 'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or

AF11-AF43

Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable

for IP protocol UDP/TCP

Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range

applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP

 Action Parameters Class QoS class: (0-7) or 'Default'.

DP Valid Drop Precedence Level can be (0-3) or 'Default'.

DSCP Valid DSCP value can be (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43) or

'Default'.

'Default' means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE.

Buttons

: Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL page

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values

: Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change

4.9.12 QoS Status

This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific

QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. The

QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4-9-15 appears.

198
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-15 QoS Control List Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 User Indicates the QCL user.

 QCE# Indicates the index of QCE.

 Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames. Possible frame types

are:

Any: The QCE will match all frame type.

Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.

LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.

SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.

IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.

IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.

 Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.

 Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters

configured are matched with the frame's content.

There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.

Class: Classified QoS class; if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the

queue.

DPL: Drop Precedence Level; if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set

to value displayed under DPL column.

DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value

displayed under DSCP column.

 Conflict Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. As H/W resources are shared by multiple

applications. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be

available, in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No'.

Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H/W resources

required to add QCL entry on pressing 'Resolve Conflict' button.

Buttons

: Select the QCL status from this drop down list.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry, in case the conflict status for any QCL entry is

'yes'.

: Click to refresh the page.

199
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.9.13 Storm Control Configuration

Storm control for the switch is configured on this page.

There is a unicast storm rate control, multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate control. These only affect flooded

frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present on the MAC Address table.

The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch.

The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-16 appears.

Figure 4-9-16 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here: Unicast,

Multicast or Broadcast.

 Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.

 Rate The rate unit is packets per second (pps). Valid values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,

128, 256, 512, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K, 1024K,

2048K, 4096K, 8192K, 16384K or 32768K.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.14 QoS Statistics

This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports. The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4-9-18 appears.

200
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-18 Queuing Counters page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

 Q0 ~ Q7 There are 8 QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.

 Rx/Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for all ports.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.9.15 Voice VLAN Configuration

The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch can classify and schedule network

traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port - one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the
switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI. The Voice VLAN

Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-19 appears.

201
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-19 Voice VLAN Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature

before we enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter. Possible

modes are:

Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.

Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.

 VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and

202
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

cannot equal each port PVID. It is conflict configuration if the value equal

management VID, MVR VID, PVID etc. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.

 Age Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time. The allowed range is 10 to

10000000 seconds. It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled.

In other cases, it will based hardware age time. The actual age time will be

situated in the [age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.

 Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this

class.

 Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all

non-telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds. Possible

port modes are:

Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.

Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.

 Port Discovery Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto

Protocol detect mode is enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring

discovery protocol to "LLDP" or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI"

or "LLDP" will restart auto detect process. Possible discovery protocols are:

OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.

LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.

Both: Both OUI and LLDP.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.9.16 Voice VLAN OUI Table

Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. Modifying the OUI table will restart auto

detection of OUI process. The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4-9-20 appears.

203
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-9-20 Voice VLAN OUI Table page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by

IEEE. It must be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a

hexadecimal digit).

 Description The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony
device it belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.

Buttons

: Click to add a new access management entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

204
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.10 Access Control Lists

ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual

users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object

access rights.

ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking,

the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or

servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context,

they are similar to firewalls.

ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.

There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also

contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.

4.10.1 Access Control List Status

This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific

ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch. The

Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4-10-1 appears.

Figure 4-10-1 ACL Status page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 User Indicates the ACL user.

 Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:

Any: The ACE will match any ingress port.

Policy: The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy.

Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.

 Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:
Any: The ACE will match any frame type.

EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type

205
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.

ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.

IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.

IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.

IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.

IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.

IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.

IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.

 Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.

Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.

Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.

 Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When

Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.

 Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are

redirected to the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port
number. When Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.

 CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.

 CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.

 Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

 Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not

applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page.

4.10.2 Access Control List Configuration

This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch. Each row describes the

ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch.

Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol, cannot be edited or

deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest.

The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-2 appears.

206
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-10-2 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:

All: The ACE will match all ingress port.

Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.

 Policy / Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.

 Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:

Any: The ACE will match any frame type.

EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type

based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames.

ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.

IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.

IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.

IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.

IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.

IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.

IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.

 Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.

Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.

Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.

 Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When

Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.

 Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are

redirected to the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port

number. When Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.

 Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored

to the destination mirror port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.

The default value is "Disabled".

 Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

207
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following
buttons:
: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.
: Edits the ACE row.
: Moves the ACE up the list.
: Moves the ACE down the list.
: Deletes the ACE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.

: Click to clear the counters.

: Click to remove all ACEs.

4.10.3 ACE Configuration

Configure an ACE (Access Control Entry) on this page.

An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select. First select the

ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type

selected.

A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here. The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-3

appears.

208
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-10-3 ACE Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.

Any: The ACE applies to any port.

Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.

 Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.

Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)

Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field

for entering an policy value and bitmask appears.

 Policy Value When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value.

The allowed range is 0 to 255.

 Policy Bitmask When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask.

The allowed range is 0x0 to 0xff.

 Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.

Any: Any frame can match this ACE.

Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3

describes the value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to

1536 decimal (equal to 0600 hexadecimal).

ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the

ACE with ethernet type.

209
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the

ACE with ethernet type.

IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the

ACE with ehternet type.

 Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.

Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.

Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.

 Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 16. Disabled

indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.

 Port Redirect Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here. The allowed

range is the same as the switch port number range. Disabled indicates that the port

redirect operation is disabled.

 Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the

destination mirror port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.

The default value is "Disabled".

 Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.

Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.

Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.

 Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:

Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.

Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.

 Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

 MAC Parameters

Object Description

 SMAC Filter (Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)

Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.

Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)

Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this

value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.

 SMAC Value When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC

address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches

this SMAC value.

 DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.

Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)

210
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MC: Frame must be multicast.

BC: Frame must be broadcast.

UC: Frame must be unicast.

Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose

this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.

 DMAC Value When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination

MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE

matches this DMAC value.

 VLAN Parameters

Object Description

 802.1Q Tagged Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The

allowed values are:

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

Enabled: Tagged frame only.

Disabled: Untagged frame only.

The default value is "Any".

 VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.

Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)

Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value.

A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears.

 VLAN ID When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN

ID number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches

this VLAN ID value.

 Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag

priority. The allowed number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that no tag

priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)

 ARP Parameters

The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.

Object Description

 ARP/RARP Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.

Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)

ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.

RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.

Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.

 Request/Reply Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.

211
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)

Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.

Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.

 Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.

Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP

Address field that appears.

Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and

sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.

 Sender IP Address When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a

specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.

 Sender IP Mask When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific

sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation.

 Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.

Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP

Address field that appears.

Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and

target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.

 Target IP Address When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a

specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation.

 Target IP Mask When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target

IP mask in dotted decimal notation.

 ARP Sender MAC Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware

Match address field (SHA) settings.

0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.

1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 RARP Target MAC Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware

Match address field (THA) settings.

0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address.

1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 IP/Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP

hardware address length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.

0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is

equal to IPv4 (0x04).

1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is
equal to IPv4 (0x04).

212
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 IP Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP

hardware address space (HRD) settings.

0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).

1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol

address space (PRO) settings.

0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).

1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 IP Parameters

The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.

Object Description

 IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.

Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this

value. A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.

ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining

ICMP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining

UDP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP

parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

 IP Protocol Value When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific

value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP

protocol value.

 IP TTL Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.

zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to

match this entry.

non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to

match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the

More Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an
IPv4 frame.

No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater

213
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

than zero must not be able to match this entry.

Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater

than zero must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.

No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this

entry.

Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.

Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP

Address field that appears.

Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and

source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.

 SIP Address When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a

specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation.

 SIP Mask When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP

mask in dotted decimal notation.

 DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.

Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the

DIP Address field that appears.

Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP

address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that
appear.

 DIP Address When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a

specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation.

 DIP Mask When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific

DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.

 ICMP Parameters

Object Description

 ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.

Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a

specific ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.

 ICMP Type Value When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP
value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this

214
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

ICMP value.

 ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.

Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can

enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value

appears.

 ICMP Code Value When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific
ICMP code value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE

matches this ICMP code value.

 TCP/UDP Parameters

Object Description

 TCP/UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.

Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is

"don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you

can enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP

source value appears.

Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE,

you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a

TCP/UDP source value appears.

 TCP/UDP Source No. When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a
specific TCP/UDP source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that

hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.

 TCP/UDP Source When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific

Range TCP/UDP source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits

this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.

 TCP/UDP Destination Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.

Filter Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter

status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE,

you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a

TCP/UDP destination value appears.

Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this

ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for

entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.

 TCP/UDP Destination When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a

Number specific TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame

215
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.

 TCP/UDP Destination When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a

Range specific TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A

frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.

 TCP FIN Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 TCP SYN Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 TCP RST Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 TCP PSH Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 TCP ACK Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 TCP URG Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

 Ethernet Type Parameters

The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is selected.

Object Description

 EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.

Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can

enter a specific EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.

 Ethernet Type Value When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific

EtherType value. The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding

216
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches

this EtherType value.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Return to the previous page.

4.10.4 ACL Ports Configuration

Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the

frame matches a specific ACE.

The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-4 appears.

Figure 4-10-4 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

217
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

 Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255. The

default value is 0.

 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default

value is "Permit".

 Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or

the values 1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".

 Port Redirect Select which port frames are redirected on. The allowed values are Disabled or a

specific port number and it can't be set when action is permitted. The default

value is "Disabled".

 Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.

The default value is "Disabled".

 Logging Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.

The default value is "Disabled".

Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.

 Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.

Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.

The default value is "Disabled".

 State Specify the port state of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL

user module.

Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL

user module.

The default value is "Enabled".

 Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.

218
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to clear the counters.

4.10.5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration

Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch.

The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-5 appears.

Figure 4-10-5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.

 Rate The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps or 0, 100, 200, 300, ..., 1000000 in

kbps.

 Unit Specify the rate unit. The allowed values are:

pps: packets per second.

kbps: Kbits per second.

219
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

220
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.11 Authentication
This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch, includes the user access and management control.

The Authentication section contains links to the following main topics:

 IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Network Access Control

 MAC-Based Authentication

 User Authentication

Overview of 802.1X (Port-Based) Authentication

In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the

authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant

and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL

(EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the

RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the

switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different

authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't

need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information

exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the

relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides

forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the

supplicant.

Overview of MAC-Based Authentication

Unlike 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In

MAC-based authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame

(any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and

password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the

following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The

switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication, which in turn causes the switch to

open up or block traffic for that particular client, using static entries into the MAC Table. Only then will frames from the client be

forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication

has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through

a 3rd party switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant software

221
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

to authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users, equipment whose MAC address

is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone, and only the MD5-Challenge method is supported.

The 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.

Overview of User Authentication

It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local

or remote authentication methods, such as telnet and Web browser. This Managed Switch provides secure network

management access using the following options:

 Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)

 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)

 Local user name and Priviledge Level control

RADIUS and TACACS+ are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to

RADIUS-aware or TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user

name / password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch.

4.11.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Authentication

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized

clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client

connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.

Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)

traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the
port.

This section includes this conceptual information:

 Device Roles

 Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange

 Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

 Device Roles

With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.

222
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-1

 Client—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from

the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft
Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.)

 Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the

identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services.

Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote

Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)

extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.

RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the

RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.

 Switch (802.1X device)—controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client.

The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity

information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client.

The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible

Authentication Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL
frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is

re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the

223
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the

authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for
Ethernet and sent to the client.

 Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange

The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto

interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions

from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an

initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the

client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.

However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate

authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity

If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the

client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts

to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in

the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated.

When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and

the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes

authorized.

The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. “Figure 4-11-2” shows a message

exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.

Figure 4-11-2 EAP message exchange

224
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States

The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized

state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is
successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally.

If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In

this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted

access to the network.

In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the

authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a

fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state

If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to

authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains

in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can

retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails,

and network access is not granted.

When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state.

If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized

state.

4.11.2 Authentication Configuration

This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client

interfaces. The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-3 appears.

Figure 4-11-3 Authentication Method Configuration page screenshot

225
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Client The management client for which the configuration below applies.

 Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values:

None: authentication is disabled and login is not possible.

local: use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication.

radius: use a remote RADIUS server for authentication.

tacacs+: use a remote TACACS+ server for authentication.

 Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box.

If none of the configured authentication servers are alive, the local user database

is used for authentication.

This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than

'none or 'local'.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11.3 Network Access Server Configuration

This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X and MAC-based authentication system and port settings.

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by

requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central servers, the backend servers, determine

whether the user is allowed access to the network. These backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the

"Configuration→Security→AAA" page. The IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants

overcome security limitations as shall be explored below.

MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port, and doesn't require the user to

have special 802.1X supplicant software installed on his system. The switch uses the user's MAC address to authenticate

against the backend server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses, which makes MAC-based authentication less

secure than 802.1X authentication. The NAS configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide. The Network
Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-4 appears.

226
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-4 Network Access Server Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

System Configuration

Object Description

 Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled,

227
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

all ports are allowed forwarding of frames.

 Reauthentication If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated

Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for

802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a

switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.

For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server

configuration has changed. It does not involve communication between the

switch and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on a

port.

 Reauthentication Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be

Period reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is

checked. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.

 EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for

MAC-based ports.

 Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security

functionality to secure MAC addresses:

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-Based Auth.

When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses,

the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in

question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a

given period of time. This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to

a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.

If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802.1X-based mode, this is not

so criticial, since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get

removed upon the next reauthentication, which will fail. But if reauthentication is

not enabled, the only way to free resources is by aging the entries.

For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct

communication between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whether

the client is still attached or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age

the entry.

 Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security

functionality to secure MAC addresses:

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

228
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MAC-Based Auth.

If a client is denied access - either because the RADIUS server denies the client

access or because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the

timeout specified on the "Configuration→Security→AAA" page) - the client is put

on hold in the Unauthorized state. The hold timer does not count during an

on-going authentication.

In MAC-based Auth. mode, the The switch will ignore new frames coming from

the client during the hold time.

The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.

 RADIUS-Assigned QoS RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to

Enabled which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on

the switch. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS

attributes to take advantage of this feature.

The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to

globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When

checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned

QoS Class is enabled for that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned

QoS Class is disabled for all ports.

 RADIUS-Assigned RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on

VLAN Enabled which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming

traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The

RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take

advantage of this feature.

The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to

globally enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When

checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned

VLAN is enabled for that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN

is disabled for all ports.

 Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on

which 802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined

timeout. The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest

VLAN as listed below.

The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally

enable/disable Guest VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports'

ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When

unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports.

 Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the

Guest VLAN. It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

229
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Valid values are in the range [1; 4095].

 Max. Reauth. Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame

without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with

this setting. The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally

enabled.

Valid values are in the range [1; 255].

 Allow Guest VLAN if The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the

EAPOL Seen life-time of the port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN,

it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked;

default), the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not

been received on the port for the life-time of the port. If enabled (checked), the

switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been

received on the port for the life-time of the port.

The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

Port Configuration

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.

 Admin State If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode.

The following modes are available:

Force Authorized

In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link

comes up, and any client on the port will be allowed network access without

authentication.

Force Unauthorized

In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link

comes up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.

Port-based 802.1X

In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the
authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The

authenticator acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses

230
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the

supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP

Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames

sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS

packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the

switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP

is very flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like

MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator

(the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the supplicant

and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange

frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the

EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet

containing a success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the

supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port

connected to the supplicant.

Note: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is

configured to X seconds (using the AAA configuration page), and suppose that

the first server in the list is currently down (but not considered dead). Now, if the

supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds, then

it will never get authenticated, because the switch will cancel on-going backend

authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame

from the supplicant. And since the server hasn't yet failed (because the X

seconds haven't expired), the same server will be contacted upon the next

backend authentication server request from the switch. This scenario will loop
forever. Therefore, the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant's

EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate.

Single 802.1X

In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully

authenticated on a port, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows

other clients connected to the port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on

the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they

really aren't authenticated. To overcome this security breach, use the Single

802.1X variant.

Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same

characteristics as does port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one

supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time. Normal EAPOL frames are
used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch. If more than

one supplicant is connected to a port, the one that comes first when the port's link

231
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

comes up will be the first one considered. If that supplicant doesn't provide valid

credentials within a certain amount of time, another supplicant will get a chance.

Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated, only that supplicant will be

allowed access. This is the most secure of all the supported modes. In this mode,

the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant's MAC address once

successfully authenticated.

Multi 802.1X

Multi 802.1X is - like Single 802.1X - not an IEEE standard, but a variant that

features many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more

supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each

supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the

Port Security module.

In Multi 802.1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as

destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the

supplicant, since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to

requests sent from the switch. Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's MAC

address, which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response

Identity frame sent by the supplicant. An exception to this is when no supplicants

are attached. In this case, the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames

using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination - to wake up any

supplicants that might be on the port.

The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be

limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.

MAC-based Auth.

Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but

merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based

authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on

behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped

by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and

password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte

MAC address is converted to a string on the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx",

that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal

digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so

the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure

indication, which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that
particular client, using the Port Security module. Only then will frames from the

client be forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this

232
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with

the 802.1X standard.

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over port-based 802.1X is that

several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through a 3rd party

switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the clients

don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The advantage of

MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based authentication is that the clients

don't need special supplicant software to authenticate. The disadvantage is that

MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users - equipment whose MAC

address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone. Also, only the

MD5-Challenge method is supported. The maximum number of clients that can

be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control

functionality.

 RADIUS-Assigned QoS When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked)

Enabled for a given port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the

RADIUS Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a

supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid, traffic received on

the supplicant's port will be classified to the given QoS Class. If

(re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a

QoS Class or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the

port, the port's QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class

(which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting

the RADIUS-assigned).

This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.

• Port-based 802.1X

• Single 802.1X

RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:

The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for

identifying the QoS Class in an Access-Accept packet.

Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to

be valid, it must follow this rule:

• All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII

characters in the range '0' - '7', which translates into the desired QoS Class in the

range [0; 7].

 RADIUS-Assigned When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked)

VLAN Enabled for a given port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS
Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is

successfully authenticated. If present and valid, the port's Port VLAN ID will be

233
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

changed to this VLAN ID, the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID,

and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode. Once assigned, all traffic

arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS-assigned

VLAN ID.

If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries

a VLAN ID or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the

port, the port's VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID (which

may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the

RADIUS-assigned).

This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.

• Port-based 802.1X

• Single 802.1X

For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN

Membership and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have

(temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.

RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:

RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a

VLAN ID in an Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:

- The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID

attributes must all be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.

- The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same

Tag value and fulfil the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the

Tunnel-Private-Group-ID does not need to include a Tag):

- Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).

- Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).

- Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the

range '0' - '9', which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the

VLAN ID. Leading '0's are discarded. The final value must be in the

range [1; 4095].

 Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given

port, the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the

rules outlined below.

This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:

• Port-based 802.1X

• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X

For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN

234
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Membership and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have

(temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN configuration.

Guest VLAN Operation:

When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting

EAPOL Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames

exceeds Max. Reauth. Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the

meanwhile, the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between

transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL

Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, the port will now be

placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history to see

if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this history is

cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if

not, the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the

Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the

rate given by EAPOL Timeout.

Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached

clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit

an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN.

While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if

one such frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the

Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode.

If an EAPOL frame is received, the port will never be able to go back into the

Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen" is disabled.

 Port State The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:

Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.

Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.

Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the

supplicant is authorized.

Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode

and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.

X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are

authorized and Y are unauthorized.

 Restart Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when

authentication is globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an

EAPOL-based or MAC-based mode.

Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.

Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet-period of

235
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

the port runs out (EAPOL-based authentication). For MAC-based authentication,

reauthentication will be attempted immediately.

The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and

will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.

Reinitialize: Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a

reauthentication immediately. The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state

while the reauthentication is in progress.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.11.4 Network Access Overview

This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch. The Network Access Overview screen in
Figure 4-11-5 appears.

Figure 4-11-5 Network Access Server Switch Status page screenshot

236
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.

 Admin State The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a

description of possible values.

 Port State The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the

individual states.

 Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for

EAPOL-based authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new

client for MAC-based authentication.

 Last ID The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received

Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the

source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for

MAC-based authentication.

 QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.

 Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID

is not overridden by NAS.

If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is

appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.

If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.

Read more about Guest VLANs here.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.11.5 Network Access Statistics

This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL-based IEEE 802.1X authentication. For

MAC-based ports, it shows selected backend server (RADIUS Authentication Server) statistics, only. Use the port select box to
select which port details to be displayed. The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4-11-6 appears.

237
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-6 Network Access Statistics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Port State

Object Description

 Admin State The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a

description of possible values.

 Port State The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the

individual states.

 QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS class

is assigned.

 Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID

is not overridden by NAS.

If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is

appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.

If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID.

Read more about Guest VLANs here.

Port Counters

Object Description

 EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:

Force Authorized

Force Unauthorized

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X
Multi 802.1X

238
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Direction Name IEEE Name Description

Rx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL

Rx frames of any type that have

been received by the switch.

Rx Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespId The number of valid EAPOL

FramesRx Response Identity frames

that have been received by

the switch.

Rx Responses dot1xAuthEapolRespFr The number of valid EAPOL

amesRx response frames (other than

Response Identity frames)

that have been received by

the switch.

Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFra The number of EAPOL Start

mesRx frames that have been

received by the switch.

Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr The number of valid EAPOL

amesRx Logoff frames that have

been received by the switch.

Rx Invalid Type dot1xAuthInvalidEapolF The number of EAPOL

ramesRx frames that have been

received by the switch in

which the frame type is not

recognized.

Rx Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthErr The number of EAPOL

orFramesRx frames that have been

received by the switch in

which the Packet Body

Length field is invalid.

Tx Total dot1xAuthEapolFrames The number of EAPOL

Tx frames of any type that have

been transmitted by the

switch.

Tx Request ID dot1xAuthEapolReqIdFr The number of EAPOL

amesTx Request Identity frames that

239
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

have been transmitted by

the switch.

Tx Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFra The number of valid EAPOL

mesTx Request frames (other than

Request Identity frames)

that have been transmitted

by the switch.

 Backend Server These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following administrative

Counters states:

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-based Auth.

Direction Name IEEE Name Description

Rx Access dot1xAuthBackendAcce 802.1X-based:

Challenges ssChallenges Counts the number of times

that the switch receives the

first request from the backend

server following the first

response from the supplicant.

Indicates that the backend

server has communication

with the switch.

MAC-based:

Counts all Access Challenges

received from the backend

server for this port (left-most

table) or client (right-most

table).

Rx Other dot1xAuthBackendOther 802.1X-based:

Requests RequestsToSupplicant Counts the number of times

that the switch sends an EAP

Request packet following the

first to the supplicant.

Indicates that the backend

server chose an EAP-method.

MAC-based:

240
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Not applicable.

Rx Auth. dot1xAuthBackendAuth 802.1X- and MAC-based:

Successes Successes Counts the number of times

that the switch receives a

success indication. Indicates

that the supplicant/client has

successfully authenticated to

the backend server.

Rx Auth. dot1xAuthBackendAuth 802.1X- and MAC-based:

Failures Fails Counts the number of times

that the switch receives a

failure message. This

indicates that the

supplicant/client has not

authenticated to the backend

server.

Tx Responses dot1xAuthBackendResp 802.1X-based:

onses Counts the number of times

that the switch attempts to

send a supplicant's first

response packet to the

backend server. Indicates the

switch attempted

communication with the

backend server. Possible

retransmissions are not

counted.

MAC-based:

Counts all the backend server

packets sent from the switch

towards the backend server

for a given port (left-most

table) or client (right-most

table). Possible

retransmissions are not

counted.

241
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Last Supplicant/Client Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This

Info information is available for the following administrative states:

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-based Auth.

Name IEEE Name Description

MAC dot1xAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant/client.

Address rameSource

VLAN ID - The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the

last supplicant/client was received.

Version dot1xAuthLastEapolF 802.1X-based:

rameVersion The protocol version number carried in the most

recently received EAPOL frame.

MAC-based:

Not applicable.

Identity - 802.1X-based:

The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the

most recently received Response Identity

EAPOL frame.

MAC-based:

Not applicable.

Selected Counters

Object Description

 Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following

administrative states:

Multi 802.1X

MAC-based Auth.

The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and will be empty if

no MAC address is currently selected. To populate the table, select one of the attached

MAC Addresses from the table below.

Attached MAC Address

242
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Object Description

 Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame.
Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be
shown in the Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are attached, it shows No
supplicants attached.

This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.

 MAC Address For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant.
For MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached client.
Clicking the link causes the client's Backend Server counters to be shown in the
Selected Counters table. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.
 VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured
through the Port Security module.

 State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the authenticated state, it is
allowed to forward frames on the port, and in the unauthenticated state, it is blocked. As
long as the backend server hasn't successfully authenticated the client, it is
unauthenticated. If an authentication fails for one or the other reason, the client will
remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.

 Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful as well as
unsuccessful).

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: This button is available in the following modes:

• Force Authorized

• Force Unauthorized

• Port-based 802.1X

• Single 802.1X

Click to clear the counters for the selected port.

: This button is available in the following modes:

• Multi 802.1X

• MAC-based Auth.X

Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client's counters. The "Last Client" will not be cleared,

however.

: This button is available in the following modes:

• Multi 802.1X

• MAC-based Auth.X

243
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Click to clear only the currently selected client's counters.

4.11.6 Authentication Server Configuration

This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers. The Authentication Server Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-7
appears.

Figure 4-11-7 Authentication Server Configuration page screenshot

244
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Port State
These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers.

Object Description

 Timeout The Timeout, which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds, is the

maximum time to wait for a reply from a server.

If the server does not reply within this timeframe, we will consider it to be dead

and continue with the next enabled server (if any).

RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol, which is unreliable by design. In

order to cope with lost frames, the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of

equal length. If a reply is not received within the subinterval, the request is

transmitted again. This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to

3 times before it is considered to be dead.

 Dead Time The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is

the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has

failed to respond to a previous request. This will stop the switch from continually

trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.

Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but

only if more than one server has been configured.

RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration

The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description

 # The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below

applies.

 Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box.

 IP Address/Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server. IP address is

expressed in dotted decimal notation.

 Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0

(zero), the default port (1812) is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server.

 Secret The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the RADIUS

Authentication Server and the switch.

245
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration

The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description

 # The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below

applies.

 Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box.

 IP Address/Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server. IP address is

expressed in dotted decimal notation.

 Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server. If the port is set to 0

(zero), the default port (1813) is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server.

 Secret The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the RADIUS Accounting

Server and the switch.

TACACS+ Authentication Server Configuration

The table has one row for each TACACS+ Authentication Server and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description

 # The TACACS+ Authentication Server number for which the configuration below

applies.

 Enabled Enable the TACACS+ Authentication Server by checking this box.

 IP Address/Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ Authentication Server. IP address

is expressed in dotted decimal notation.

 Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0

(zero), the default port (49) is used on the TACACS+ Authentication Server.

 Secret The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the TACACS+

Authentication Server and the switch.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

246
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.11.7 RADIUS Overview

This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page. The

RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4-11-8 appears.

Figure 4-11-8 RADIUS Authentication/Accounting Server Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

RADIUS Authentication Servers

Object Description

 # The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.

 IP Address The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of
this server.

 State The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:

 Disabled: The server is disabled.

 Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and

running.

 Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and

the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.

 Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it

did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily

been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The
number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This

state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

247
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

RADIUS Accounting Servers

Object Description

 # The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.

 IP Address The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of

this server.

 State The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:

 Disabled: The server is disabled.

 Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and
running.

 Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and

the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts.

Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did

not reply within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been

disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of

seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This state is only
reachable when more than one server is enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

4.11.8 RADIUS Details

This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server. The RADIUS Authentication/Accounting for Server

Overview screen in Figure 4-11-9 appears.

248
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-9 RADIUS Authentication/Accounting for Server Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

RADIUS Authentication Servers

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 - RADIUS Authentication Client MIB.

Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Object Description

 Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four

transmit counters.

Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description

Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS

Accepts ccessAccepts Access-Accept packets (valid

or invalid) received from the

server.

249
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Rx Access Rejects radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS

ccessRejects Access-Reject packets (valid

or invalid) received from the

server.

Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS

Challenges ccessChallenges Access-Challenge packets

(valid or invalid) received from

the server.

Rx Malformed radiusAuthClientExt The number of malformed

Access MalformedAccessRe RADIUS Access-Response

Responses sponses packets received from the

server. Malformed packets

include packets with an invalid

length. Bad authenticators or

Message Authenticator

attributes or unknown types

are not included as malformed

access responses.

Rx Bad radiusAuthClientExtB The number of RADIUS

Authenticators adAuthenticators Access-Response packets

containing invalid

authenticators or Message

Authenticator attributes

received from the server.

Rx Unknown radiusAuthClientExtU The number of RADIUS

Types nknownTypes packets that were received

from the server on the

authentication port and

dropped for some other

reason.

Rx Packets radiusAuthClientExtP The number of RADIUS

Dropped acketsDropped packets that were received

from the server on the

authentication port and

dropped for some other

reason.

250
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Tx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS

Requests ccessRequests Access-Request packets sent

to the server. This does not

include retransmissions.

Tx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS

Retransmissio ccessRetransmission Access-Request packets

ns s retransmitted to the RADIUS

authentication server.

Tx Pending radiusAuthClientExtP The number of RADIUS

Requests endingRequests Access-Request packets

destined for the server that

have not yet timed out or

received a response. This

variable is incremented when

an Access-Request is sent and

decremented due to receipt of

an Access-Accept,

Access-Reject,

Access-Challenge, timeout, or

retransmission.

Tx Timeouts radiusAuthClientExtT The number of authentication

imeouts timeouts to the server. After a

timeout, the client may retry to

the same server, send to a

different server, or give up. A

retry to the same server is

counted as a retransmit as well

as a timeout. A send to a

different server is counted as a

Request as well as a timeout.

 Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip

time.

Name RFC4668 Name Description

IP - IP address and UDP port for the authentication server

Address in question.

251
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

State - Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the

following values:

Disabled: The selected server is disabled.

Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP

communication is not yet up and running.

Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is

up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready to

accept access attempts.

Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made

to this server, but it did not reply within the configured

timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled,

but will get re-enabled when the dead-time expires.

The number of seconds left before this occurs is

displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable

when more than one server is enabled.

Round-Tri radiusAuthClient The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between

p Time ExtRoundTripTim the most recent Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and

e the Access-Request that matched it from the RADIUS

authentication server. The granularity of this

measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates

that there hasn't been round-trip communication with

the server yet.

RADIUS Accounting Servers

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 - RADIUS Accounting Client MIB.

Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Object Description

 Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit

counters.

Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description

Rx Responses radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS

Responses packets (valid or invalid)

received from the server.

Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed

Responses MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received

es from the server. Malformed

252
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

packets include packets with

an invalid length. Bad

authenticators or or unknown

types are not included as

malformed access responses.

Rx Bad radiusAcctClientExt The number of RADIUS

Authenticators BadAuthenticators packets containing invalid

authenticators received from

the server.

Rx Unknown Types radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS

UnknownTypes packets of unknown types that

were received from the server

on the accounting port.

Rx Packets Dropped radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS

PacketsDropped packets that were received

from the server on the

accounting port and dropped

for some other reason.

Tx Requests radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS

Requests packets sent to the server.

This does not include

retransmissions.

Tx Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS

Retransmissions packets retransmitted to the

RADIUS accounting server.

Tx Pending radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS

Requests PendingRequests packets destined for the server

that have not yet timed out or

received a response. This

variable is incremented when

a Request is sent and

decremented due to receipt of

a Response, timeout, or

retransmission.

Tx Timeouts radiusAccClientExt The number of accounting

Timeouts timeouts to the server. After a

253
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

timeout, the client may retry to

the same server, send to a

different server, or give up. A

retry to the same server is

counted as a retransmit as

well as a timeout. A send to a

different server is counted as a

Request as well as a timeout.

 Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip
time.

Name RFC4670 Name Description

IP Address - IP address and UDP port for the accounting

server in question.

State - Shows the state of the server. It takes one of

the following values:

Disabled: The selected server is disabled.

Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP

communication is not yet up and running.

Ready: The server is enabled, IP

communication is up and running, and the

RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting

attempts.

Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts

were made to this server, but it did not reply

within the configured timeout. The server has

temporarily been disabled, but will get

re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The

number of seconds left before this occurs is

displayed in parentheses. This state is only

reachable when more than one server is

enabled.

Round-Trip radiusAccClientExtRo The time interval (measured in milliseconds)

Time undTripTime between the most recent Response and the

Request that matched it from the RADIUS

accounting server. The granularity of this

measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms

indicates that there hasn't been round-trip

communication with the server yet.

254
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests" counter will not be cleared by this operation.

4.11.9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration

Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch. In this case, field in the default IP Address

of the Managed Switch with 192.168.0.100. And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at

the Managed Switch’s 802.1x system configuration – 12345678 at this case.

1. Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key.

Figure 4-11-10 RADIUS Server Configuration screenshot

2. Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server

255
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-11 Windows Server – add new RADIUS client setting

3. Assign the client IP address to the Managed switch

Figure 4-11-12 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting

256
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4. The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch.

Figure 4-11-13 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting

5. Configure ports attribute of 802.1X, the same as “802.1X Port Configuration”.

Figure 4-11-14 802.1x Port Configuration

6. Create user data. The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC. For example, the

Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server, and then:

257
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-15 Windows 2003 AD server setting path

7. Enter ” Active Directory Users and Computers”, create legal user data, the next, right-click a user what you created
to enter properties, and what to be noticed:

258
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-16 Add User Properties screen

Figure 4-11-17 Add User Properties screen

Set the Ports Authenticate Status to “Force Authorized” if the port is connected to the RADIUS

server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch. Or once the 802.1X stat to
work, the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server.

259
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.11.10 802.1X Client Configuration

Windows XP is originally 802.1X support. As to other operating systems (windows 98SE, ME, 2000), an 802.1X client utility is

needed. The following procedures show how to configure 802.1X Authentication in Windows XP.

Please note that if you want to change the 802.1x authentication type of a wireless client, i.e. switch to EAP-TLS from EAP-MD5,

you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first, and add it in again.

 Configure Sample: EAP-MD5 Authentication

1. Go to Start > Control Panel, double-click on “Network Connections”.

2. Right-click on the Local Network Connection.

3. Click “Properties” to open up the Properties setting window.

Figure 4-11-18

4. Select “Authentication” tab.

5. Select “Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X” to enable 802.1x authentication.

6. Select “MD-5 Challenge” from the drop-down list box for EAP type.

260
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-11-19

7. Click “OK”.

8. When client has associated with the Managed Switch, a user authentication notice appears in system tray. Click on the

notice to continue.

Figure 4-11-20 Windows client popup login request message

261
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

9. Enter the user name, password and the logon domain that your account belongs.

10. Click “OK” to complete the validation process.

Figure 4-11-21

262
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12 Security
This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch, includes the user access and management control.

The Security page contains links to the following main topics:

 Port Limit Control

 Access Management

 HTTPs / SSH

 DHCP Snooping

 IP Source Guard

 ARP Inspection

4.12.1 Port Limit Control

This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings.

Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID. If Limit

Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port. If this number is exceeded, an action

is taken. The action can be one of the four different actions as described below.

The Limit Control module utilizes a lower-layer module, Port Security module, which manages MAC addresses learnt on the

port.

The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.

The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-1 appears.

263
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-12-1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

System Configuration

Object Description

 Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack. If

globally disabled, other modules may still use the underlying functionality, but

264
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled.

 Aging Enabled If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under

Aging Period.

 Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If

other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC

addresses, they may have other requirements to the aging period. The

underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules

that use the functionality.

The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.

To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario:

Suppose an end-host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is

connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled. The

end-host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that

the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't for aging, the end-host would

still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward. To overcome

this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a timer is started once the

end-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts looking for

frames from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging

Period, the end-host is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding

resources are freed on the switch.

Port Configuration
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.

 Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global

Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other

modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit

Control on a given port.

 Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This

number cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is

taken.

The stackswitch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all
ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled

port. Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a configured

265
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used all

available MAC addresses.

 Action If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:

None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no

further action.

Trap: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, send an SNMP trap. If

Aging is disabled, only one SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging enabled, new

SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded.

Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port.

This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and

no new will be learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected and

reconnected on the port (by disconnecting the cable), the port will remain shut

down. There are three ways to re-open the port:

1) Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch,

2) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch,

3) Click the Reopen button.

Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, both the

"Trap" and the "Shutdown" actions described above will be taken.

 State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's

point of view. The state takes one of four values:

Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.

Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.

Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can

only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap.

Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This

state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.

 Re-open Button If a port is shutdown by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this button,

which will only be enabled if this is the case. For other methods, refer to

Shutdown in the Action section.

Note, that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed, so

non-committed changes will be lost.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

266
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12.2 Access Management

Configure access management table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. If the application's type match any one of

the access management entries, it will allow access to the switch. The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure

4-12-2 appears.

Figure 4-12-2 Access Management Configuration Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable access management mode operation.

Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.

 End IP address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.

 HTTP/HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface that the
host IP address matched the entry.

 SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP
address matched the entry.

 TELNET/SSH Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface that the
host IP address matched the entry.

Buttons

: Click to add a new access management entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

267
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12.3 Access Management Statistics

This page provides statistics for access management. The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4-12-3 appears.

Figure 4-12-3 Access Management Statistics Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the switch.

 Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management

mode is enabled.

 Allow Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management

mode is enabled.

 Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management

mode is enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clear all statistics.

4.12.4 HTTPs

Configure HTTPS on this page. The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-4 appears.

Figure 4-12-4 HTTPS Configuration screen page screenshot

268
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation. When the current connection is HTTPS, to

apply HTTPS disabled mode operation will automatically redirect web browser to

an HTTP connection. Possible modes are:

 Enabled: Enable HTTPS mode operation.

 Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation.

 Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. It only significant if HTTPS mode

"Enabled" is selected. Automatically redirects web browser to an HTTPS

connection when both HTTPS mode and Automatic Redirect are enabled or

redirects web browser to an HTTP connection when both are disabled. Possible

modes are:

 Enabled: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.

 Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.5 SSH

Configure SSH on this page. This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration.

Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port,

the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port

security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC

address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to

forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

The status page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status. The SSH

Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-5 appears.

Figure 4-12-5 SSH Configuration screen page screenshot

269
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation. Possible modes are:

 Enabled: Enable SSH mode operation.

 Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

270
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12.6 Port Security Status

This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly

from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for

software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which

in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the

forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one

chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

The status page is divided into two sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status. The Port

Security Status screen in Figure 4-12-6 appears.

Figure 4-12-6 Port Security Status screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

User Module Legend

The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.

271
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Object Description

 User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.

 Abbr A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in

the port status table.

Port Status
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns, which are:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the

status for this particular port.

 Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has

enabled Port Security or not. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is

not enabled, whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that

letter has enabled port security.

 State Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:

Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.

Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is

awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.

Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control

user module, and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more

MAC addresses should be taken in.

Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user
module, and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC

addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re-opened on the

Limit Control configuration Web-page.

 MAC Count (Current, The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses

Limit) (forwarding as well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses

that can be learned on the port, respectively.

If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash

(-).

If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column will

show a dash (-).

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

272
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12.7 Port Security Detail

This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is a module with no direct

configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a user module has enabled port

security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are

passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or

block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the

MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The Port

Security Detail screen in Figure 4-12-7 appears.

Figure 4-12-7 Port Security Detail screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 MAC Address & VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses

ID are learned, a single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.

 State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In

the blocked state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.

 Time of Adding Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.

 Age/Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in

the blocked state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires. If all user

modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward, and aging is

enabled, the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address

still forwards traffic. If the age period (measured in seconds) expires and no

frames have been seen, the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table.

Otherwise a new age period will begin.

If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address

indefinitely, a dash (-) will be shown.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

273
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12.8 DHCP Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP

reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server. Configure DHCP Snooping on this page. The

DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-8 appears.

Figure 4-12-8 DHCP Snooping Configuration screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When enable DHCP

snooping mode operation, the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to

trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.

274
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.

 Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:

Configuration Trusted: Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message.

Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.12.9 DHCP Snooping Statistics

This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and

relay mode is disabled. And it doesn't count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client. The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics

screen in Figure 4-12-9 appears.

Figure 4-12-9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and
transmitted.

275
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Request The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Release The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets received and

transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets received and

Unassigned transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets received and

Unknown transmitted.

 Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets received and

Active transmitted.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the counters for the selected port.

4.12.10 IP Source Guard Configuration

IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the

DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to

spoof and use the IP address of another host. This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration. The IP Source Guard

Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-10 appears.

276
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-12-10 IP Source Guard Configuration screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All

Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled.

 Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode

Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this

given port.

 Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients can be learned on given ports.

277
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

This value can be 0, 1, 2 and unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value

of max dynamic client is equal 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding

that are matched in static entries on the specific port.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

4.12.11 IP Source Guard Static Table

This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table. The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4-12-11 appears.

Figure 4-12-11 Static IP Source Guard Table screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Port The logical port for the settings.

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings.

 IP Address Allowed Source IP address.

 MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address.

Buttons

: Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

278
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.12.12 ARP Inspection

ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2

networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests and responses

can go through DUT. This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration. The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in

Figure 4-12-12 appears.

Figure 4-12-12 ARP Inspection Configuration screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Mode of ARP Inspection Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.

279
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Configuration

 Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global

Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled

on this given port.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

4.12.13 ARP Inspection Static Table

This page provides Static ARP Inspection Table. The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4-12-13 appears.

Figure 4-12-13 Static ARP Inspection Table screen page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Port The logical port for the settings.

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings.

 MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.

 IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.

Buttons

: Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

280
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.13 Address Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps

MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame ).

This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the

administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address ), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame.

The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic

entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable

age time.

4.13.1 MAC Address Table Configuration

The MAC Address Table is configured on this page. Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static

MAC table here. The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4-13-1 appears.

Figure 4-13-1 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Aging Configuration

281
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.

Object Description

 Disable Automatic Enables/disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries

Aging

 Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded. By default, dynamic entries are

removed from the MAC after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.

(Range: 10-10000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

MAC Table Learning

If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out, another module is in control of the mode, so that it cannot be changed by the

user. An example of such a module is the MAC-Based Authentication under 802.1X.

Object Description

 Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is

received.

 Disable No learning is done.

 Secure Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.

Note: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static

Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management

link is lost and can only be restored by using another non-secure port or by

connecting to the switch via the serial interface.

Static MAC Table Configuration

The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain 64 entries. The MAC table is sorted

first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 MAC Address The MAC address of the entry.

 Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as

needed to modify the entry.

 Adding a New Static Click “Add New Static Entry” to add a new entry to the static MAC table. Specify

Entry the VLAN ID, MAC address, and port members for the new entry. Click "Save".

282
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.13.2 MAC Address Table Status

Dynamic MAC Table

Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries, and is sorted first by VLAN ID,

then by MAC address. The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4-13-2 appears.

Figure 4-13-2 MAC Address Table Status

Navigating the MAC Table

Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input

field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table. The first displayed

will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table.

The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table.

Clicking the “Refresh” button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match.

In addition, the two input fields will - upon a “Refresh” button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing

for continuous refresh with the same start address.

The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup. When the

end is reached the text "no more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the “|<<” button to start over.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry.

283
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry.

 MAC address The MAC address of the entry.

 Port Members The ports that are members of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC

address.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.13.3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024

entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by MAC address, and then by IP address. The Dynamic ARP

Inspection Table screen in Figure 4-13-3 appears.

Figure 4-13-3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screenshot

Navigating the ARP Inspection Table

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per

page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP

Inspection Table.

The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to select the starting point

in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the “Refresh” button will update the displayed table starting from that or the

closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a “Refresh” button click - assume

the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.

The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No
more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the “|<<” button to start over.

284
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the

status for this particular port.

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 MAC Address The MAC address of the entry.

 IP Address The IP address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC

address.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.13.4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table

Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by

port, then by VLAN ID, then by IP address, and then by IP mask. The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4-13-4

appears.

Figure 4-13-4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screenshot

Navigating the ARP Inspection Table

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per

page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source
Guard Table.

The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "IP address" and "IP mask" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the

Dynamic IP Source Guard Table. Clicking the “Refresh” button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest

285
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a “Refresh” button click - assume the

value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.

The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text "No

more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the “|<<” button to start over.

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the

status for this particular port.

 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry.

 MAC address The MAC address of the entry.

 IP Address The IP address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.

: Flushes all dynamic entries.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC

address.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

286
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.14 LLDP

4.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast

domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised

information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details

such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information

gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.

Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an extension of LLDP intended for managing

endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as

network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP

applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.

4.14.2 LLDP Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings. The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure

4-14-1 appears.

287
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-14-1 LLDP Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

LLDP Parameters

Object Description

 Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the

network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP

frame is determined by the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 -

32768 seconds.
Default: 30 seconds

This attribute must comply with the following rule:

(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) ≤65536, and Transmission Interval

>= (4 * Delay Interval)

 Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the

LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to

288
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10

times.

TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:

(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) ≤ 65536.

Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.

 Tx Delay If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is

transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the

value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval

value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.

This attribute must comply with the rule:

(4 * Delay Interval) ≤Transmission Interval

 Tx Reinit When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP

shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP

information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds

between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are

restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.

LLDP Port Configuration

The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.

Object Description

 Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.

 Mode Select LLDP mode.

Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information

from neighbor units is analyzed.

Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will

send out LLDP information.

Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP

information received from neighbors.

Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP

information received from neighbors.

 CDP Aware Select CDP awareness.

The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames (The switch

doesn't transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port

is enabled.
Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP

neighbours' table are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP

289
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP

TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours' table as shown below.

CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.

CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The

CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is

shown in the LLDP neighbours table.

CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.

CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description"

field.

Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities

cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as

"others" in the LLDP neighbours' table.

If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames

received from neighbour devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness

enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch.

Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn't

removed immediately, but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.

 Port Descr Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP

information transmitted.

 Sys Name Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information

transmitted.

 Sys Descr Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP

information transmitted.

 Sys Capa Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP

information transmitted.

 Mgmt Addr Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP

information transmitted.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

290
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.14.3 LLDP MED Configuration

This page allows you to configure the LLDP-MED. The LLDPMED Configuration screen in Figure 4-14-2 appears.

Figure 4-14-2 LLDPMED Configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Fast start repeat count

Object Description

 Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of

endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it

is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically

relevant to particular endpoint types (for example only advertise the voice

network policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve the

limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can

come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy.

With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction

between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to

achieve these related properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only
transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is

detected, will an LLDP-MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to

291
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port. The

LLDP-MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the

LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new LLDP-MED neighbour has been

detected in order share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible to new

neighbours.

Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between

neighbours, it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times

to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast

start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start

transmission would be repeated. The recommended value is 4 times, given that 4

LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP frame

with new information is received.

It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is

only intended to run on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices

and Endpoint Devices, and as such does not apply to links between LAN

infrastructure elements, including Network Connectivity Devices, or other types

of links.

Coordinates Location

Object Description

 Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4

digits.

It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the

equator.

 Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 4

digits.

It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West

of the prime meridian.

 Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4

digits.

It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).

Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.

Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have

different floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a

building, and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a

building, 0.0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main
entrance.

 Map Datum The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option

292
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327,

Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich.

NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian

Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical

Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing

locations on land, not near tidal water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).

NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian

Name: Greenwich; The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water

(MLLW). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on

water/sea/ocean.

Civic Address Location

IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).

Object Description

 Country code The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE

or US.

 State National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).

 County County, parish, gun (Japan), district.

 City City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen

 City district City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan)

 Block (Neighborhood) Neighborhood, block

 Street Street - Example: Poppelvej

 Leading street Leading street direction - Example: N

direction

 Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix - Example: SW

 Street suffix Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz

 House no. House number - Example: 21

 House no. suffix House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2

 Landmark Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University

 Additional location Additional location info - Example: South Wing

info

 Name Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn

 Zip code Postal/zip code - Example: 2791

293
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Building Building (structure) - Example: Low Library

 Apartment Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42

 Floor Floor - Example: 4

 Room no. Room number - Example: 450F

 Place type Place type - Example: Office

 Postal community Postal community name - Example: Leonia

name

 P.O. Box Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345

 Additional code Additional code - Example: 1320300003

Emergency Call Service

Emergency Call Service (e.g. E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.

Object Description

 Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN

Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN

trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding

to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.

Policies
Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration, along
with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper

network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation

or loss of service.

Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time’ network policy requirements, such as interactive

voice and/or video services.

The network policy attributes advertised are:

1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)

2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)

3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)

This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port.

The application types specifically addressed are:

1. Voice
2. Guest Voice

3. Softphone Voice

294
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4. Video Conferencing

5. Streaming Video

6. Control / Signaling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above)

A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different policies per application type.

LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports

on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or

port configuration.

It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and

Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link

interior to the LAN.

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.

 Policy ID ID for the policy. This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the

polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports.

 Application Type Intended use of the application types:

Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances

supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a

separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from

data applications.

Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a

different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media. This application

type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those

advertised in the Voice application policy.

Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest

users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar

appliances supporting interactive voice services.

Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require

a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.

This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies

apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.

Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric

devices, such as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not

support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged’

VLAN or a single 'tagged’ data specific VLAN. When a network policy is defined

for use with an 'untagged’ VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority
field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.

Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and

295
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.

Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content

distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services

that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP

with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.

Video Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a

separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media. This application

type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those

advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy.

 Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged’ or an

'untagged’ VLAN.

Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as

such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this

case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the

DSCP value has relevance.

Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format,

and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well

as the DSCP value. The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the

tag header. The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as

defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

 VLAN ID VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003

 L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2

Priority may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE

802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in

IEEE 802.1D-2004.

 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified

application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64

code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default

DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.

 Adding a new policy Click “Add New Policy” to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag,

VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy. Click "Save".

The number of policies supported is 32

Port Policies Configuration

Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies, based on the

authenticated user identity or port configuration.

Object Description

296
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Port The port number for which the configuration applies.

 Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply for a given port. The set of policies is selected

by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.14.4 LLDP-MED Neighbor

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP-MED neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an

LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP-MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4-14-3 appears. The columns hold the

following information:

Figure 4-14-3 LLDP-MED Neighbor Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Fast start repeat count

Object Description

 Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received.

 Device Type LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network

Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.

LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition

LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide

access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint
Devices. An LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device

based on any of the following technologies:

297
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

1. LAN Switch/Router

2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge

3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)

4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point

5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by

TIA-1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.

LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition

Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is

broken into further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.

Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities

defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class. Fore-example will any

LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II)

also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I),

and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication

Device (Class III) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to both

Media Endpoints (Class II) and Generic Endpoints (Class I).

LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)

The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint

products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057,

however do not support IP media or act as an end-user communication

appliance. Such devices may include (but are not limited to) IP Communication

Controllers, other communication related servers, or any device requiring basic

services as defined in TIA-1057.

Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device

location, network policy, power management, and inventory management.

LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)

The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint

products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated

with a particular end user. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for

the previous Generic Endpoint Class (Class I), and are extended to include

aspects related to media streaming. Example product categories expected to

adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) Voice / Media Gateways,

Conference Bridges, Media Servers, and similar.

Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network

layer policy discovery.

LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)

The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all

endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP

media. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic

Endpoint (Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to

298
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

include aspects related to end user devices. Example product categories

expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) end user

communication appliances, such as IP Phones, PC-based softphones, or other

communication appliances that directly support the end user.

Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier

(including ECS / E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory

management

 LLDP-MED LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's LLDP-MED capabilities.

Capabilities The possible capabilities are:

1. LLDP-MED capabilities

2. Network Policy

3. Location Identification

4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE

5. Extended Power via MDI - PD

6. Inventory

7. Reserved

 Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for

this network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device.

The poosible application types are shown below.

Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances

supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a

separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from

data applications.

Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for

the voice signaling than for the voice media.

Guest Voice - to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest

users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar

appliances supporting interactive voice services.

Guest Voice Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a different

policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.

Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric

devices, such as PCs or laptops.

Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and

other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.

Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content

distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services

that require specific network policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP

with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.

Video Signaling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for

the video signaling than for the video media.

299
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the

policy is required by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown

Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently

unknown.

Defined: The network policy is defined.

 TAG TAG is indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an

untagged VLAN. Can be Tagged ot Untagged

Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not

include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format

 VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE

802.1Q-2003. A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A

value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as

defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level

is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.

 Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type.One of

eight priority levels (0 through 7)

 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the

specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code

point values (0 through 63).

 Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the link

partner.

 Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at the

status link partner. If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation status is

disabled, the 802.3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU
type field value rather than by auto-negotiation.

 Auto-negotiation Auto-negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC/PHY capabilities.

Capabilities

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.14.5 Neighbor

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an

LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4-14-4 appears.

300
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-14-4 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received.

 Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.

 Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port.

 System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.

 Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit.

 System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible

capabilities are:

1. Other

2. Repeater

3. Bridge

4. WLAN Access Point

5. Router

6. Telephone

7. DOCSIS cable device

8. Station only

9. Reserved

When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is

disabled, the capability is followed by (-).

 Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit's address that is used for higher layer

entities to assist the discovery by the network management. This could for

instance hold the neighbor's IP address.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

301
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.14.6 Port Statistics

This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic. Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to

the whole stack, switch, while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch. The LLDP Statistics screen in

Figure 4-14-5 appears.

Figure 4-14-5 LLDP Statistics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Global Counters

Object Description

 Neighbor entries were It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also

last changed shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected.

 Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.

Entries Added

 Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.

Entries Deleted

 Total Neighbors Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full.

Entries Dropped

 Total Neighbors Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.
Entries Aged Out

302
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Local Counters
The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:

Object Description

 Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.

 Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.

 Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port.

 Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.

 Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full,

the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many

Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table

when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table.

Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down, an LLDP

shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.

 TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs

(TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and

discarded.

 TLVs Unrecognized The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.

 Org. Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received.

 Age-Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP

information is valid (age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the

age out time, the LLDP information is removed, and the Age-Out counter is

incremented.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

: Clears the local counters. All counters (including global counters) are cleared upon reboot.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

303
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.15 Network Diagnostics

This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot. The diagnostic tools are

designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers.

Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under System the

following topics are provided to configure and view the system information:

This section has the following items:

 Ping

 IPv6 Ping

 Remote IP Ping

 Cable Diagnostic

PING
The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues. The Managed Switch

transmit ICMP packets, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply.

Cable Diagnostics

The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables. These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and

operating conditions, and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted-pair cabling. There might be

two statuses as follow:

 If the link is established on the twisted-pair interface in 1000Base-T mode, the Cable Diagnostics can run without

disruption of the link or of any data transfer.

 If the link is established in 100Base-TX or 10Base-T, the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics

are running.

After the diagnostics are finished, the link is reestablished. And the following functions are available.

 Coupling between cable pairs.

 Cable pair termination

 Cable Length

4.15.1 Ping

This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.

After you press “Start”, 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon

reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The
ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-15-1 appears.

304
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-15-1 ICMP Ping page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 IP Address The destination IP Address.

 Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

 Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.

 Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.

Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch, or you had setup the

correct gateway IP address.

Buttons

: Click to transmit ICMP packets.

: Click to re-start diagnostics with PING.

4.15.2 IPv6 Ping

This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.

After you press “Start”, 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon

reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The

ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4-15-2 appears.

305
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-15-2 ICMPv6 Ping page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 IP Address The destination IP Address.

 Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

 Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.

 Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.

Buttons

: Click to transmit ICMP packets.

: Click to re-start diagnostics with PING.

4.15.3 Remote IP Ping Test

This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port.

After you press “Test”, 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon

reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The

ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4-15-3 appears.

306
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-15-3 Remote IP Ping Test page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The logical port for the settings.

 Remote IP Address The destination IP Address.

 Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes.

 Result Display the ping result.

4.15.4 Cable Diagnostics

This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics.

Press to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If all ports are selected, this can take approximately 15

307
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

seconds. When completed, the page refreshes automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status

table. Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 140 meters.

10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic. Therefore, running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100

Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete. The ports belong to the currently

selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header. The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4-15-4 appears.

Figure 4-15-4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics.

 Cable Status Port:

Port number.

Pair:

The status of the cable pair.

OK - Correctly terminated pair

Open - Open pair

Short - Shorted pair

308
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Short A - Cross-pair short to pair A

Short B - Cross-pair short to pair B

Short C - Cross-pair short to pair C

Short D - Cross-pair short to pair D

Cross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair A

Cross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair B

Cross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair C

Cross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair D

Length:

The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters

Buttons

: Click to run the diagnostics.

309
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.16 Loop Protection

This chapter describes enabling loop protection function that provides loop protection to prevent broadcast loops in SFC4000T.

4.16.1 Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations, and possibly change them as well; screen in

Figure 4-16-1 appears.

Figure 4-16-1 Loop protection configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

310
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

General Settings

Object Description

 Enable Loop Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).

Protection

 Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. valid values

are 1 to 10 seconds.

 Shutdown Time The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a

loop is detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Valid values are 0 to

604800 seconds (7 days). A value of zero will keep a port disabled (until next

device restart).

Port Configuration

Object Description

 Port The switch port number of the port.

 Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port.

 Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. Valid values

are Shutdown Port, Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.

 Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or

whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU's.

Buttons

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.16.2 Loop Protection Status

This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch, screen in Figure 4-16-2 appears.

Figure 4-16-2 Loop protection status screenshot

311
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Port The switch port number of the logical port.

 Action The currently configured port action.

 Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode.

 Loops The number of loops detected on this port.

 Status The current loop protection status of the port.

 Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.

 Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.

4.17 sFlow
The sFlow (RFC 3176) is a protocol based on standard network export and used on monitoring the network traffic information

developed by the InMon Company. The monitored switch or router sends date to the client analyzer through its main operations

such as sampling and statistic, then the analyzer will analyze according to the user requirements so to monitor the network.

A sFlow monitor system includes: sFlow proxy, central data collector and sFlow analyzer. The sFlow proxy collects data from the

switch using sampling technology. The sFlow collector is for formatting the sample data statistic which is to be forwarded to the

sFlow analyzer which will analyze the sample data and perform corresponding measure according to the result. Our switch here

acts as the proxy and central data collector in the sFlow system. We have achieved data sampling and statistic targeting

physical port.

Our data sample includes the IPv4 and IPv6 packets. Extensions of other types are not supported so far. As for non IPv4 and

IPv6 packet, the unify HEADER mode will be adopted following the requirements in RFC3176, copying the head information of

the packet based on analyzing the type of its protocol.

The latest sFlow protocol presented by InMon Company is the version 5. Since it is the version 4 which is realized in the

RFC3176, version conflict might exist in some case such as the structure and the packet format. This is because the version 5

has not become the official protocol, so, in order to be compatible with current applications, we will continue to follow the

RFC3176.

312
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.17.1 sFlow Configuration

This page allows for configuring sFlow. The configuration is divided into two parts: Configuration of the sFlow receiver (a.k.a.

sFlow collector) and configuration of per-port flow and counter samplers.

sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory, which means that a reboot will disable sFlow sampling, screen in

Figure 4-17-1 appears.

Figure 4-17-1 sFlow Configuration page screenshot

313
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Receiver Configuration

Object Description

 Owner Basically, sFlow can be configured in two ways: Through local management

using the Web or CLI interface or through SNMP. This read-only field shows the

owner of the current sFlow configuration and assumes values as follows:

• If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains <none>.

• If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains

<Configured through local management>.

• If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string

identifying the sFlow receiver.

If sFlow is configured through SNMP, all controls - except for the Release-button

- are disabled to avoid inadvertent reconfiguration.

The button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow

sampling. The button is disabled if sFlow is currently unclaimed. If configured

through SNMP, the release must be confirmed (a confirmation request will

appear).

 IP Address/Hostname The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver. Both IPv4 and IPv6

addresses are supported.

 UDP Port The UDP port on which the sFlow receiver listens to sFlow datagrams. If set to 0

(zero), the default port (6343) is used.

 Timeout The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow

owner is released. While active, the current time left can be updated with a click

on the Refresh-button. If locally managed, the timeout can be changed on the fly

without affecting any other settings.

 Max. Datagram Size The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample

datagram. This should be set to a value that avoids fragmentation of the sFlow

datagrams. Valid range is 200 to 1468 bytes with default being 1400 bytes.

Port Configuration

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the configuration below applies.

 Flow Sampler Enabled Enables/disables flow sampling on this port.

 Flow Sampler The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling. Set to N to sample on average
Sampling Rate 1/Nth of the packets transmitted/received on the port.

Not all sampling rates are achievable. If an unsupported sampling rate is

314
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

requested, the switch will automatically adjust it to the closest achievable. This

will be reported back in this field.

 Flow Sampler Max. The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to

Header the sFlow datagram. Valid range is 14 to 200 bytes with default being 128 bytes.

If the maximum datagram size does not take into account the maximum header

size, samples may be dropped.

 Counter Poller Enables/disables counter polling on this port.

Enabled

 Counter Poller Interval With counter polling enabled, this specifies the interval - in seconds - between

counter poller samples.

Buttons

: See description under Owner.

: Click to refresh the page. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.

: Click to save changes. Note that sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.17.2 sFlow Status

This page shows receiver and per-port sFlow statistics, screen in Figure 4-17-2 appears.

315
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-17-2 sFlow Statistics page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Receiver Statistics

Object Description

 Owner This field shows the current owner of the sFlow configuration. It assumes one of

three values as follows:

• If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains <none>.

• If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains

<Configured through local management>.

• If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string

identifying the sFlow receiver.

316
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 IP Address/Hostname The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver.

 Timeout The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow

owner is released.

 Tx Successes The number of UDP datagrams successfully sent to the sFlow receiver.

 Tx Errors The number of UDP datagrams that has failed transmission.

The most common source of errors is invalid sFlow receiver IP/hostname

configuration. To diagnose, paste the receiver's IP address/hostname into the

Ping Web page (Diagnostics → Ping/Ping6).

 Flow Samples The total number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver.

 Counter Samples The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver.

Port Statistics

Object Description

 Port The port number for which the following statistics applies.

 Rx and Tx Flow The number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port.

Samples Here, flow samples are divided into Rx and Tx flow samples, where Rx flow

samples contains the number of packets that were sampled upon reception

(ingress) on the port and Tx flow samples contains the number of packets that

were sampled upon transmission (egress) on the port.

 Counter Samples The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from

this port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Click to refresh the page.

: Clears the sFlow receiver counters.

: Clears the per-port counters.

317
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.18 RMON
RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP. RMON is a set of MIB definitions, used to define standard

network monitor functions and interfaces, enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote

monitors. RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets.

MID of RMON consists of 10 groups. The switch supports the most frequently used group 1, 2, 3 and 9:

 Statistics: Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent.

 History: Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics.

 Alarm: Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for
RMON Agent records.

 Event: A list of all events generated by RMON Agent.

Alarm depends on the implementation of Event. Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics. Alarm

and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network, and provide some alerts upon abnormal events

(sending Trap or record in logs).

4.18.1 RMON Alarm Configuration

Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.; screen in Figure 4-18-1 appears.

Figure 4-18-1 RMON Alarm configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and

falling threshold. The range is from 1 to 2^31-1.

 Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are:

InOctets: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing

318
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

characters.

InUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer

protocol.

InNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a

higher-layer protocol.

InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets

are normal.

InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them

from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

InUnknownProtos: the number of the inbound packets that were discarded

because of the unknown or un-support protocol.

OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface , including

framing characters.

OutUcastPkts: The number of uni-cast packets that request to transmit.

OutNUcastPkts: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets that request

to transmit.

OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the

packets is normal.

OutErrors: The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted

because of errors.

OutQLen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).

 Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be

compared against the thresholds, possible sample types are:

Absolute: Get the sample directly.

Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).

 Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

 Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be

compared against the thresholds, possible sample types are:

RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.

FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.

RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising

threshold or less than the falling threshold (default).

 Rising Threshold Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).

 Rising Index Rising event index (1-65535).

 Falling Threshold Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)

 Falling Index Falling event index (1-65535).

Buttons

319
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to add a new community entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.2 RMON Alarm Detail

This page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry; screen in Figure 4-18-2 appears.

Figure 4-18-2 Detailed RMON Alarm ID page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and

falling threshold.

 Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled

 Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be

compared against the thresholds.

 Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

 Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.

 Rising Threshold Rising threshold value.

 Rising Index Rising event index.

 Falling Threshold Falling threshold value.

 Falling Index Falling event index.

320
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.3 RMON Alarm Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table, default being

20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the

beginning of the Alarm table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table; screen in Figure

4-18-3 appears.

Figure 4-18-3 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.

 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and

falling threshold.

 Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled

 Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be

compared against the thresholds.

 Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

 Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.

 Rising Threshold Rising threshold value.

321
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Rising Index Rising event index.

 Falling Threshold Falling threshold value.

 Falling Index Falling event index.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.4 RMON Event Configuration

Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-18-4 appears.

Figure 4-18-4 RMON event configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

 Desc Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.

 Type Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are:

none: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing

characters.

log: The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

snmptrap: The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a

higher-layer protocol.
logandtrap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets

are normal.

322
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Community Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127,

default is "public".

 Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an

event.

Buttons

: Click to add a new community entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.5 RMON Event Detail

This page provides an overview of RMON event entries; screen in Figure 4-18-5 appears.

Figure 4-18-5 Detailed RMON Event ID page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry.

 Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry.

 LogTime Indicates Event log time

 LogDescription Indicates the Event description.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

323
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4.18.6 RMON Event Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries.Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table, default

being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from

the beginning of the Event table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event

table table; screen in Figure 4-18-6 appears.

Figure 4-18-6 RMON Event Overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry.

 Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry.

 LogTime Indicates Event log time

 LogDescription Indicates the Event description.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.7 RMON History Configuration

Configure RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-18-7 appears.

324
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-18-7 RMON history configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

 Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value

must add 1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value

is 2005.

 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The

range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.

 Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in

RMON. The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.

 Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON.

Buttons

: Click to add a new community entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.8 RMON History Detail

This page provides an detail of RMON history entries; screen in Figure 4-18-8 appears.

325
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-18-8 RMON history Detail page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 History Index Indicates the index of History control entry.

 Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry

 Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to

lack of resources.

 Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to

lack of resources.

 Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on

the network.

 Pkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and

multicast packets) received.

 Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address.

 Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast

address.

 CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits,

but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.

 Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

 Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

326
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Fragments The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Jabber The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

 Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface

during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.18.9 RMON History Status

This page provides an overview of RMON History entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the History table, default

being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from

the beginning of the History table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the

History table; screen in Figure 4-18-9 appears.

Figure 4-18-9 RMON history overview page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 History Index Indicates the index of History control entry.

 Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry

 Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to
lack of resources.

327
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

 Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to

lack of resources.

 Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on

the network.

 Pkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and

multicast packets) received.

 Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address.

 Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast

address.

 CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits,

but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.

 Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

 Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

 Frag. The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Jabb. The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Coll. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

 Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface

during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

4.18.10 RMON Statistics Configuration

Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID; screen in Figure 4-18-10 appears.

328
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-18-10 RMON Statistics configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Delete Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

 ID Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

 Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value

must add 1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value

is 2005

Buttons

: Click to add a new community entry.

: Click to save changes.

: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

4.18.11 RMON Statistics Detail

This page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry; screen in Figure 4-18-11 appears.

329
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 4-18-11 Loop protection configuration page screenshot

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 Data Source The port ID which wants to be monitored.

 Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to

lack of resources.

 Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on

the network.

 Pkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and

multicast packets) received.

 Broad-cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address.

 Multi-cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast

address.

 CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits,

but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.

 Under-size The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

 Over-size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

 Frag. The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid

330
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

CRC.

 Jabb. The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Coll. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

 64 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets

in length.

 65~127 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

65 to 127 octets in length.

 128~255 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

128 to 255 octets in length.

 256~511 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

256 to 511 octets in length.

 512~1023 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

512 to 1023 octets in length.

 1024~1588 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

1024 to 1588 octets in length.

Buttons

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

4.18.12 RMON Statistics Status

This page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table, default

being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from

the beginning of the Statistics table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table; screen in
Figure 4-18-12 appears.

Figure 4-18-12 RMON Statistics Status Overview page screenshot

331
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The page includes the following fields:

Object Description

 ID Indicates the index of Statistics entry.

 Data Source (ifIndex) The port ID which wants to be monitored.

 Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to

lack of resources.

 Octets The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on

the network.

 Pkts The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and

multicast packets) received.

 Broad-cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast

address.

 Multi-cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast

address.

 CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits,

but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.

 Under-size The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

 Over-size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

 Frag. The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Jabb. The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid

CRC.

 Coll. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

 64 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets

in length.

 65~127 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

65 to 127 octets in length.

 128~255 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

128 to 255 octets in length.

 256~511 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

256 to 511 octets in length.

 512~1023 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

512 to 1023 octets in length.

 1024~1588 The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between

1024 to 1588 octets in length.

Buttons

332
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

: Click to refresh the page immediately.

Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest ID.

: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

333
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

5. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE

5.1 Accessing the CLI

When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet

connection, the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's

command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.

This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).

Logon to the Console

Once the terminal has connected to the device, power on the Managed Switch, the terminal will display that it is running testing
procedures.

Then, the following message asks the login username & password. The factory default password as following and the login
screen in Figure 5-1 appears.

Username: admin
Password: admin

Figure 5-1 Managed Switch Console Login screen

1. For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.

2. Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface.

334
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Configure IP address

The SFC4000 Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following.

IP Address: 192.168.0.100

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0

To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch, please use the procedures as follow:

 Show the current IP address

1. On ”SFC4000T/> ” prompt, enter “ip configuration”.

2. The screen displays the current IP address, Subnet Mask and Gateway. As show in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2 Show IP information screen

 Configure IP address

3. On “SFC4000T/> ” prompt, enter the following command and press <Enter>. As show in Figure 5-3.

SFC4000T/> ip setup 192.168.0.101 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.253 1

The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch.
IP: 192.168.0.101
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway: 192.168.0.253
VLAN ID: 1

335
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Figure 5-3 Set IP address screen

4. Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed.

If the IP address is successfully configured, the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately. You can
access the Web interface of Managed Switch through the new IP address.

If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter, enter “help” anytime in

console to get the help description.

You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can

remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port,

regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any

terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator

such as TIP

336
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

5.2 Telnet Login

The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management. The switch asks for user name and password for remote

login when using telnet, please use “admin” for username & password.

337
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6. Command Line Mode

The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command. A sample of the CLI command

modes are described below. Each of the command modes supports specific software commands.

Command Groups:

System System settings and reset options

IP IP configuration and Ping

Port Port management

MAC MAC address table

VLAN Virtual LAN

PVLAN Private VLAN

Security Security management

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

Aggr Link Aggregation

LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol

LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media

QoS Quality of Service

Mirror Port mirroring

Config Load/Save of configuration via TFTP

Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP

UPnP Universal Plug and Play

MVR Multicast VLAN Registration

Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for voice traffic

Loop Protection Loop Protection

IPMC MLD/IGMP Snooping

VLC VLAN Control List

SMTP SMTP Control Configure

338
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.1 System Command

System Configuration

Description:

Show system configuration.

Syntax:

System Configuration [all | (port <port_list>)]

Parameters:

all : Show all switch configuration, default: Show system configuration

port : Show switch port configuration

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
To display system information:

SFC4000T:/>System configuration

System Contact :

System Name : SFC4000T

System Location :

Timezone Offset : 0

MAC Address : 00-30-4f-11-22-33

System Time : 1970-01-01 Thu 00:24:39+00:00

System Uptime : 00:24:39

Software Version: Beta1205281742

Software Date : 2012-05-28T17:42:57+0800

Previous Restart: Cold

SFC4000T:/>

System Log Configuration

Description:

Show system log configuration.

Syntax:

System Log Configuration

Example:

339
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

To display system log information:

SFC4000T:/>System log configuration

System Log Configuration:

=========================

System Log Server Mode : Disabled

System Log Server Address :

System Log Level : Info

SFC4000T:/>

System Version

Description:

Show system version information.

Syntax:

System Version

Example:
To display system version:

SFC4000T:/>System version

Version : Beta1205281742

Build Date : 2012-05-28T17:42:57+0800

SFC4000T:/>

System Log Server Mode

Description:

Show or set the system log server mode.

Syntax:

System Log Server Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable system log server mode

disable: Disable system log server mode

(default: Show system Log server mode)

340
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
To show the log server mode:

SFC4000T:/>System log server mode

System Log Server Mode : Disabled

System Name

Description:

Set or show the system name.

Syntax:

System Name [<name>]

Parameters:

<name>: System name string. (1-255)

Use "" to clear the string

System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-).

No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name.

The first character must be an alpha character, and the first or last character must not be a minus sign.

Example:
To set device title:

SFC4000T:/>System name SFC4000T-LAB

System Contact

Description:

Set or show the system contact.

Syntax:

System Contact [<contact>]

Parameters:

<contact>: System contact string. (1-255)

341
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Use "" to clear the string

In CLI, No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact.

Default Setting:

empty

Example:
To set device contact:

SFC4000T:/>System contact SFC4000T-Test

System Log Server Address

Description:

Show or set the system log server address.

Syntax:

System Log Server Address [<ip_addr_string>]

Parameters:

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

Default Setting:

empty

Example:
To set log server address:

SFC4000T:/> log server address 192.168.0.21

System Location

Description:

Set or show the system location.

Syntax:

System Location [<location>]

Parameters:

<location>: System location string. (1-255)

342
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Use "" to clear the string

In CLI, no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a location.

Default Setting:

empty

Example:
To set device location:

SFC4000T:/>System location 9F-LAB

System Log Level

Description:

Show or set the system log level.

It uses to determine what kind of message will send to syslog server.

Syntax:

System Log Level [info|warning|error]

Parameters:

info : Send informations, warnings and errors

warning : Send warnings and errors

error : Send errors

Default Setting:

info

Example:
To set log level:

SFC4000T:/> log level warning

System Timezone

Description:

Set or show the system timezone offset.

Syntax:

343
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

System Timezone [<offset>]

Parameters:

<offset>: Time zone offset in minutes (-720 to 720) relative to UTC

Default Setting:

Example:
To set timezone:

SFC4000T:/>system timezone 120

System Log Lookup

Description:

Show or clear the system log.

Syntax:

System Log Lookup [<log_id>] [all|info|warning|error]

Parameters:

<log_id>: System log ID or range (default: All entries)

all : Show all levels (default)

info : Show informations

warning : Show warnings

error : Show errors

Example:
To show system log:

SFC4000T:/>system log lookup

Number of entries:

Info :2

Warning: 0

Error :0

All :2

ID Level Time Message

---- ------ ------------------------- -------

1 Info 1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:02+00:00 Switch just made a cold boot.

344
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

2 Info 1970-01-01 Thu 00:00:06+00:00 Link up on port 23

SFC4000T:/>

System Log Clear

Description:

Clear the system log.

Syntax:

System Log Clear [all|info|warning|error]

Parameters:

all : Show all levels (default)

info : Show informations

warning : Show warnings

error : Show errors

Example:
To sclear the system log:

SFC4000T:/>system log clear

SFC4000T:/>

System Reboot

Description:

Reboot the system.

Syntax:

System Reboot

Example:
To reboot device without changing any of the settings:

SFC4000T:/>system reboot

345
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

System Restore Default

Description:

Restore factory default configuration.

Syntax:

System Restore Default [keep_ip]

Parameters:

keep_ip: Keep IP configuration, default: Restore full configuration

Example:
To restore default value but not reset IP address:

SFC4000T:/>system restore default keep_ip

System Load

Description:

Show current CPU load: 100ms, 1s and 10s running average (in percent, zero is idle).

Syntax:

System Load

Example:
To show current CPU load:

SFC4000T:/>system load

Load average(100ms, 1s, 10s): 1%, 1%, 1%

346
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.2 IP Command

IP Configuration

Description:
Show IP configuration.

Syntax:
IP Configuration

Example:
Show IP configuration:

SFC4000T:/>ip configuration

IP Configuration:

=================

DHCP Client : Disabled

IP Address : 192.168.0.101

IP Mask : 255.255.255.0

IP Router : 192.168.0.254

DNS Server : 0.0.0.0

VLAN ID :1

DNS Proxy : Disabled

IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode : Disabled

IPv6 Link-Local Address: fe80::230:4fff:fe11:2233

IPv6 Address : ::192.168.0.100

IPv6 Prefix : 96

IPv6 Router : ::

Active Configuration for IPv6: (Static with Stateless)

IPv6 Address: fe80:2::230:4fff:fe11:2233/64 Scope:Link

Status:UP/RUNNING(Enabled)/MTU 1500/LinkMTU is 1500

IPv6 Address: ::192.168.0.100/96 Scope:Global

Status:UP/RUNNING(Enabled)/MTU 1500/LinkMTU is 1500

SFC4000T:/>

347
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IP DHCP

Description:
Set or show the DHCP client mode.

Syntax:
IP DHCP [enable|disable]

Parameters:
enable : Enable or renew DHCP client

disable: Disable DHCP client

Default Setting:

Disable

Example:
Disable DHCP sever:

SFC4000T:/>ip dhcp disable

IP Setup

Description:
Set or show the IP setup.

Syntax:
IP Setup [<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>] [<ip_router>] [<vid>]

Parameters:
<ip_addr> : IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address

<ip_mask> : IP subnet mask (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP mask

<ip_router>: IP router (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP router

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show VLAN ID

Default Setting:

IP Address : 192.168.0.100

IP Mask : 255.255.255.0
IP Router : 192.168.0.1

DNS Server : 0.0.0.0

348
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VLAN ID :1

Example:
Set IP address:

SFC4000T:/>ip setup 192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0

IP Ping

Description:
Ping IP address (ICMP echo).

Syntax:
IP Ping <ip_addr_string> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count <ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]

Parameters:
<ip_addr_string>: IPv4 host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

length : PING Length keyword

<ping_length> : Ping ICMP data length (2-1452; Default is 56), excluding MAC, IP and ICMP headers

count : PING Count keyword

<ping_count> : Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count (1-60; Default is 5)

interval : PING Interval keyword

<ping_interval> : Ping interval (0-30; Default is 0)

Example:

SFC4000T:/>ip ping 192.168.0.21

PING server 192.168.0.21

60 bytes from 192.168.0.21: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms

60 bytes from 192.168.0.21: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms

60 bytes from 192.168.0.21: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms

60 bytes from 192.168.0.21: icmp_seq=3, time=10ms

60 bytes from 192.168.0.21: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms

Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad

IP DNS

Description:
Set or show the DNS server address.

349
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:
IP DNS [<ip_addr>]

Parameters:
<ip_addr>: IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Showdne IP address

Default Setting:

0.0.0.0

Example:
Set DNS IP address:

SFC4000T:/>ip dns 168.95.1.1

IP DNS Proxy

Description:
Set or show the IP DNS Proxy mode.

Syntax:
IP DNS_Proxy [enable|disable]

Parameters:
enable : Enable DNS Proxy
disable: Disable DNS Proxy

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable DNS proxy function:

SFC4000T:/>ip dns_proxy enable

IPv6 AUTOCINFIG

Description:
Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode.

350
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:
IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG [enable|disable]

Parameters:
enable : Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode

disable: Disable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IPv6 autoconfig function:

SFC4000T:/>ip ipv6 autoconfig enable

IPv6 Setup

Description:
Set or show the IPv6 setup.

Syntax:
IP IPv6 Setup [<ipv6_addr>] [<ipv6_prefix>] [<ipv6_router>]

Parameters:
<ipv6_addr> : IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separates each field (:). For example, four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field (:). For

example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand

way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a

following legally IPv4 address. For example,'::192.1.2.34'.

<ipv6_prefix>: IPv6 subnet mask , default: Show IPv6 prefix

<ipv6_router>: IPv6 router , default: Show IPv6 router. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up

to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'.

The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit

groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a following legally IPv4 address. For

example,'::192.1.2.34'.

Default Setting:
IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode : Disabled

IPv6 Link-Local Address: fe80::6082:cdb9:19ab:c0e2

IPv6 Address : ::192.168.0.100

351
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IPv6 Prefix : 96

IPv6 Router : ::

Example:
Set IPv6 address:

SFC4000T:/>ip ipv6 setup 2001::0002 64 2100::0001

IPv6 Ping

Description:
Ping IPv6 address (ICMPv6 echo).

Syntax:
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count <ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]

Parameters:
<ipv6_addr> : IPv6 host address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four

hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field (:). For example, four hexadecimal digits with a

colon separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special

syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros;

but it can only appear once. It also used a following legally IPv4 address. For example,'::192.1.2.34'.

length : PING Length keyword

<ping_length> : Ping ICMP data length (2-1452; Default is 56), excluding MAC, IP and ICMP headers
count : PING Count keyword

<ping_count> : Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count (1-60; Default is 5)

interval : PING Interval keyword

<ping_interval>: Ping interval (0-30; Default is 0)

Example:

SFC4000T:/>ip ipv6 ping 2001::0002

PING6 server 2001::2

68 bytes from 2001::2: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms

68 bytes from 2001::2: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms

68 bytes from 2001::2: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms

68 bytes from 2001::2: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms

68 bytes from 2001::2: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms

Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad

352
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IP NTP Configuration

Description:
Show NTP configuration.

Syntax:
IP NTP Configuration

Default Setting:

IP NTP Configuration:

=====================

NTP Mode : Disabled

Idx Server IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

--- ------------------------------------------------------

1 pool.ntp.org

2 europe.pool.ntp.org

3 north-america.pool.ntp.org

4 asia.pool.ntp.org

5 oceania.pool.ntp.org

IP NTP Mode

Description:
Set or show the NTP mode.

Syntax:
IP NTP Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:
enable : Enable NTP mode

disable : Disable NTP mode

(default: Show NTP mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable NTP mode:

353
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>ip ntp mode enable

IP NTP Server Add

Description:
Add NTP server entry.

Syntax:
IP NTP Server Add <server_index> <ip_addr_string>

Parameters:
<server_index> : The server index (1-5)

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

Example:
To add NTP server:

SFC4000T:/>ip ntp server add 1 60.249.136.151

IP NTP Server IPv6 Add

Description:
Add NTP server IPv6 entry.

Syntax:
IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add <server_index> <server_ipv6>

Parameters:
<server_index>: The server index (1-5)

<server_ipv6> : IPv6 server address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four

hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The

symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups

of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a following legally IPv4 address. For

example,'::192.1.2.34'.

Example:
To add IPv6 NTP server:

354
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>ip ntp server ipv6 add 1 2001:7b8:3:2c::123

IP NTP Server Delete

Description:
Delete NTP server entry.

Syntax:
IP NTP Server Delete <server_index>

Parameters:
<server_index>: The server index (1-5)

Example:
To delete NTP server:

SFC4000T:/>ip ntp server delete 1

355
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.3 Port Management Command

Port Configuration

Description:
Show port configuration.

Syntax:

Port Configuration [<port_list>] [up|down]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

up : Show ports, which are up

down : Show ports, which are down

(default: Show all ports)

Example:
Display port1~4 status

SFC4000T:/>port configuration 1-4

Port Configuration:

===================

Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link

Description

---- -------- ----------- ------------ -------- -------- --------- ---- -----------

1 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down

2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down

3 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down

4 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down

Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the port speed and duplex mode.

Syntax:

Port Mode [<port_list>] [auto|10hdx|10fdx|100hdx|100fdx|1000fdx|1000x_ams|1000x]

356
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

auto : Auto negotiation of speed and duplex

10hdx : 10 Mbps, half duplex

10fdx : 10 Mbps, full duplex

100hdx : 100 Mbps, half duplex

100fdx : 100 Mbps, full duplex

1000fdx : 1 Gbps, full duplex

1000x_ams : 1000BASE-X with automatic media sense

1000x : 1000BASE-X

(default: Show configured and current mode)

Default Setting:

Auto

Example:
Set 10Mbps (half duplex) speed for port1

SFC4000T:/>port mode 1 10hdx

Port Flow Control

Description:

Set or show the port flow control mode.

Syntax:

Port Flow Control [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable flow control

disable : Disable flow control

(default: Show flow control mode)

Default Setting:

Disable

Example:
Enable flow control function for port1

357
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>port flow control 1 enable

Port State

Description:
Set or show the port administrative state.

Syntax:

Port State [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable port

disable : Disable port

(default: Show administrative mode)

Default Setting:

Enable

Example:
Disable port1

SFC4000T:/>port state 1 disable

Port Maximum Frame

Description:

Set or show the port maximum frame size.

Syntax:

Port MaxFrame [<port_list>] [<max_frame>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<max_frame>: Port maximum frame size (1518-9600), default: Show maximum frame size

Default Setting:
9600

358
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set 2048 frame size for port1

SFC4000T:/>port maxframe 1 2048

Port Power

Description:

Set or show the port PHY power mode.

Syntax:

Port Power [<port_list>] [enable|disable|actiphy|dynamic]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable all power control

disable: Disable all power control

actiphy: Enable ActiPHY power control

dynamic: Enable Dynamic power control

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Disable port power function for port1-4

SFC4000T:/>port power 1-4 enable

Port Excessive

Description:

Set or show the port excessive collision mode.

Syntax:

Port Excessive [<port_list>] [discard|restart]

Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

discard : Discard frame after 16 collisions

restart : Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions

359
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

(default: Show mode)

Default Setting:

Discard

Example:

SFC4000T:/>port excessive 1 restart

Port Statistics

Description:

Show port statistics.

Syntax:

Port Statistics [<port_list>] [<command>] [up|down]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<command> : The command parameter takes the following values:

clear : Clear port statistics

packets : Show packet statistics

bytes : Show byte statistics

errors : Show error statistics

discards : Show discard statistics

filtered : Show filtered statistics

0..7 : Show priority statistics

(default: Show all port statistics)

up : Show ports, which are up

down : Show ports, which are down

Port VeriPHY

Description:

Run cable diagnostics.

Syntax:
Port VeriPHY [<port_list>]

360
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Port SFP

Description:

Show SFP port information.

Syntax:

Port SFP [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show SFP information for port21-22

SFC4000T:/>port sfp

Port Type Speed Wave Length(nm) Distance(m)

---- -------------- -------- --------------- -----------

21 1000Base-LX 1000-Base 1310 10000

22 1000Base-LX 1000-Base 1310 10000

Port Description

Description:

Set or show Port Description.

Syntax:

Port Description [<port_list>] [<descr_text>]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<descr_text>: Text of port description

Default Setting:
empty

361
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.4 MAC Address Table Command

MAC Configuration

Description:

Show MAC address table configuration.

Syntax:

MAC Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show Mac address state

SFC4000T:/>mac configuration 1

MAC Configuration:

==================

MAC Address : 00-30-4f-24-04-d1

MAC Age Time: 300

Port Learning

---- --------
1 Auto

MAC Add

Description:

Add MAC address table entry.

Syntax:

MAC Add <mac_addr> <port_list> [<vid>]

Parameters:
<mac_addr> : MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal digit)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all' or 'none'

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1

362
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Add Mac address 00-30-4F-01-01-02 in port1 and vid1

SFC4000T:/>mac add 00-30-4f-01-01-02 1 1

MAC Delete

Description:

Delete MAC address entry.

Syntax:

MAC Delete <mac_addr> [<vid>]

Parameters:

<mac_addr>: MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal digit)

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1

Example:
Delete Mac address 00-30-4F-01-01-02 in vid1

SFC4000T:/>mac delete 00-30-4f-01-01-02 1

MAC Lookup

Description:

Lookup MAC address entry.

Syntax:

MAC Lookup <mac_addr> [<vid>]

Parameters:

<mac_addr>: MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal digit)

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1

Example:
Lookup state of Mac address 00-30-4F-01-01-02

SFC4000T:/>mac lookup 00-30-4f-01-01-02

363
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MAC Age Time

Description:

Set or show the MAC address age timer.

Syntax:

MAC Agetime [<age_time>]

Parameters:

<age_time>: MAC address age time (0,10-1000000) 0=disable,

(default: Show age time)

Default Setting:

300

Example:
Set agetime value in 30

SFC4000T:/>mac agetime 30

MAC Learning

Description:

Set or show the port learn mode.

Syntax:

MAC Learning [<port_list>] [auto|disable|secure]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

auto : Automatic learning

disable: Disable learning

secure : Secure learning

(default: Show learn mode)

Default Setting:

Auto

Example:
Set secure learning mode in port1

364
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>mac learning 1 secure

MAC Dump

Description:

Show sorted list of MAC address entries.

Syntax:

MAC Dump [<mac_max>] [<mac_addr>] [<vid>]

Parameters:

<mac_max> : Maximum number of MAC addresses 1-8192, default: Show all addresses

<mac_addr>: First MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal digit),

default: MAC address zero

<vid> : First VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1

Example:
Show all of MAC table

SFC4000T:/>mac dump

Type VID MAC Address Ports

------ --- ----------------- -----

Static 1 00-30-4f-11-22-33 None,CPU

Static 1 33-33-00-00-00-01 1-28,CPU

Static 1 33-33-00-00-00-02 1-28,CPU

Static 1 33-33-ff-11-22-33 1-28,CPU

Static 1 33-33-ff-a8-00-64 1-28,CPU

Dynamic 1 40-61-86-04-18-69 23

Static 1 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff 1-28,CPU

MAC Statistics

Description:

Show MAC address table statistics.

Syntax:
MAC Statistics [<port_list>]

365
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Set all of MAC statistics

SFC4000T:/>mac statistics

Port Dynamic Addresses

---- -----------------

1 0

Total Dynamic Addresses: 1

Total Static Addresses : 6

MAC Flush

Description:

Flush all learned entries.

Syntax:

MAC Flush

366
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.5 VLAN Configuration Command

VLAN Configuration

Description:

Show VLAN configuration.

Syntax:

VLAN Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show VLAN status of port1

SFC4000T:/>vlan configuration 1

VLAN Configuration:

===================

Mode : IEEE 802.1Q

Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q-in-Q Mode Eth type

---- ---- ---------- ---------- -------- ----------- --------

1 1 Disabled All UnTag Disable N/A

VID VLAN Name Ports

---- -------------------------------- -----

1 default 1-24

VID VLAN Name Ports

---- -------------------------------- -----

VLAN forbidden table is empty

VLAV PVID

Description:

Set or show the port VLAN ID.

367
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

VLAN PVID [<port_list>] [<vid>|none]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<vid>|none : Port VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'none', default: Show port VLAN ID

Default Setting:

Example:
Set PVID2 for port10

SFC4000T:/>vlan pvid 10 2

VLAN Frame Type

Description:

Set or show the port VLAN frame type.

Syntax:

VLAN FrameType [<port_list>] [all|tagged]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

all : Allow tagged and untagged frames

tagged : Allow tagged frames only

(default: Show accepted frame types)

Default Setting:

All

Example:
Set port10 that allow tagged frames only

SFC4000T:/>vlan frametype 10 tagged

368
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VLAN Ingress Filter

Description:

Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter.

Syntax:

VLAN IngressFilter [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable VLAN ingress filtering

disable : Disable VLAN ingress filtering

(default: Show VLAN ingress filtering)

Default Setting:

Disable

Example:
Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port10

SFC4000T:/>vlan ingressfilter 10 enable

VLAN Mode

Description:
Set or show the VLAN Mode.

Syntax:

VLAN Mode [portbased|dot1q]

Parameters:

portbased : Port-Based VLAN Mode

dot1q : 802.1Q VLAN Mode

(default: Show VLAN Mode)

Default Setting:

IEEE 802.1Q

Example:
Set VLAN mode in port base

369
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>vlan mode portbased

VLAN Link Type

Description:

Set or show the port VLAN link type.

Syntax:

VLAN LinkType [<port_list>] [untagged|tagged]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

untagged : VLAN Link Type Tagged

tagged : VLAN Link Type Untagged

(default: Show VLAN link type)

Default Setting:

Un-tagged

Example:
Enable tagged frame for port2

SFC4000T:/>vlan linktype 2 tagged

VLAN Q-in-Q Mode

Description:

Set or show the port Q-in-Q mode.

Syntax:

VLAN QinQ [<port_list>] [disable|man|customer]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

disable : Disable Q-in-Q VLAN Mode

man : Q-in-Q MAN Port Mode

customer : Q-in-Q Customer Port Mode

(default: Show VLAN QinQ Mode)

370
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set port2 in man port

SFC4000T:/>vlan qinq 2 man

VLAN Ethernet Type

Description:

Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q-in-Q VLAN mode.

Syntax:

VLAN Ethtype [<port_list>] [man|dot1q]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

man : Set out layer VLAN tag ether type : MAN

dot1q : Set out layer VLAN tag ether type : 802.1Q

(default: Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type)

Default Setting:

N/A

Example:
Set out layer VLAN tag Ethernet type for port 10 in man Ethernet type

SFC4000T:/>vlan ethtype 10 man

VLAN Add

Description:

Add or modify VLAN entry.

Syntax:

VLAN Add <vid>|<name> [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<vid>|<name>: VLAN ID (1-4095) or VLAN Name

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

371
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Default Setting:

Example:
Add port1 to port4 in VLAN10

SFC4000T:/>vlan add 10 1-4

VLAN Forbidden Add

Description:

Add or modify VLAN entry in forbidden table.

Syntax:

VLAN Forbidden Add <vid>|<name> [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<vid>|<name>: VLAN ID (1-4095) or VLAN Name

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Frobidden add port1 to port4 in VLAN10

SFC4000T:/>vlan forbidden add 10 1-4

VLAN Delete

Description:

Delete VLAN entry.

Syntax:

VLAN Delete <vid>|<name>

Parameters:

<vid>|<name>: VLAN ID (1-4095) or VLAN Name

Example:
Delete VLAN10

SFC4000T:/>vlan delete 10

372
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VLAN Forbidden Delete

Description:

Delete VLAN entry.

Syntax:

LAN Forbidden Delete <vid>|<name>

Parameters:

<vid>|<name>: VLAN ID (1-4095) or VLAN Name

Example:
Forbidden delete VLAN10

SFC4000T:/>vlan forbidden delete 10

VLAN Forbidden Lookup

Description:

Lookup VLAN Forbidden port entry.

Syntax:

VLAN Forbidden Lookup [<vid>] [(name <name>)]

Parameters:
<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show all VLANs

name : VLAN name string

<name>: VLAN name - Maximum of 32 characters. VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers.

VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet.

VLAN Lookup

Description:

Lookup VLAN entry.

Syntax:
VLAN Lookup [<vid>] [(name <name>)] [combined|static|nas|mvr|voice_vlan|all]

Parameters:

373
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show all VLANs

name : VLAN name string

<name>: VLAN name - Maximum of 32 characters. VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers.

VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet.

combined : Shows All the Combined VLAN database

static : Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator

nas : Shows the VLANs configured by NAS

mvr : Shows the VLANs configured by MVR

voice_vlan : Shows the VLANs configured by Voice VLAN

all : Shows all VLANs configuration

(default: combined VLAN Users configuration)

Example:
Show VLAN status

SFC4000T:/>vlan lookup

VID VLAN Name Ports

---- -------------------------------- -----

1 default 1-10

VLAN Name Add

Description:
Add VLAN Name to a VLAN ID Mapping.

Syntax:

VLAN Name Add <name> <vid>

Parameters:

<name>: VLAN name - Maximum of 32 characters. VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers.

VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet.

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

Example:
Add VLAN name for VLAN 1

SFC4000T:/>vlan name add test 1

374
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VLAN Name Delete

Description:

Delete VLAN Name to VLAN ID Mapping.

Syntax:

VLAN Name Delete <name>

Parameters:

<name>: VLAN name - Maximum of 32 characters. VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers.

VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet.

Example:
Delete VLAN name

SFC4000T:/>vlan name delete test

VLAN Name Lookup

Description:

Show VLAN Name table.

Syntax:

VLAN Name Lookup [<name>]

Parameters:

<name>: VLAN name - Maximum of 32 characters. VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers.

VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet.

Example:
To show VLAN Name table

SFC4000T:/>vlan name lookup

VLAN NAME vid

------------------------------- ---

test 1

375
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VLAN Status

Description:

VLAN Port Configuration Status.

Syntax:

VLAN Status [<port_list>] [combined|static|nas|mvr|voice_vlan|mstp|all|conflicts]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

combined : combined VLAN Users configuration

static : static port configuration

nas : NAS port configuration

mvr : MVR port configuration

voice_vlan : Voice VLAN port configuration

mstp : MSTP port configuration

vcl : VCL port configuration

all : All VLAN Users configuration

(default: all VLAN Users configuration)

Example:
Show VLAN configuration of port1

SFC4000T:/>status 1

Port VLAN User PortType PVID Frame Type Ing Filter Tx Tag UVID
Conflicts

---- ----------- ------------- ---- ---------- ----------- ----------- ----- ---------

1 Static Unaware 1 All Disabled Untag This 1

NAS

No

MVR

No

Voice VLAN

No

MSTP

No

VCL

No
Combined Unaware 1 All Disabled Untag This 1

No

376
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.6 Private VLAN Configuration Command

PVLAN Configuration

Description:

Show Private VLAN configuration.

Syntax:

PVLAN Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show private VLAN configuration

SFC4000T:/> pvlan configuration

Private VLAN Configuration:

===========================

Port Isolation

---- ---------

1 Disabled

PVLAN ID Ports

-------- -----

1 1-28

PVLAN Add

Description:

Add or modify Private VLAN entry.

Syntax:

PVLAN Add <pvlan_id> [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<pvlan_id> : Private VLAN ID. The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range.

377
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Add port1 to port4 in PVLAN10

SFC4000T:/>pvlan add 10 1-4

PVLAN Delete

Description:

Delete Private VLAN entry.

Syntax:

PVLAN Delete <pvlan_id>

Parameters:

<pvlan_id>: Private VLAN ID. The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range.

Example:
Delete PVLAN10

SFC4000T:/>pvlan delete 10

PVLAN Lookup

Description:

Lookup Private VLAN entry.

Syntax:

PVLAN Lookup [<pvlan_id>]

Parameters:

<pvlan_id>: Private VLAN ID, default: Show all PVLANs. The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the

switch port number range.

Example:
Lookup PVLAN

SFC4000T:/>pvlan lookup

378
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

PVLAN ID Ports

-------- -----

1 1-10

PVLAN Isolate

Description:

Set or show the port isolation mode.

Syntax:

PVLAN Isolate [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable port isolation

disable : Disable port isolation

(default: Show port isolation port list)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable isolate for port10

SFC4000T:/>pvlan isolate 10 enable

379
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.7 Security Command

Security Switch User Configuration

Description:

Show users configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch Users Configuration

Default Setting:

User Name Privilege

admin 15

Example:
Show users configuration

SFC4000T:/>security switch user configuration

Users Configuration:

====================

User Name Privilege Level

-------------------------------- ----------------

admin 15

Security Switch User Add

Description:

Add or modify users entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch Users Add <user_name> <password> <privilege_level>

Parameters:

<user_name> : A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is

(1-32). The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores
<password> : The password for this user name. The allowed string length is (0-32). Use 'clear' or "" as null string

<privilege_level>: User privilege level (1-15)

380
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Add new user: username: test, password: test & privilege: 10

SFC4000T:/>security switch users add test test 10

Security Switch User Delete

Description:

Delete users entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch Users Delete <user_name>

Parameters:

<user_name>: A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is (1-32). The

valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores

Example:
Delete test account.

SFC4000T:/>security switch users delete user

Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration

Description:

Show privilege configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration

Example:
Show privilege level

SFC4000T:/>security switch privilege level configuration

Privilege Level Configuration:

==============================

Privilege Current Level: 15

Group Name Priviliege Level

381
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

CRO CRW SRO SRW

-------------------------------- --- --- --- ---

Aggregation 5 10 5 10

Diagnostics 5 10 5 10

IP 5 10 5 10

LACP 5 10 5 10

LLDP 5 10 5 10

LLDP_MED 5 10 5 10

Loop_Protect 5 10 5 10

MAC_Table 5 10 5 10

MVR 5 10 5 10

Maintenance 15 15 15 15

Mirroring 5 10 5 10

Multicast 5 10 5 10

Port_Security 5 10 5 10

Ports 5 10 1 10

Private_VLANs 5 10 5 10

Protocol_based_VLAN 5 10 5 10

QoS 5 10 5 10

SFlow 5 10 5 10

SNMP 5 10 5 10

Security 5 10 5 10

Spanning_Tree 5 10 5 10

System 5 10 1 10

Timer 5 10 5 10
UPnP 5 10 5 10

VLANs 5 10 5 10

Voice_VLAN 5 10 5 10

Security Switch Privilege Level Group

Description:

Configure a privilege level group.

Syntax:

Security Switch Privilege Level Group <group_name> [<cro>] [<crw>] [<sro>] [<srw>]

Parameters:

<group_name>: Privilege group name

382
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<cro> : Configuration read-only privilege level (1-15)

<crw> : Configuration/Execute read-write privilege level (1-15)

<sro> : Status/Statistics read-only privilege level (1-15)

<srw> : Status/Statistics read-write privilege level (1-15)

Example:
Change privilege level of MVR group.

SFC4000T:/>security switch privilege level group mvr 15 15 15 15

Security Switch Privilege Level Current

Description:

Show the current privilege level.

Syntax:

Security Switch Privilege Level Current

Default Setting:

15

Security Switch Authentication Configuration

Description:
Show Auth configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch Auth Configuration

Example:
Show authentication configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security switch auth configuration

Auth Configuration:

===================

Client Authentication Method Local Authentication Fallback

------- ---------------------- -----------------------------

383
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

console local Disabled

telnet local Disabled

ssh local Disabled

web local Disabled

Security Switch Authentication Method

Description:

Set or show Auth method. (default: Show Auth method).

Syntax:

Security Switch Auth Method [console|telnet|ssh|web] [none|local|radius|tacacs+] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

console : Settings for console

telnet : Settings for telnet

ssh : Settings for ssh

web : Settings for web

(default: Set or show the specific client authentication method)

none : Authentication disabled

local : Use local authentication

radius : Use remote RADIUS authentication

tacacs+ : Use remote TACACS+ authentication

(default: Show client authentication method)

enable : Enable local authentication if remote authentication fails

disable : Disable local authentication if remote authentication fails

(The parameter is effective when it is typed)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Use RADIUS authentication method for telnet.

SFC4000T:/>security switch auth method telnet radius enable

384
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SSH Configuration

Description:

Show SSH configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch SSH Configuration

Example:
Show SSH configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security switch ssh configuration

SSH Configuration:

==================

SSH Mode : Enable

Security Switch SSH Mode

Description:

Set or show the SSH mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SSH Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SSH

disable: Disable SSH

(default: Show SSH mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Enable SSH function.

SFC4000T:/>security switch ssh mode enable

385
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch HTTPs Configuration

Description:

Show HTTPS configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch HTTPS Configuration

Example:
Show HTTPs configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security switch https configuration

HTTPS Configuration:

====================

HTTPS Mode : Enable

HTTPS Redirect Mode : Disabled

Security Switch HTTPs Mode

Description:

Set or show the HTTPS mode.

Syntax:
Security Switch HTTPS Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable HTTPs

disable: Disable HTTPs

(default: Show HTTPs mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Enable HTTPs function.

SFC4000T:/>security switch https mode enable

386
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch HTTPs Redirect

Description:

Set or show the HTTPS redirect mode.

Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled.

Syntax:

Security Switch HTTPS Redirect [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable HTTPs redirect

disable: Disable HTTPs redirect

(default: Show HTTPs redirect mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable HTTPs redirect function.

SFC4000T:/>security switch https redirect enable

Security Switch Access Configuration

Description:
Show access management configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Configuration

Example:
Show access management configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security switch access configuration

Access Mgmt Configuration:

==========================

System Access Mode : Disabled

W: WEB/HTTPS

387
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

S: SNMP

T: TELNET/SSH

Idx Start IP Address End IP Address WST

--- ------------------------------- ------------------------------ - - -

Security Switch Access Mode

Description:

Set or show the access management mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable access management

disable: Disable access management

(default: Show access management mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable access management function.

SFC4000T:/>security switch access mode enable

Security Switch Access Add

Description:

Add access management entry, default: Add all supported protocols.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Add <access_id> <start_ip_addr> <end_ip_addr> [web] [snmp] [telnet]

Parameters:
<access_id> : entry index (1-16)

<start_ip_addr>: Start IP address (a.b.c.d)

388
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<end_ip_addr> : End IP address (a.b.c.d)

web : Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS

snmp : Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP

telnet : Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH

Example:
Add access management list from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.0.200 via web interface.

SFC4000T:/>security switch access add 1 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.200 web

Security Switch Access IPv6 Add

Description:

Add access management IPv6 entry, default: Add all supported protocols.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Ipv6 Add <access_id> <start_ipv6_addr> <end_ipv6_addr> [web] [snmp] [telnet]

Parameters:

<access_id> : entry index (1-16)

<start_ipv6_addr>: Start IPv6 address.

IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a

colon separates each field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special

syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous

zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a following legally IPv4 address. For
example,'::192.1.2.34'.

<end_ipv6_addr> : End IPv6 address.

IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a

colon separates each field (:). For example,'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special

syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous

zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a following legally IPv4 address. For

example,'::192.1.2.34'.

web : Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS

snmp : Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP

telnet : Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH

Example:
Add access management list from 2001::0001 to 2001::0100 via web interface.

SFC4000T:/> security switch access add 2001::0001 2001::0100 web

389
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch Access Delete

Description:

Delete access management entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Delete <access_id>

Parameters:

<access_id>: entry index (1-16)

Example:
Delete access management ID 1

SFC4000T:/>security switch access delete 1

Security Switch Access Lookup

Description:

Lookup access management entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Lookup [<access_id>]

Parameters:
<access_id> : entry index (1-16)

Example:
Lookup access management entry.

SFC4000T:/>security switch access lookup 1

Security Switch Access Clear

Description:

Clear access management entry.

Syntax:
Security Switch Access Clear

Example:

390
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Clear access management entry.

SFC4000T:/>security switch access clear

Security Switch Access Statistics

Description:

Show or clear access management statistics.

Syntax:

Security Switch Access Statistics [clear]

Parameters:

clear: Clear access management statistics

Example:
Show access management statistics.

SFC4000T:/>security switch access statistics

Access Management Statistics:

-----------------------------

HTTP Receive: 0 Allow: 0 Discard: 0

HTTPS Receive: 0 Allow: 0 Discard: 0

SNMP Receive: 0 Allow: 0 Discard: 0

TELNET Receive: 0 Allow: 0 Discard: 0

SSH Receive: 0 Allow: 0 Discard: 0

Security Switch SNMP Configuration

Description:

Show SNMP configuration.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Configuration

Security Switch SNMP Mode

Description:

391
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Set or show the SNMP mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SNMP

disable: Disable SNMP

(default: Show SNMP mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Disable SNMP mode.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp mode disable

Security Switch SNMP Version

Description:

Set or show the SNMP protocol version.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Version [1|2c|3]

Parameters:

1 : SNMP version 1

2c: SNMP version 2c

3 : SNMP version 3

(default: Show SNMP version)

Default Setting:

2c

Example:
Set SNMP in version 3.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp version 3

392
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Read Community

Description:

Set or show the community string for SNMP read access.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Read Community [<community>]

Parameters:

<community>: Community string. Use 'clear' or "" to clear the string

Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters.

(default: Show SNMP read community)

Default Setting:

public

Example:
Set SNMP read community private.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp read community private

Security Switch SNMP Write Community

Description:

Set or show the community string for SNMP write access.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Write Community [<community>]

Parameters:

<community>: Community string. Use 'clear' or "" to clear the string

Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters.

(default: Show SNMP write community)

Default Setting:

private

Example:
Set public value in SNMP write community.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp write community public

393
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode

Description:

Set or show the SNMP trap mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SNMP traps

disable: Disable SNMP traps

(default: Show SNMP trap mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable SNMP trap mode.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap mode enable

Security Switch SNMP Trap Version

Description:

Set or show the SNMP trap protocol version.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Version [1|2c|3]

Parameters:

1 : SNMP version 1

2c: SNMP version 2c

3 : SNMP version 3

(default: Show SNMP trap version)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set SNMP trap version in version 2c.

394
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap version 2c

Security Switch SNMP Trap Community

Description:

Set or show the community string for SNMP traps.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Community [<community>]

Parameters:

<community>: Community string. Use 'clear' or "" to clear the string

Maximum length allowed is upto 256 characters.

(default: Show SNMP trap community)

Default Setting:

public

Example:
Set private value for SNMP trap community.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap community private

Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination

Description:

Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination [<ip_addr_string>]

Parameters:

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

Example:
Set SNMP trap destination address for 192.168.0.20

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap destination 192.168.0.20

395
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination

Description:

Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination [<ipv6_addr>]

Parameters:

<ipv6_addr>: IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon

separates each field (:). For example, four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field (:). For

example, fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way

of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It also used a

following legally IPv4 address. For example,'::192.1.2.34'.

Example:
Set SNMP trap IPv6 destination address for 2001::0001

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap ipv6 destination 2001::0001

Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure

Description:

Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SNMP trap authentication failure

disable: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure

(default: Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Disable SNMP trap authentication failure

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap authentication failure disable

396
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Trap Link-up

Description:

Set or show the port link-up and link-down trap mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Link-up [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SNMP trap link-up and link-down

disable: Disable SNMP trap link-up and link-down

(default: Show SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Disable SNMP trap link-up

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap link-up disable

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode

Description:

Set or show the SNMP trap inform mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SNMP trap inform

disable: Disable SNMP trap inform

(default: Show SNMP inform mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Disable SNMP trap inform mode.

397
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap inform mode disable

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout

Description:

Set or show the SNMP trap inform timeout (usecs).

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout [<timeout>]

Parameters:

<timeout>: SNMP trap inform timeout (0-2147 seconds)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set SNMP trap inform timeout in 20sec.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap inform timeout 20

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times

Description:

Set or show the SNMP trap inform retry times.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times [<retries>]

Parameters:

<retries>: SNMP trap inform retransmited times (0-255)

(default: Show SNMP trap inform retry times)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set SNMP trap inform retry times in 10.

398
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap inform retry times 10

Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID

Description:

Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe

disable: Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe

(default: Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode)

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap probe security engine id disable

Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID

Description:

Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID [<engineid>]

Parameters:

<engineid>: Engine ID, the format may not be all zeros or all 'ff'H and is restricted to 5 - 32 octet string

Example:
Set the SNMP trap security engine ID

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap security engine id 800007e5017f000011

399
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name

Description:

Set or show SNMP trap security name.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name [<security_name>]

Parameters:

<security_name>: A string representing the security name for a principal (default: Show SNMP trap security name). The

allowed string length is (1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

Example:
Set the SNMP trap security name

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp trap security name 12345678

Security Switch SNMP Engine ID

Description:

Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Engine ID [<engineid>]

Parameters:

<engineid>: Engine ID, the format may not be all zeros or all 'ff'H and is restricted to 5 - 32 octet string

Default Setting:

800007e5017f000001

Example:
Set 800007e5017f000002 for SNMPv3 local engine ID

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp engine id 800007e5017f000002

Security Switch SNMP Community Add

Description:

400
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry.

The entry index key is <community>.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Community Add <community> [<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>]

Parameters:

<community>: Community string

<ip_addr> : IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address

<ip_mask> : IPv4 subnet mask (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP mask

Example:
Add SNMPv3 community entry.

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp community add public 192.168.0.20 255.255.255.0

Security Switch SNMP Community Delete

Description:

Delete SNMPv3 community entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Community Delete <index>

Parameters:
<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Delete SNMPv3 community entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp community delete 3

Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup

Description:

Lookup SNMPv3 community entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup [<index>]

401
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Lookup SNMPv3 community entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp community lookup

Idx Community Source IP Source Mask

--- -------------------------------- --------------- ---------------

1 public 192.168.0.20 255.255.255.0

2 private 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Number of entries: 2

Security Switch SNMP User Add

Description:

Add SNMPv3 user entry.

The entry index key are <engineid> and <user_name> and it doesn't allow modify.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP User Add <engineid> <user_name> [MD5|SHA] [<auth_password>] [DES] [<priv_password>]

Parameters:

<engineid> : Engine ID, the format may not be all zeros or all 'ff'H and is restricted to 5 - 32 octet string

<user_name> : A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The name of "None" is reserved.

The allowed string length is (1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

md5 : An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol. The allowed length is

(8-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

sha : An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol. The allowed length is

(8-40), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

<auth_password>: A string identifying the authentication pass phrase

des : An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to.

The allowed string length is (8-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

<priv_password>: A string identifying the privacy pass phrase.

The allowed string length is (8-40), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

Example:
Add SNMPv3 user entry

402
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp user add 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 md5

12345678 des abcdefgh

Security Switch SNMP User Delete

Description:

Delete SNMPv3 user entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP User Delete <index>

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Delete SNMPv3 user entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp user delete 1

Security Switch SNMP User Changekey

Description:

Change SNMPv3 user password.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP User Changekey <engineid> <user_name> <auth_password> [<priv_password>]

Parameters:

<engineid> : Engine ID, the format may not be all zeros or all 'ff'H and is restricted to 5 - 32 octet string

<user_name> : A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The name of "None" is reserved.

The allowed string length is (1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

<auth_password>: A string identifying the authentication pass phrase

<priv_password>: A string identifying the privacy pass phrase.

The allowed string length is (8-40), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

Example:
Delete SNMPv3 user entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp user changekey 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3

403
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

87654321 12345678

Security Switch SNMP User Lookup

Description:
Lookup SNMPv3 user entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP User Lookup [<index>]

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Lookup SNMPv3 user entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp user lookup

Idx Engine ID User Name Level Auth Priv

--- --------- -------------------------------- -------------- ---- ----

1 Remote admin_snmpv3 Auth, Priv MD5 DES

Number of entries: 1

Security Switch SNMP Group Add

Description:
Add or modify SNMPv3 group entry.

The entry index key are <security_model> and <security_name>.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Group Add <security_model> <security_name> <group_name>

Parameters:

<security_model>: v1 - Reserved for SNMPv1

v2c - Reserved for SNMPv2c

usm - User-based Security Model (USM)

<security_name> : A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is

(1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

404
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<group_name> : A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is

(1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

Example:
Add SNMPv3 group entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp group add usm admin_snmpv3 group_snmpv3

Security Switch SNMP Group Delete

Description:
Delete SNMPv3 group entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Group Delete <index>

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Delete SNMPv3 group entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp group delete 1

Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup

Description:
Lookup SNMPv3 group entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup [<index>]

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Lookup SNMPv3 group entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp group lookup

Idx Model Security Name Group Name

405
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

--- ----- -------------------------------- --------------------------------

1 v1 public default_ro_group

2 v1 private default_rw_group

3 v2c public default_ro_group

4 v2c private default_rw_group

5 usm default_user default_rw_group

Number of entries: 5

Security Switch SNMP View Add

Description:
Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry.

The entry index key are <view_name> and <oid_subtree>.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP View Add <view_name> [included|excluded] <oid_subtree>

Parameters:

<view_name> : A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is (1-32),

and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

included : An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included

excluded : An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded

<oid_subtree>: The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view

Example:
Add SNMPv3 view entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp view add snmpv3_view include .1

Security Switch SNMP View Delete

Description:
Delete SNMPv3 view entry.

Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP View Delete <index>

406
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Delete SNMPv3 view entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp view delete 3

Security Switch SNMP View Lookup

Description:
Lookup SNMPv3 view entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP View Lookup [<index>]

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Lookup SNMPv3 view entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp view lookup

Idx View Name View Type OID Subtree

--- -------------------------------- --------- --------------------------------

1 default_view included .1

2 snmpv3_viwe included .1

Number of entries: 2

Security Switch SNMP Access Add

Description:
Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry.

The entry index key are <group_name>, <security_model> and <security_level>.

Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Access Add <group_name> <security_model> <security_level> [<read_view_name>]

[<write_view_name>]

407
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<group_name> : A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is

(1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

<security_model> : any - Accepted any security model (v1|v2c|usm)

v1 - Reserved for SNMPv1

v2c - Reserved for SNMPv2c

usm - User-based Security Model (USM)

<security_level> : noAuthNoPriv - None authentication and none privacy

AuthNoPriv - Authentication and none privacy

AuthPriv - Authentication and privacy

<read_view_name> : The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current

values.

The name of "None" is reserved.

The allowed string length is (1-32), and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126

Example:
Add SNMPv3 access entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp access add group_snmpv3 usm authpriv snmpv3_view

snmpv3_view

Security Switch SNMP Access Delete

Description:
Delete SNMPv3 access entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Access Delete <index>

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Delete SNMPv3 access entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp access delete 3

408
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup

Description:
Lookup SNMPv3 access entry.

Syntax:

Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup [<index>]

Parameters:

<index>: entry index (1-64)

Example:
Lookup SNMPv3 access entry

SFC4000T:/>security switch snmp access lookup

Idx Group Name Model Level

--- -------------------------------- ----- --------------

1 default_ro_group any NoAuth, NoPriv

2 default_rw_group any NoAuth, NoPriv

Number of entries: 2

Security Switch RMON Statistics Add

Description:
Add or modify RMON Statistics entry. The entry index key is <stats_id>.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Statistics Add <stats_id> <data_source>

Parameters:

<stats_id> : Statistics ID (1-65535).

<data_source>: The OID that indicates that the ifIndex in ifEntry.

The value should be like .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.xxx.

Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete

Description:

Delete RMON Statistics entry. The entry index key is <stats_id>.

409
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete <stats_id>

Parameters:

<stats_id>: Statistics ID (1-65535).

Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup

Description:

Show RMON Statistics entries.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup [<stats_id>]

Parameters:

<stats_id>: Statistics ID (1-65535).

Security Switch RMON History Add

Description:

Add or modify RMON Hisotry entry. The entry index key is <history_id>.

Syntax:
Security Switch RMON History Add <history_id> <data_source> [<interval>] [<buckets>]

Parameters:

<history_id> : History ID (1-65535).

<data_source>: The OID that indicates that the ifIndex in ifEntry.

The value should be like .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.xxx.

<interval> : Sampling interval (1-3600) (default: 1800).

<buckets> : The maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON(1-65535) (default: 50).

Security Switch RMON History Delete

Description:
Delete RMON Hisotry entry. The entry index key is <history_id>.

410
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON History Delete <history_id>

Parameters:

<history_id> : History ID (1-65535).

Security Switch RMON History Lookup

Description:

Show RMON History entries.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON History Lookup [<history_id>]

Parameters:

<history_id> : History ID (1-65535).

Security Switch RMON Alarm Add

Description:

Add or modify RMON Alarm entry. The entry index key is <alarm_id>.

Syntax:
Security Switch RMON Alarm Add <alarm_id> <interval> <alarm_vairable> [absolute|delta] <rising_threshold>

<rising_event_index> <falling_threshold> <falling_event_index> [rising|falling|both]

Parameters:

<alarm_id> : Alarm ID (1-65535).

<interval> : Sampling interval (1-2147483647) (default: 30).

<alarm_vairable> : The MIB OID that need to be referenced.

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.xxx – ifInOctets

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.11.xxx – ifInUcastPkts

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.xxx – ifInNUcastPkts

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.13.xxx – ifInDiscards

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.14.xxx – ifInErrors

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.15.xxx – ifInUnkownProtos
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.xxx – ifOutOctets

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.17.xxx – ifOutUcastPkts

411
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.18.xxx – ifOutNUcastPkts

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.19.xxx – ifOutDiscards

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20.xxx – ifOutErrors

.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.21.xxx – ifOutQLen

"xxx" means the interface identified by a particular value of this index is the same interface as

identified by the same value of OID 'ifIndex'.

absolute : Get the sample directly.

delta : Calculate the difference between samples (default).

<rising_threshold> : Rising threshold value (-2147483648–2147483647).

<rising_event_index> : Rising event index (1-65535).

<falling_threshold> : Falling threshold value (-2147483648–2147483647).

<falling_event_index>: Falling event index (1-65535).

rising : Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.

falling : Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.

both : Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling

threshold (default)

Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete

Description:

Delete RMON Alarm entry. The entry index key is <alarm_id>.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete <alarm_id>

Parameters:

<alarm_id>: Alarm ID (1-65535).

Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup

Description:

Show RMON Alarm entries.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup [<alarm_id>]

Parameters:

<alarm_id>: Alarm ID (1-65535).

412
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Switch RMON Event Add

Description:

Add or modify RMON Event entry. The entry index key is <event_id>.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Event Add <event_id> [none|log|trap|log_trap] [<community>] [<description>]

Parameters:

<event_id> : Event ID (1-65535).

none : Get the sample directly.

log : Get the sample directly.

trap : Get the sample directly.

log_trap : Calculate the difference between samples (default).

<community> : Specify the community when trap is sent (the string lengh is 0~127) (default: public).

<description>: The string for describing this event (the string lengh is 0~127) (default: null string).

Security Switch RMON Event Delete

Description:

Delete RMON Event entry. The entry index key is <event_id>.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Event Delete <event_id>

Parameters:

<event_id> : Event ID (1-65535).

Security Switch RMON Event Lookup

Description:

Show RMON Event entries.

Syntax:

Security Switch RMON Event Lookup [<event_id>]

Parameters:

<event_id> : Event ID (1-65535).

413
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network Psec Switch

Description:

Show Port Security status.

Syntax:

Security Network Psec Switch [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show port security status.

SFC4000T:/>security network psec switch

Users:

L = Limit Control

8 = 802.1X

D = DHCP Snooping

V = Voice VLAN

Port Users State MAC Cnt

---- ----- ------------- -------

1 ---- No users 0

Security Network Psec Port

Description:

Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security.

Syntax:

Security Network Psec Port [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show MAC address learned on port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network psec port 1

414
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Port 1:

-------

MAC Address VID State Added Age/Hold Time

----------------- ---- ---------- ------------------------- -------------

<none>

Security Network Limit Configuration

Description:

Show Limit Control configuration.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show Limit Control configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security network limit configuration

Port Security Limit Control Configuration:

==========================================

Mode : Disabled

Aging : Disabled

Age Period: 3600

Port Mode Limit Action

---- -------- ----- ---------------

1 Disabled 4 None

Security Network Limit Mode

Description:

415
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Set or show global state.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Globally enable port security

disable : Globally disable port security

(default: Show current global enabledness of port security limit control)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable the limit mode

SFC4000T:/>security network limit mode enable

Security Network Limit Aging

Description:

Set or show aging state.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Aging [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable aging

disable : Disable aging

(default: Show current enabledness of aging)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable limit aging

SFC4000T:/>security network limit aging enable

416
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network Limit Agetime

Description:

Time in seconds between check for activity on learned MAC addresses.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Agetime [<age_time>]

Parameters:

<age_time>: Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address (10-10000000 seconds)

(default: Show current age time)

Default Setting:

3600

Example:
Set age time in 100sec.

SFC4000T:/>security network limit agetime 100

Security Network Limit Port

Description:

Set or show per-port enabledness.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Port [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable port security on this port

disable : Disable port security on this port

(default: Show current port enabledness of port security limit control)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable port limit for port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network limit port 1 enable

417
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network Limit Limit

Description:

Set or show the max. number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Limit [<port_list>] [<limit>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<limit> : Max. number of MAC addresses on this port

(default: Show current limit)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set limit in 5

SFC4000T:/>security network limit limit 1-10 5

Security Network Limit Action

Description:

Set or show the action involved with exceeding the limit.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Action [<port_list>] [none|trap|shut|trap_shut]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

none|trap|shut|trap_shut: Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit

none : Don't do anything

trap : Send an SNMP trap

shut : Shutdown the port

trap_shut: Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port

(default: Show current action)

Default Setting:

none

418
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set trap mode for limit action for port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network limit action 1 trap

Security Network Limit Reopen

Description:

Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down.

Syntax:

Security Network Limit Reopen [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Reopen port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network limit reopen 1

Security Network NAS Configuration

Description:

Show 802.1X configuration.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show 802.1X configuration of port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network nas configuration 1

802.1X Configuration:
=====================

419
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Mode : Disabled

Reauth. : Disabled

Reauth. Period : 3600

EAPOL Timeout : 30

Age Period : 300

Hold Time : 10

RADIUS QoS : Disabled

RADIUS VLAN : Disabled

Guest VLAN : Disabled

Guest VLAN ID :1

Max. Reauth Count: 2

Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen: Disabled

Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID

---- ------------------ --------------------- ----------------- ------------------

1 Force Authorized Globally Disabled - -

Security Network NAS Mode

Description:

Set or show the global NAS state.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Globally enable 802.1X

disable: Globally disable 802.1X

(default: Show current 802.1X global enabledness)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IEEE802.1X function

SFC4000T:/>security network nas mode enable

420
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network NAS State

Description:

Set or show the port security state.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS State [<port_list>] [auto|authorized|unauthorized|single|multi|macbased]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

auto : Port-based 802.1X Authentication

authorized : Port access is allowed

unauthorized: Port access is not allowed

single : Single Host 802.1X Authentication

multi : Multiple Host 802.1X Authentication

macbased : Switch authenticates on behalf of the client

(default: Show 802.1X state)

Default Setting:

none

Example:
Show the port 1 security state.

SFC4000T:/>security network nas state 1

Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID

---- ------------------ --------------------- ----------------- ------------------

1 Force Authorized Globally Disabled - -

Security Network NAS Reauthentication

Description:

Set or show Reauthentication state.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Reauthentication [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable reauthentication

421
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

disable: Disable reauthentication

(default: Show current reauthentication mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable reauthentication function.

SFC4000T:/>security network nas reauthentication enable

Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod

Description:

Set or show the period between reauthentication attempts.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod [<reauth_period>]

Parameters:

<reauth_period>: Period between reauthentication attempts (1-3600 seconds)

(default: Show current reauthentication period)

Default Setting:

3600

Example:
To show the period between reauthentication attempts.

SFC4000T:/>security network nas reauthperiod

Security Network NAS EapolTimeout

Description:

Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions.

Syntax:
Security Network NAS EapolTimeout [<eapol_timeout>]

422
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<eapol_timeout>: Time between EAPOL retransmissions (1-65535 seconds)

(default: Show current EAPOL retransmission timeout)

Default Setting:

30

Example:
Set the time between EAPOL retransmissions for 100sec.

SFC4000T:/>security network nas eapoltimeout 100

Security Network NAS Agetime

Description:

Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Agetime [<age_time>]

Parameters:

<age_time>: Time between checks (10-1000000 seconds)

(default: Show current age time)

Default Setting:
300

Example:
Set NAS age time in 1000sec

SFC4000T:/>security network nas agetime 1000

Security Network NAS Holdtime

Description:

Time in seconds before a MAC-address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Holdtime [<hold_time>]

423
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<hold_time>: Time on hold (10-1000000 seconds)

(default: Show current hold time)

Default Setting:

10

Example:
Set NAS hold time in 100sec

SFC4000T:/>security network nas holdtime 100

Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS

Description:

Set or show either global state (use the global keyword) or per-port state of RADIUS-assigned QoS.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS [global|<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

global : Select the global RADIUS-assigned QoS setting

<port_list>: Select the per-port RADIUS-assigned QoS setting

(default: Show current per-port RADIUS-assigned QoS state)

enable : Enable RADIUS-assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports

disable: Disable RADIUS-assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports

(default: Show current RADIUS-assigned QoS state)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable NAS RADIUS QoS

SFC4000T:/>security network nas radius_qos enable

Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN

Description:

Set or show either global state (use the global keyword) or per-port state of RADIUS-assigned VLAN.

424
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN [global|<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

global : Select the global RADIUS-assigned VLAN setting

<port_list>: Select the per-port RADIUS-assigned VLAN setting

(default: Show current per-port RADIUS-assigned VLAN state)

enable : Enable RADIUS-assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports

disable: Disable RADIUS-assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports

(default: Show current RADIUS-assigned VLAN state)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable NAS RADIUS VLAN

SFC4000T:/>security network nas radius_vlan enable

Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN

Description:

Set or show either global state and parameters (use the global keyword) or per-port state of Guest VLAN.

Unless the 'global' keyword is used, the <reauth_max> and <allow_if_eapol_seen> parameters will not be unused.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN [global|<port_list>] [enable|disable] [<vid>] [<reauth_max>] [<allow_if_eapol_seen>]

Parameters:

global : Select the global Guest VLAN setting

<port_list>: Select the per-port Guest VLAN setting

(default: Show current per-port Guest VLAN state)

enable|disable : enable : Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports

disable: Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports

(default: Show current Guest VLAN state)

<vid> : Guest VLAN ID used when entering the Guest VLAN. Use the 'global' keyword to change it

(default: Show current Guest VLAN ID)

<reauth_max> : The value can only be set if you use the 'global' keyword in the beginning of the command.

The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without response before considering

entering the Guest VLAN

425
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

(default: Show current Maximum Reauth Count value

<allow_if_eapol_seen>: The value can only be set if you use the 'global' keyword in the beginning of the command.

disable:The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port

enable :The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port

(default: Show current setting)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable NAS guest VLAN

SFC4000T:/>security network nas guest_vlan enable

Security Network NAS Authenticate

Description:

Refresh (restart) 802.1X authentication process.

Syntax:

Security Network NAS Authenticate [<port_list>] [now]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

now : Force reauthentication immediately

(default: Schedule a reauthentication)

Example:
Start NAS authentication now for port 1.

SFC4000T:/>security network nas authenticate 1 now

Security Network NAS Statistics

Description:

Show or clear 802.1X statistics.

Syntax:
Security Network NAS Statistics [<port_list>] [clear|eapol|radius]

426
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

clear : Clear statistics

eapol : Show EAPOL statistics

radius : Show Backend Server statistics

(default: Show all statistics)

Example:
Show 802.1X statistics in port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network nas statistics 1

Rx Total: 0 Tx Total: 0

Rx Response/Id: 0 Tx Request/Id: 0

Rx Response: 0 Tx Request: 0

Rx Start: 0

Rx Logoff: 0

Rx Invalid Type: 0

Rx Invalid Length: 0

Port 1 Backend Server Statistics:

Rx Access Challenges: 0 Tx Responses: 0

Rx Other Requests: 0

Rx Auth. Successes: 0

Rx Auth. Failures: 0

Security Network ACL Configuration

Description:

Show ACL Configuration.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

427
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network ACL Action

Description:

Set or show the ACL port default action.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Action [<port_list>] [permit|deny] [<rate_limiter>] [<port_redirect>] [<logging>] [<shutdown>]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

permit : Permit forwarding (default)

deny : Deny forwarding

<rate_limiter>: Rate limiter number (1-15) or 'disable'

<port_copy> : Port number for copy of frames or 'disable'

<logging> : System logging of frames: log|log_disable

<shutdown> : Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable

Example:
Show ACL action in port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network acl action 1

Port Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter

---- ------ ------------ --------- -------- -------- -------- -------

1 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0

Security Network ACL Policy

Description:

Set or show the ACL port policy.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Policy [<port_list>] [<policy>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<policy> : Policy number (0-255)

Default Setting:

428
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set ACL policy 2 for port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network acl policy 1 2

Security Network ACL Rate

Description:

Set or show the ACL rate limiter.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Rate [<rate_limiter_list>] [<rate>]

Parameters:

<rate_limiter_list>: Rate limiter list (1-16), default: All rate limiters

<rate> : Rate in pps (0-131071)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set rate limit value in 100 for port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network acl rate 1 100

Security Network ACL Add

Description:

Add or modify Access Control Entry (ACE).

If the ACE ID parameter <ace_id> is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists, the ACE will be modified.

Otherwise, a new ACE will be added. If the ACE ID is not specified, the next available ACE ID will be used.

If the next ACE ID parameter <ace_id_next> is specified, the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list. If the next

ACE ID is not specified, the ACE will be placed last in the list.

If the Switch keyword is used, the rule applies to all ports. If the Port keyword is used, the rule applies to the specified port

only. If the Policy keyword is used, the rule applies to all ports configured with the specified policy. The default is that the

rule applies to all ports.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Add [<ace_id>] [<ace_id_next>] [(port <port>)] [(policy <policy> <policy_bitmask>)] [<vid>]

429
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

[<tag_prio>] [<dmac_type>] [(etype [<etype>] [<smac>] [<dmac>]) | (arp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<smac>] [<arp_opcode>]

[<arp_flags>]) | (ip [<sip>] [<dip>] [<protocol>] [<ip_flags>]) | (icmp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<icmp_type>] [<icmp_code>]

[<ip_flags>]) | (udp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]) | (tcp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]

[<tcp_flags>])] [permit|deny] [<rate_limiter>] [<port_redirect>] [<logging>] [<shutdown>]

Parameters:

<ace_id> : ACE ID (1-512), default: Next available ID

<ace_id_next> : Next ACE ID (1-512), default: Add ACE last

port : Port ACE keyword

<port> : Port number or 'all'

policy : Policy ACE keyword

<policy> : Policy number (0-255)

<policy_bitmask>: Policy number bitmask (0x0-0xFF)

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any'

<tag_prio> : VLAN tag priority (0-7) or 'any'

<dmac_type> : DMAC type: any|unicast|multicast|broadcast

etype : Ethernet Type keyword

<etype> : Ethernet Type: 0x600 - 0xFFFF or 'any' but excluding 0x800(IPv4) 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6)

<smac> : Source MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal

digit) or 'any'

<dmac> : Destination MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a

hexadecimal digit) or 'any'

arp : ARP keyword

<sip> : Source IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'

<dip> : Destination IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'

<arp_opcode> : ARP operation code: any|arp|rarp|other

<arp_flags> : ARP flags: request|smac|tmac|len|ip|ether [0|1|any]

ip : IP keyword

<protocol> : IP protocol number (0-255) or 'any'

<ip_flags> : IP flags: ttl|options|fragment [0|1|any]

icmp : ICMP keyword

<icmp_type> : ICMP type number (0-255) or 'any'

<icmp_code> : ICMP code number (0-255) or 'any'

udp : UDP keyword

<sport> : Source UDP/TCP port range (0-65535) or 'any'

<dport> : Destination UDP/TCP port range (0-65535) or 'any'

tcp : TCP keyword

<tcp_flags> : TCP flags: fin|syn|rst|psh|ack|urg [0|1|any]

permit : Permit forwarding (default)

deny : Deny forwarding

430
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<rate_limiter> : Rate limiter number (1-15) or 'disable'

<port_redirect> : Port number for copy of frames or 'disable'

<logging> : System logging of frames: log|log_disable

<shutdown> : Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable

Security Network ACL Delete

Description:

Delete ACE.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Delete <ace_id>

Parameters:

<ace_id>: ACE ID (1-512)

Example:
Delete ACE 1

SFC4000T:/>security network acl delete 1

Security Network ACL Lookup

Description:
Show ACE, default: All ACEs.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Lookup [<ace_id>]

Parameters:

<ace_id>: ACE ID (1-512)

Example:
Lookup ACE 1

SFC4000T:/>security network acl lookup 1

431
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network ACL Clear

Description:

Clear all ACL counters.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Clear

Example:
Clear all ACL counters.

SFC4000T:/>security network acl clear

Security Network ACL Status

Description:

Show ACL status.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Status [combined|static|loop_protect|dhcp|upnp|arp_inspection|ipmc|ip_source_guard|conflicts]

Parameters:

combined : Show combined status

static : Show static user configured status

loop_protect : Shows the status by Loop Protect

dhcp : Show DHCP status

upnp : Show UPnP status

arp_inspection : Show ARP Inspection status

ipmc : Show IPMC status

ip_source_guard : Show IP Source Guard status

conflicts : Show conflict status

(default : Show combined status)

Example:
Show ACL status.

SFC4000T:/>security network acl status

432
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network ACL Port State

Description:

Set or show the ACL port state.

Syntax:

Security Network ACL Port State [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable|disable: ACL port state

Default Setting:

Enable

Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration

Description:

Show DHCP relay configuration.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration

Example:
Show DHCP relay configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp relay configuration

DHCP Relay Configuration:

=========================

DHCP Relay Mode : Disabled

DHCP Relay Server : NULL

DHCP Relay Information Mode : Disabled

DHCP Relay Information Policy : replace

Security Network DHCP Relay Mode

Description:

433
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Set or show the DHCP relay mode.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Relay Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable DHCP relaly mode. When enable DHCP relay mode operation, the agent forward and to transfer DHCP

messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain. And the DHCP

broadcast message won't flood for security considered.

disable: Disable DHCP relaly mode

(default: Show flow DHCP relaly mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable DHCP relay mode

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp relay mode enable

Security Network DHCP Relay Server

Description:

Show or set DHCP relay server.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Relay Server [<ip_addr>]

Parameters:

<ip_addr>: IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address

Default Setting:

null

Example:
Set DHCP relay server in 192.168.0.20

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp relay server 192.168.0.20

434
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode

Description:

Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode.

When enable DHCP relay information mode operation, the agent insert specific information (option 82) into a DHCP

message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client. It only

works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode

disable: Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode

(default: Show DHCP relay agent information option mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode.

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp relay information mode enable

Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy

Description:

Set or show the DHCP relay mode.

When enable DHCP relay information mode operation, if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay

agent information. It will enforce the policy.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy [replace|keep|drop]

Parameters:

replace : Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it

keep : Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it
drop : Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information

(default: Show DHCP relay information policy)

435
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Default Setting:

replace

Example:
Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp relay information policy keep

Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics

Description:

Show or clear DHCP relay statistics.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics [clear]

Parameters:

clear: Clear DHCP relay statistics

Example:
Show DHCP relay statistics.

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp relay statistics

Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration

Description:

Show DHCP snooping configuration.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration

Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode

Description:

Set or show the DHCP snooping mode.

Syntax:

436
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable DHCP snooping mode.

When enable DHCP snooping mode operation, the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports

and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports.

disable: Disable DHCP snooping mode

(default: Show flow DHCP snooping mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable DHCP snooping mode

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp snooping mode enable

Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode [<port_list>] [trusted|untrusted]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

trusted : Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message

untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message

(default: Show flow DHCP snooping port mode)

Default Setting:

trusted

Example:
Set untrusted DHCP snooping port mode in port 1

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp snooping port mode 1 untrusted

437
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics

Description:

Show or clear DHCP snooping statistics.

Syntax:

Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

clear : Clear DHCP snooping statistics

Example:
Show DHCP snooping statistics of port 1.

SFC4000T:/>security network dhcp snooping statistics 1

Port 1 Statistics:

--------------------

Rx Discover: 0 Tx Discover: 0

Rx Offer: 0 Tx Offer: 0

Rx Request: 0 Tx Request: 0

Rx Decline: 0 Tx Decline: 0

Rx ACK: 0 Tx ACK: 0

Rx NAK: 0 Tx NAK: 0

Rx Release: 0 Tx Release: 0

Rx Inform: 0 Tx Inform: 0
Rx Lease Query: 0 Tx Lease Query: 0

Rx Lease Unassigned: 0 Tx Lease Unassigned: 0

Rx Lease Unknown: 0 Tx Lease Unknown: 0

Rx Lease Active: 0 Tx Lease Active: 0

Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration

Description:

Show IP source guard configuration.

Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration

438
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network IP Source Guard Mode

Description:

Set or show IP source guard mode.

Syntax:

Security Network IP Source Guard Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable IP Source Guard

disable: Disable IP Source Guard

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IP source guard mode

SFC4000T:/>security network ip source guard mode enable

Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode.

Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable IP Source Guard

disable: Disable IP Source Guard

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IP source guard port mode

SFC4000T:/>security network ip source guard port mode enable

439
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network IP Source Guard Limit

Description:

Set or show the IP Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries.

Syntax:

Security Network IP Source Guard limit [<port_list>] [<dynamic_entry_limit>|unlimited]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<dynamic_entry_limit>|unlimited: dynamic entry limit (0-2) or unlimited

Default Setting:

unlimited

Example:
Set IP source guard limit

SFC4000T:/>security network ip source guard 1 1

Security Network IP Source Guard Entry

Description:

Add or delete IP source guard static entry.

Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Entry [<port_list>] add|delete <vid> <allowed_ip> <ip_mask>

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

add : Add new port IP source guard static entry

delete : Delete existing port IP source guard static entry

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

<allowed_ip>: IPv4 address (a.b.c.d), IP address allowed for doing IP source guard

<ip_mask> : IPv4 mask (a.b.c.d), IP mask for allowed IP address

Example:
Add IP source guard static entry.

SFC4000T:/>security network ip source guard entry 1 add 1 192.168.0.20

440
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network IP Source Guard Status

Description:

Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries.

Syntax:

Security Network IP Source Guard Status [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries.

SFC4000T:/>security network ip source guard status

Security Network IP Source Guard Translation

Description:

Translate IP source guard dynamic entries into static entries.

Syntax:

Security Network IP Source Guard Translation

Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration

Description:

Show ARP inspection configuration.

Syntax:

Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration

Example:
Show ARP inspection configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security network arp inspection configuration

441
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network ARP Inspection Mode

Description:

Set or show ARP inspection mode.

Syntax:

Security Network ARP Inspection Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable ARP Inspection

disable: Disable ARP Inspection

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable ARP inspection mode

SFC4000T:/>security network arp inspection mode enable

Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode.

Syntax:

Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable ARP Inspection port

disable : Disable ARP Inspection port

(default: Show ARP Inspection port mode)

Default Setting:

Disable

Example:
Enable the ARP inspection mode of port 1

442
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>security network arp inspection port mode 1

Security Network ARP Inspection Entry

Description:

Add or delete ARP inspection static entry.

Syntax:

Security Network ARP Inspection Entry [<port_list>] add|delete <vid> <allowed_mac> <allowed_ip>

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

add : Add new port ARP inspection static entry

delete : Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

<allowed_mac>: MAC address ('xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx' or 'xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx' or 'xxxxxxxxxxxx', x is a hexadecimal digit), MAC

address allowed for doing ARP request

<allowed_ip> : IPv4 address (a.b.c.d), IP address allowed for doing ARP request

Example:
Add ARP inspection static entry.

SFC4000T:/>security network arp inspection entry 1 add 1 00-30-4f-00-00-11 192.168.0.11

Security Network ARP Inspection Status

Description:

Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries.

Syntax:

Security Network ARP Inspection Status [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries.

SFC4000T:/>security network arp inspection status

443
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security Network ARP Inspection Translation

Description:

Translate ARP inspection dynamic entries into static entries.

Syntax:

Security Network ARP Inspection Translation

Security AAA Configuration

Description:

Show Auth configuration.

Syntax:

Security AAA Configuration

Example:
Show Auth configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security aaa configuration

AAA Configuration:

==================

Server Timeout : 15 seconds

Server Dead Time : 300 seconds

RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration:

===========================================

Server Mode IP Address Secret Port

------ -------- --------------- ------------------------------ -----

1 Disabled 1812

2 Disabled 1812

3 Disabled 1812

4 Disabled 1812

5 Disabled 1812

RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration:

444
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

=======================================

Server Mode IP Address Secret Port

------ -------- --------------- ------------------------------ -----

1 Disabled 1813

2 Disabled 1813

3 Disabled 1813

4 Disabled 1813

5 Disabled 1813

TACACS+ Authentication Server Configuration:

============================================

Server Mode IP Address Secret Port

------ -------- --------------- ------------------------------ -----

1 Disabled 49

2 Disabled 49

3 Disabled 49

4 Disabled 49

5 Disabled 49

Security AAA Timeout

Description:

Set or show server timeout.

Syntax:

Security AAA Timeout [<timeout>]

Parameters:

<timeout>: Server response timeout (3-3600 seconds)

(default: Show server timeout configuration)

Default Setting:

15

Example:
Set 30sec for server timeout

SFC4000T:/>security aaa timeout 30

445
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Security AAA Deadtime

Description:

Set or show server dead time.

Syntax:

Security AAA Deadtime [<dead_time>]

Parameters:

<dead_time>: Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn't answer a request (0-3600 seconds)

(default: Show server dead time configuration)

Default Setting:

300

Example:
Set 1000sec for server dead time

SFC4000T:/>security aaa deadtime 1000

Security AAA RADIUS

Description:

Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup.

Syntax:

Security AAA RADIUS [<server_index>] [enable|disable] [<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]

Parameters:

The server index (1-5)

(default: Show RADIUS authentication server configuration)

enable : Enable RADIUS authentication server

disable : Disable RADIUS authentication server

(default: Show RADIUS server mode)

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

<secret> : Secret shared with external authentication server.

To set an empty secret, use two quotes ("").

To use spaces in secret, enquote the secret.

Quotes in the secret are not allowed.

<server_port> : Server UDP port. Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port (1812)

446
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set RADIUS authentication server configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security aaa radius 1 enable 192.168.0.20 12345678 1812

Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS

Description:

Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup.

Syntax:

Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS [<server_index>] [enable|disable] [<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]

Parameters:

The server index (1-5)

(default: Show RADIUS accounting server configuration)

enable : Enable RADIUS accounting server

disable : Disable RADIUS accounting server

(default: Show RADIUS server mode)

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

<secret> : Secret shared with external accounting server.

To set an empty secret, use two quotes ("").

To use spaces in secret, enquote the secret.

Quotes in the secret are not allowed.

<server_port> : Server UDP port. Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port (1813)

Example:
Set RADIUS accounting server configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security acct_radius 1 enable 192.168.0.20 12345678 1813

Security AAA TACACS+

Description:

Set or show TACACS+ authentication server setup.

Syntax:
Security AAA TACACS+ [<server_index>] [enable|disable] [<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]

447
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

The server index (1-5)

(default: Show TACACS+ authentication server configuration)

enable : Enable TACACS+ authentication server

disable : Disable TACACS+ authentication server

(default: Show TACACS+ server mode)

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

<secret> : Secret shared with external authentication server.

To set an empty secret, use two quotes ("").

To use spaces in secret, enquote the secret.

Quotes in the secret are not allowed.

<server_port> : Server TCP port. Use 0 to use the default TACACS+ port (49)

Example:
Set TACACS+ authentication server configuration.

SFC4000T:/>security aaa tacacs+ 1 enable 192.168.0.20 12345678 49

Security AAA Statistics

Description:

Show RADIUS statistics.

Syntax:

Security AAA Statistics [<server_index>]

Parameters:

The server index (1-5)

(default: Show statistics for all servers)

Example:
Show RADIUS statistics.

SFC4000T:/>security aaa statistics

448
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command

STP Configuration

Description:

Show STP Bridge configuration.

Syntax:

STP Configuration

Example:
Show STP configuration.

SFC4000T:/>stp cofiguration

STP Configuration:

==================

Protocol Version: MSTP

Max Age : 20

Forward Delay : 15

Tx Hold Count :6

Max Hop Count : 20

BPDU Filtering : Disabled

BPDU Guard : Disabled

Error Recovery : Disabled

STP Version

Description:

Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version.

Syntax:

STP Version [<stp_version>]

Parameters:

<stp_version>: mstp|rstp|stp

Default Setting:

MSTP

449
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set the STP Bridge protocol version.

SFC4000T:/> stp version rstp

STP Tx Hold

Description:

Set or show the STP Bridge Transmit Hold Count parameter.

Syntax:

STP Txhold [<holdcount>]

Parameters:

<holdcount>: STP Transmit Hold Count (1-10)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set STP Tx hold in 10

SFC4000T:/>stp txhold 10

STP MaxHops

Description:

Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter.

Syntax:

STP MaxHops [<maxhops>]

Parameters:

<maxhops>: STP BPDU MaxHops (6-40)

Default Setting:

20

450
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set STP maximum hops in 25

SFC4000T:/>stp maxhops 25

STP MaxAge

Description:

Set or show the bridge instance maximum age.

Syntax:

STP MaxAge [<max_age>]

Parameters:

<max_age>: STP maximum age time (6-40, and max_age <= (forward_delay-1)*2)

Default Setting:

20

Example:
Set STP maximum age time in 10

SFC4000T:/>stp maxage 10

STP FwdDelay

Description:

Set or show the bridge instance forward delay.

Syntax:

STP FwdDelay [<delay>]

Parameters:

<delay>: MSTP forward delay (4-30, and max_age <= (forward_delay-1)*2))

Default Setting:

15

Example:

451
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Set STP forward delay value in 25

SFC4000T:/>stp fwddelay 25

STP CName

Description:

Set or Show MSTP configuration name and revision.

Syntax:

STP CName [<config-name>] [<integer>]

Parameters:

<config-name>: MSTP Configuration name. A text string up to 32 characters long.

Use quotes (") to embed spaces in name.

<integer> : Integer value

Default Setting:

Configuration name: MAC address

Configuration rev.: 0

Example:
Set MSTP configuration name and revision.

SFC4000T:/>stp cname 9f_SFC4000T 1

STP BPDU Filter

Description:

Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering.

Syntax:

STP bpduFilter [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable|disable: enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports

Default Setting:

Disable

452
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set edge port BPDU filtering

SFC4000T:/>stp bpdufilter enable

STP BPDU Guard

Description:

Set or show edge port BPDU Guard.

Syntax:

STP bpduGuard [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable|disable: enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports

Default Setting:

Disable

Example:
Set edge port BPDU guard

SFC4000T:/>stp bpduguard enable

STP Recovery

Description:

Set or show edge port error recovery timeout.

Syntax:

STP recovery [<timeout>]

Parameters:

<timeout>: Time before error-disabled ports are reenabled (30-86400 seconds, 0 disables)

(default: Show recovery timeout)

Default Setting:
Disable

453
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set STP recovery value in 30 sec.

SFC4000T:/>stp recovery 30

STP Status

Description:

Show STP Bridge status.

Syntax:

STP Status [<msti>] [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show STP Bridge status.

SFC4000T:/>stp status

CIST Bridge STP Status

Bridge ID : 80:00-00:30:4F:24:04:D1

Root ID : 80:00-00:30:4F:24:04:D1

Root Port :-

Root PathCost: 0
Regional Root: 80:00-00:30:4F:24:04:D1

Int. PathCost: 0

Max Hops : 20

TC Flag : Steady

TC Count :0

TC Last :-

Port Port Role State Pri PathCost Edge P2P Uptime

--------- -------------- ---------- --- -------- ---- --- -------------

10 DesignatedPort Forwarding 128 20000 Yes Yes 0d 00:10:32

STP MSTI Priority

Description:

Set or show the bridge instance priority.

454
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

STP Msti Priority [<msti>] [<priority>]

Parameters:

<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

<priority> : STP bridge priority (0/4096/8192/12288/.../53248/57344/61440)

Default:

32768

Example:
Set MST1 priority value in 4096.

SFC4000T:/>stp msti priority 1 4096

STP MSTI Map

Description:

Show or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration.

Syntax:

STP Msti Map [<msti>] [clear]

Parameters:

<msti>: STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

Clear : Clear VID to MSTI mapping

STP MSTI Add

Description:

Add a VLAN (single or range) to a MSTI.

Syntax:

STP Msti Add <msti> <vid-range>

Parameters:
<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

<vid-range>: Single VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'xx-yy' VLAN ID range

455
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Add MST1 in vlan1.

SFC4000T:/>stp msti add 1 1

STP Port Configuration

Description:

Show STP Port configuration.

Syntax:

STP Port Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.

Example:
Show STP status of Port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port configuration 1

Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restrTcn Point2point

---- -------- ------------------ ------------------ -----------

1 Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Auto

STP Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the STP enabling for a port.

Syntax:

STP Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.

Enable : Enable MSTP protocol

Disable : Disable MSTP protocol

Default:

456
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

disable

Example:
Enable STP function on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port mode 1 enable

STP Port Edge

Description:

Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter.

Syntax:

STP Port Edge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Enable : Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge

Disable : Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non-edge

Default:

disable

Example:
Enable STP edge function on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port edge 1 enable

STP Port AutoEdge

Description:

Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter.

Syntax:

STP Port AutoEdge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Enable : Enable MSTP autoEdge

457
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Disable : Disable MSTP autoEdge

Default:

enable

Example:
Disable STP edge function on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port autoedge 1 disable

STP Port P2P

Description:

Set or show the STP point2point port parameter.

Syntax:

STP Port P2P [<port_list>] [enable|disable|auto]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable MSTP point2point

disable : Disable MSTP point2point

auto : Automatic MSTP point2point detection

Default:
auto

Example:
Disable STP P2P function on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port p2p 1 disable

STP Port RestrictedRole

Description:

Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter.

Syntax:

STP Port RestrictedRole [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

458
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable MSTP restricted role

disable : Disable MSTP restricted role

Default:

disable

Example:
Eisable STP restricted role on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port restrictedrole 1 enable

STP Port RestrictedTcn

Description:

Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter.

Syntax:

STP Port RestrictedTcn [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable MSTP restricted TCN

disable : Disable MSTP restricted TCN

Default:

disable

Example:
Eisable STP restricted TCN on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port restrictedtcn 1 enable

STP Port bpduGuard

Description:
Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter.

459
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

STP Port bpduGuard [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable port BPDU Guard

disable : Disable port BPDU Guard

Default:

disable

Example:
Eisable BPDU guard on port1

SFC4000T:/>stp port bpduguard 1 enable

STP Port Statistic

Description:

Show STP port statistics.

Syntax:

STP Port Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

clear : Clear the selected port statistics

Example:
Show STP port statistics.

SFC4000T:/>stp port statistics

Port Rx MSTP Tx MSTP Rx RSTP Tx RSTP Rx STP Tx STP Rx TCN

Tx TCN Rx Ill. Rx Unk.

--------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

STP Port Mcheck

Description:

Set the STP mCheck (Migration Check) variable for ports.

460
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

STP Port Mcheck [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Set the STP mCheck (Migration Check) variable for port 1.

SFC4000T:/>stp port mcheck 1

STP MSTI Port Configuration

Description:

Show the STP port instance configuration.

Syntax:

STP Msti Port Configuration [<msti>] [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Default:

auto

STP MSTI Port Cost

Description:

Set or show the STP port instance path cost.

Syntax:

STP Msti Port Cost [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<path_cost>]

Parameters:

<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.

<path_cost>: STP port path cost (1-200000000) or 'auto'

Default:

461
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

auto

Example:
Set MSTI7 in port1

SFC4000T:/>stp msti port cost 7 1

MSTI Port Path Cost

---- ---- ----------

MST7 1 Auto

STP MSTI Port Priority

Description:

Set or show the STP port instance priority.

Syntax:

STP Msti Port Priority [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<priority>]

Parameters:

<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.

<priority> : STP port priority (0/16/32/48/.../224/240)

Default:
128

462
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.9 Link Aggregation Command

Aggregation Configuration

Description:
Show link aggregation configuration.

Syntax:
Aggr Configuration

Aggregation Add

Description:

Add or modify link aggregation.

Syntax:

Aggr Add <port_list> [<aggr_id>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<aggr_id> : Aggregation ID: 1-14

Example:
Add port 1~4 in Group1

SFC4000T:/>aggr add 1-4 1

Aggregation Delete

Description:

Delete link aggregation.

Syntax:

Aggr Delete <aggr_id>

Parameters:
<aggr_id>: Aggregation ID: 1-14

Example:

463
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Delete Group2

SFC4000T:/>aggr delete 2

Aggregation Lookup

Description:

Lookup link aggregation.

Syntax:

Aggr Lookup [<aggr_id>]

Parameters:

<aggr_id>: Aggregation ID: 1-14

Aggregation Mode

Description:

Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode.

Syntax:

Aggr Mode [smac|dmac|ip|port] [enable|disable]

Parameters:
smac : Source MAC address

dmac : Destination MAC address

ip : Source and destination IP address

port : Source and destination UDP/TCP port

enable : Enable field in traffic distribution

disable: Disable field in traffic distribution

Default Setting:

SMAC : Enabled

DMAC : Disabled

IP : Enabled

Port : Enabled

Example:
Disable SMAC mode

464
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>Aggr mode smac disable

465
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command

LACP Configuration

Description:

Show LACP configuration.

Syntax:

LACP Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show LACP configuration

SFC4000T:/>lacp configuration

Port Mode Key Role

---- -------- ---- ------

1 Disabled Auto Active

2 Disabled Auto Active

3 Disabled Auto Active

4 Disabled Auto Active

5 Disabled Auto Active

6 Disabled Auto Active

7 Disabled Auto Active

8 Disabled Auto Active

9 Disabled Auto Active

10 Disabled Auto Active

LACP Mode

Description:

Set or show LACP mode.

Syntax:
LACP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

466
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable LACP protocol

disable: Disable LACP protocol

(default: Show LACP mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable LACP for port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lacp mode 1-4 enable

LACP Key

Description:

Set or show the LACP key.

Syntax:

LACP Key [<port_list>] [<key>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<key> : LACP key (1-65535) or 'auto'

Default Setting:

auto

Example:
Set key1 for port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lacp key 1-4 1

LACP Priority

Description:

Set or show the LACP prio.

Syntax:

467
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

LACP Prio [<port_list>] [<prio>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<prio> : LACP Prio (0-65535)

Default Setting:

32768

LACP System Priority

Description:

Set or show the LACP System prio.

Syntax:

LACP System Prio [<sysprio>]

Parameters:

<sysprio>: LACP System Prio (0-65535)

Default Setting:

32768

LACP Role

Description:

Set or show the LACP role.

Syntax:

LACP Role [<port_list>] [active|passive]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

active : Initiate LACP negotiation

passive: Listen for LACP packets

(default: Show LACP role)

Default Setting:

468
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

active

Example:
Set passive for port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lacp role 1-4 passive

LACP Status

Description:

Show LACP Status.

Syntax:

LACP Status [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show LACP status of port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lacp status 1-4

Port Mode Key Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port

---- -------- ----- ------- ----------------- ------------

1 Disabled 1 - - -

2 Disabled 1 - - -

3 Disabled 1 - - -

4 Disabled 1 - - -

LACP Statistics

Description:

Show LACP Statistics.

Syntax:

LACP Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]

Parameters:

469
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

clear : Clear LACP statistics

Example:
Show LACP statistics of port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lacp statistics 1-4

Port Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal

------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ----------

1 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0

3 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 0 0

LACP Timeout

Description:

Set or show the LACP timeout.

Syntax:

LACP Timeout [<port_list>] [fast|slow]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

fast : Fast PDU transmissions (fast timeout)

slow : Slow PDU transmissions (slow timeout)

(default: Show LACP timeout)

Default Setting:

fast

470
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.11 LLDP Command

LLDP Configuration

Description:

Show LLDP configuration.

Syntax:

LLDP Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show LLDP configuration of port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lldp configuration 1-4

LLDP Configuration:

===================

Interval : 30

Hold :3

Tx Delay :2

Reinit Delay: 2

Port Mode Port Descr System Name System Descr System Capa Mgmt Addr CDP awareness

---- -------- ---------- ----------- ------------ ----------- --------- -------------

1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

2 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

3 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

4 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled

LLDP Mode

Description:

Set or show LLDP mode.

Syntax:

LLDP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]

471
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable LLDP reception and transmission

disable: Disable LLDP

rx : Enable LLDP reception only

tx : Enable LLDP transmission only

(default: Show LLDP mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable port1 LLDP function.

SFC4000T:/>lldp mode 1 enable

LLDP Optional TLV

Description:

Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs.

Syntax:

LLDP Optional_TLV [<port_list>] [port_descr|sys_name|sys_descr|sys_capa|mgmt_addr] [enable|disable]

Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

port_descr : Description of the port

sysm_name : System name

sys_descr : Description of the system

sys_capa : System capabilities

mgmt_addr : Master's IP address

(default: Show optional TLV's configuration)

enable : Enables TLV

disable : Disable TLV

(default: Show optional TLV's configuration)

Default Setting:
Description of the port: Enable

System name: Enable

Description of the system: Enable

472
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

System capabilities: Enable

Master's IP address: Enable

Example:
Disable description of the port for port1

SFC4000T:/>lldp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable

LLDP Interval

Description:

Set or show LLDP Tx interval.

Syntax:

LLDP Interval [<interval>]

Parameters:

<interval>: LLDP transmission interval (5-32768)

Default Setting:

30

Example:
Set transmission interval in 10

SFC4000T:/>lldp interval 10

LLDP Hold

Description:

Set or show LLDP Tx hold value.

Syntax:

LLDP Hold [<hold>]

Parameters:

<hold>: LLDP hold value (2-10)

Default Setting:

473
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set LLDP hold value in 10

SFC4000T:/>lldp hold 10

LLDP Delay

Description:

Set or show LLDP Tx delay.

Syntax:

LLDP Delay [<delay>]

Parameters:

<delay>: LLDP transmission delay (1-8192)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set LLDP delay value in 1

SFC4000T:/>lldp delay 1

LLDP Reinit

Description:

Set or show LLDP reinit delay.

Syntax:

LLDP Reinit [<reinit>]

Parameters:

<reinit>: LLDP reinit delay (1-10)

Default Setting:

474
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3

SFC4000T:/>lldp reinit 3

LLDP Statistics

Description:

Show LLDP Statistics.

Syntax:

LLDP Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

clear : Clear LLDP statistics

Example:
Show LLDP Statistics of port 1

SFC4000T:/>lldp statistics 1

LLDP global counters

Neighbor entries was last changed at - (18819 sec. ago).

Total Neighbors Entries Added 0.

Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0.

Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0.

Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0.

LLDP local counters

Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx TLV Rx TLV Rx TLV

Port Frames Frames Errors Discards Errors Unknown Organz. Aged

---- ------ ------ ------ -------- ------ ------- ------- -----

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

475
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

LLDP Info

Description:

Show LLDP neighbor device information.

Syntax:

LLDP Info [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

LLDP CDP Aware

Description:

Set or show if discovery information from received CDP ( Cisco Discovery Protocol ) frames is added to the LLDP

neighbor table.

Syntax:

LLDP cdp_aware [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable CDP awareness (CDP discovery information is added to the LLDP neighbor table)

disable: Disable CDP awareness

(default: Show CDP awareness configuration)

476
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.12 LLDPMED Command

LLDPMED Configuration

Description:

Show LLDP-MED configuration.

Syntax:

LLDPMED Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show LLDP-MED configuration of port1~4

SFC4000T:/>lldpmed configuration 1-4

LLDP-MED Configuration:

=======================

Fast Start Repeast Count : 4

Location Coordinates : Latitude - 0.0000 North

Longitude - 0.0000 East

Altitude - 0.0000 meter(s)

Map datum - WGS84

Civic Address Location :

Port Policies

1 none

2 none

3 none

4 none

LLDPMED Civic

Description:

Set or show LLDP-MED Civic Address Location.

477
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

LLDPMED Civic

[country|state|county|city|district|block|street|leading_street_direction|trailing_street_suffix|str_suf|house_no|house_no_s

uffix|landmark|additional_info|name|zip_code|building|apartment|floor|room_number|place_type|postal_com_name|p_o_

box|additional_code] [<civic_value>]

Parameters:

country : Country

state : National subdivisions (state, caton, region, province, prefecture)

county : County, parish,gun (JP), district(IN)

city : City, townchip, shi (JP)

district : City division,borough, city, district, ward,chou (JP)

block : Neighborhood, block

street : Street

leading_street_direction : Leading street direction

trailing_street_suffix : Trailing street suffix

str_suf : Street Suffix

house_no : House Number

house_no_suffix : House number suffix

landmark : Landmark or vanity address

additional_info : Additional location information

name : Bame(residence and office occupant)

zip_code : Postal/zip code

building : Building (structure)

apartment : Unit (apartment, suite)

floor : Floor

room_number : Room number

place_type : Placetype

postal_com_name : Postal community name

p_o_box : Post office box (P.O. Box)

additional_code : Addtional code

(default: Show Civic Address Location configuration)

<civic_value>: lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry.

LLDPMED ECS

Description:
Set or show LLDP-MED Emergency Call Service.

478
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

LLDPMED ecs [<ecs_value>]

Parameters:

<ecs_value>: lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service

LLDPMED Policy Delete

Description:

Delete the selected policy.

Syntax:

LLDPMED policy delete [<policy_list>]

Parameters:

<policy_list>: List of policies to delete

Example:
Delete the policy 1

SFC4000T:/>lldpmed policy delete 1

LLDPMED Policy Add

Description:

Adds a policy to the list of polices.

Syntax:

LLDPMED policy add <policy_type> [tagged|untagged] [<vlan_id>] [<l2_priority>] [<dscp>]

Parameters:

<policy_type>: The policy_type parameter takes the following values:

voice : Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive

voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and

enhanced security by isolation from data applications

voice_signaling : Voice Signaling (conditional) for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the
voice signaling than for the voice media.

guest_voice : Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users and

visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting

479
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

interactive voice services.

guest_voice_signaling : Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) for use in network topologies that require a different policy

for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media.

softphone_voice : Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as

PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at

all,and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific

VLAN.

video_conferencing : Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar

appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.

streaming_video : Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other

similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy

treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of

this application type.

video_signaling : Video Signaling (conditional) for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for

the video signaling than for the video media.

tagged : The device is using tagged frames

unragged : The device is using untagged frames

<vlan_id> : VLAN id

<l2_priority>: This field may specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE 802.1D-2004 [3].

<dscp> : This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified

application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 [5]. This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values

(0 through 63). A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.

LLDPMED Port Policy

Description:

Set or show LLDP-MED port polcies.

Syntax:

LLDPMED port policies [<port_list>] [<policy_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<policy_list>: List of policies to delete

480
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

LLDPMED Coordinates

Description:

Set or show LLDP-MED Location.

Syntax:

LLDPMED Coordinates [<tude_type>] [<direction>] [coordinate_value]

Parameters:

<tude_type> : The tude_type parameter takes the following values:

latitude : Latitude, 0 to 90 degrees with max. 4 digits (Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers

are south of the equator).

longitude: Longitude, 0 to 180 degrees with max. 4 digits (Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative

numbers are West of the prime meridian).

altitude : Altitude, -32767 to 32767 Meters or floors with max. 4 digits.

<direction> : The direction parameter takes the following values:

North : North (Valid for latitude)

South : South (Valid for latitude)

West : West (Valid for longitude)

East : East (Valid for longitude)

Meters : Meters (Valid for altitude)

Floor : Floor (Valid for altitude)

coordinate_value: Coordinate value

LLDPMED Datum

Description:

Set or show LLDP-MED Coordinates map datum.

Syntax:

LLDPMED Datum [<datum_type>]

Parameters:

<datum_type>: The datum_type parameter takes the following values:

wgs84 : WGS84

nad83_navd88 : NAD83_NAVD88

nad83_mllw : NAD83_MLLW

481
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

LLDPMED Fast

Description:

Set or show LLDP-MED Fast Start Repeat Count.

Syntax:

LLDPMED Fast [<count>]

Parameters:

<count>: The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism

defined by LLDP-MED (1-10).

LLDPMED Info

Description:

Show LLDP-MED neighbor device information.

Syntax:

LLDPMED Info [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

482
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.13 Quality of Service Command

QoS Configuration

Description:

Show QoS Configuration.

Syntax:

QoS Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

QoS Port Classification Class

Description:

Set or show the default QoS class.

If the QoS class has been dynamically changed, then the actual QoS class is shown in parentheses after the configured

QoS class.

Syntax:

QoS Port Classification Class [<port_list>] [<class>]

Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<class> : QoS class (0-7)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set default QoS class in 1 for port 1

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Classification Class 1 1

QoS Port Classification DPL

Description:

Set or show the default Drop Precedence Level.

483
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

QoS Port Classification DPL [<port_list>] [<dpl>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<dpl> : Drop Precedence Level (0-3)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set the default Drop Precedence Level in 1 for port1

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Classification dpl 1 1

QoS Port Classification Tag

Description:

Set or show if the classification is based on the PCP and DEI values in tagged frames.

Syntax:

QoS Port Classification Tag [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable tag classification

disable : Disable tag classification

(default: Show tag classification mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable QoS port classification Tag.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Classification tag 1-10 enable

484
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS Port Classification Map

Description:

Set or show the port classification map.

This map is used when port classification tag is enabled,and the purpose is to translate the Priority Code Point (PCP) and

Drop Eligible Indicator (DEI) from a tagged frame to QoS class and DP level.

Syntax:

QoS Port Classification Map [<port_list>] [<pcp_list>] [<dei_list>] [<class>] [<dpl>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<pcp_list> : PCP list or 'all', default: All PCPs (0-7)

<dei_list> : DEI list or 'all', default: All DEIs (0-1)

<class> : QoS class (0-7)

<dpl> : Drop Precedence Level (0-3)

QoS Port Classification DSCP

Description:

Set or show if the classification is based on DSCP value in IP frames.

Syntax:

QoS Port Classification DSCP [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable DSCP based classification

disable : Disable DSCP based classification

(default: Show DSCP based classification mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable QoS port classification DSCP.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Classification dscp 1-10 enable

485
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS Port Policer Mode

Description:

Set or show the port policer mode

Syntax:

QoS Port Policer Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable port policer

disable : Disable port policer

(default: Show port policer mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable QoS port policer

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Policer Mode 1-10 enable

QoS Port Policer Rate

Description:
Set or show the port policer rate.

Syntax:

QoS Port Policer Rate [<port_list>] [<rate>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<rate> : Rate in kbps or fps (100-13200000)

Default Setting:

500

Example:
Set the port policer rate in 1000

486
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Policer Rate 1-10 1000

QoS Port Policer Unit

Description:

Set or show the port policer unit.

Syntax:

QoS Port Policer Unit [<port_list>] [kbps|fps]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

kbps : Unit is kilo bits per second

fps : Unit is frames per second

(default: Show port policer unit)

Default Setting:

kbps

Example:
Set the port policer unit in fps

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Policer unit 1-10 fps

QoS Port Policer Flow Control

Description:

Set or show the port policer flow control.

If policer flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames are sent instead of discarding

frames.

Syntax:

QoS Port Policer FlowControl [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable port policer flow control

disable : Disable port policer flow control

487
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

(default: Show port policer flow control mode)

Default Setting:

disable

QoS Port Scheduler Mode

Description:

Set or show the port scheduler mode.

Syntax:

QoS Port Scheduler Mode [<port_list>] [strict|weighted]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

strict : Strict mode

weighted: Weighted mode

(default: Show port scheduler mode)

Default Setting:

strict

Example:
Set the port schedule mode in weighted mode

SFC4000T:/>qos Port Scheduler Mode 1-10 weighted

QoS Port Scheduler Weight

Description:

Set or show the port scheduler weight.

Syntax:

QoS Port Scheduler Weight [<port_list>] [<queue_list>] [<weight>]

Parameters:
<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<queue_list>: Weighted queue list or 'all', default: All weighted queues (0-5)

<weight> : Scheduler weight (1-100)

488
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS Port QueueShaper Mode

Description:

Set or show the port queue shaper mode.

Syntax:

QoS Port QueueShaper Mode [<port_list>] [<queue_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<queue_list>: Queue list or 'all', default: All queues (0-7)

enable : Enable port queue shaper

disable : Disable port queue shaper

(default: Show port queue shaper mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable port queue shaper for all port & queue

SFC4000T:/>qos Port QueueShaper Mode 1-10 0-7 enable

QoS Port QueueShaper Rate

Description:

Set or show the port queue shaper rate.

Syntax:

QoS Port QueueShaper Rate [<port_list>] [<queue_list>] [<bit_rate>]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<queue_list>: Queue list or 'all', default: All queues (0-7)

<bit_rate> : Rate in kilo bits per second (100-13200000)

Default Setting:
500kbps

Example:

489
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Set the port queue shaper rate in 1000

SFC4000T:/>qos Port QueueShaper rate 1-10 0-7 1000

QoS Port QueueShaper Excess

Description:

Set or show the port queue excess bandwidth mode.

Syntax:

QoS Port QueueShaper Excess [<port_list>] [<queue_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<queue_list>: Queue list or 'all', default: All queues (0-7)

enable : Enable use of excess bandwidth

disable : Disable use of excess bandwidth

(default: Show port queue excess bandwidth mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable the port queue excess bandwidth mode.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port QueueShaper Excess 1-10 0-7 enable

QoS Port TagRemarking Mode

Description:

Set or show the port tag remarking mode.

Syntax:

QoS Port TagRemarking Mode [<port_list>] [classified|default|mapped]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values

default : Use default PCP/DEI values

490
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

mapped : Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level

(default: Show port tag remarking mode)

Default Setting:

classified

Example:
Set the port tag remarking mode in mapped.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port TagRemarking Mode 1-10 mapped

QoS Port TagRemarking PCP

Description:

Set or show the default PCP. This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to 'default'.

Syntax:

QoS Port TagRemarking PCP [<port_list>] [<pcp>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<pcp> : Priority Code Point (0-7)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set the default PCP in 1.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port TagRemarking PCP 1-10 1

QoS Port TagRemarking DEI

Description:

Set or show the default DEI. This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to 'default'.

Syntax:
QoS Port TagRemarking DEI [<port_list>] [<dei>]

491
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<dei> : Drop Eligible Indicator (0-1)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set the default EDI in 1.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port TagRemarking EDI 1-10 1

QoS Port TagRemarking Map

Description:

Set or show the port tag remarking map. This map is used when port tag remarking mode is set to 'mapped', and the

purpose is to translate the classified QoS class (0-7) and DP level (0-1) to PCP and DEI.

Syntax:

QoS Port TagRemarking Map [<port_list>] [<class_list>] [<dpl_list>] [<pcp>] [<dei>]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<class_list>: QoS class list or 'all', default: All QoS classes (0-7)

<dpl_list> : DP level list or 'all', default: All DP levels (0-1)

<pcp> : Priority Code Point (0-7)

<dei> : Drop Eligible Indicator (0-1)

QoS Port DSCP Translation

Description:

Set or show DSCP ingress translation mode.

If translation is enabled for a port, incoming frame DSCP value is translated and translated value is used for QoS

classification.

Syntax:
QoS Port DSCP Translation [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

492
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable DSCP ingress translation

disable : Disable DSCP ingress translation

(default: Show DSCP ingress translation mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable DSCP ingress translation on all port.

SFC4000T:/>qos Port DSCP Translation 1-10 enable

QoS Port DSCP Classification

Description:

Set or show DSCP classification based on QoS class.

This enables per port to map new DSCP value based on QoS class.

Syntax:

QoS Port DSCP Classification [<port_list>] [none|zero|selected|all]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

none : No DSCP ingress classification

zero : Classify DSCP if DSCP = 0

selected : Classify DSCP for which class. mode is 'enable'

all : Classify all DSCP

(default: Show port DSCP ingress classification mode)

Default Setting:

none

Example:
Set DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level in zero

SFC4000T:/> QoS Port DSCP Classification 1-10 zero

493
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark

Description:

Set or show the port DSCP remarking mode.

Syntax:

QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark [<port_list>] [disable|enable|remap]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

disable : Disable DSCP egress rewrite

enable : Enable DSCP egress rewrite with the value received from analyzer

remap : Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP

(default: Show port DSCP egress remarking mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable DSCP egress rewrite

SFC4000T:/> QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark 1-10 enable

QoS DSCP Map

Description:

Set or show DSCP mapping table.

This table is used to map QoS class and DP level based on DSCP value.

DSCP value used to map QoS class and DPL is either translated DSCP value or incoming frame DSCP value.

Syntax:

QoS DSCP Map [<dscp_list>] [<class>] [<dpl>]

Parameters:

<dscp_list>: DSCP (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43) list or 'all'

(default: Show DSCP ingress map table i.e. DSCP->(class, DPL))

<class> : QoS class (0-7)

<dpl> : Drop Precedence Level (0-3)

494
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS DSCP Translation

Description:

Set or show global ingress DSCP translation table.

If port DSCP translation is enabled, translation table is used to translate incoming frames DSCP value and translated

value is used to map QoS class and DP level.

Syntax:

QoS DSCP Translation [<dscp_list>] [<trans_dscp>]

Parameters:

<dscp_list> : DSCP (0-63) list or 'all'

(default: Show DSCP translation table)

<trans_dscp>: Translated DSCP: 0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43

QoS DSCP Trust

Description:

Set or show trusted DSCP value which is used for QoS classification.

The DSCP value to be checked for trust is either translated value ifDSCP translation is enabled for the ingress port or

incoming frame DSCPvalue if translation is disabled for the port. Trusted DSCP value is onlyused for QoS classification.

Syntax:

QoS DSCP Trust [<dscp_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<dscp_list>: DSCP (0-63) list or 'all'

enable : Set DSCP as trusted DSCP

disable : Set DSCP as un-trusted DSCP

(default: Show DSCP Trust status)

Default Setting:

disable

QoS DSCP Classification Mode

Description:

Set or show DSCP ingress classification mode.

495
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

If port DSCP classification is 'selected', DSCP will be classified based on QoS class and DP level only for DSCP value

with classification mode 'enabled'. DSCP may be translated DSCP if translation is enabled for the port.

Syntax:

QoS DSCP Classification Mode [<dscp_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<dscp_list>: DSCP (0-63) list or 'all'

enable : Enable DSCP ingress classification

disable : Disable DSCP ingress classification

(default: Show DSCP classification mode)

Default Setting:

disable

QoS DSCP Classification MAP

Description:

Set or show DSCP ingress classification table.

This table is used to map DSCP from QoS class and DP level. The DSCP which needs to be classified depends on port

DSCP classification and DSCP classification mode. Incoming frame DSCP may be translated beforeusing the value for

classification.

Syntax:
QoS DSCP Classification Map [<class_list>] [<dpl_list>] [<dscp>]

Parameters:

<class_list>: QoS class list or 'all', default: All QoS classes (0-7)

<dpl_list> : DP level list or 'all', default: All DP levels (0-1)

<dscp> : Mapped DSCP: 0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43

Default Setting:

disable

QoS DSCP EgressRemap

Description:

Set or show DSCP egress remap table. This table is used if the port egress remarking mode is 'remap' and the purpose is

496
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

to map the classified DSCP to a new DSCP value.

Syntax:

QoS DSCP EgressRemap [<dscp_list>] [<dscp>]

Parameters:

<dscp_list>: DSCP (0-63) list or 'all'

<dscp> : Egress remapped DSCP: 0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43

QoS Port Storm Unicast

Description:

Set or show the port storm rate limiter for unicast frames.

Syntax:

QoS Port Storm Unicast [<port_list>] [enable|disable] [<rate>] [kbps|fps]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable storm policing of unicast frames

disable : Disable storm policing of unicast frames

<rate> : Rate in kbps or fps (100-13200000)

kbps : Unit is kilo bits per second

fps : Unit is frames per second

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable unicast storm control in 2kbps

SFC4000T:/> QoS Port Storm Unicast enable 2

QoS Port Storm Multicast

Description:
Set or show the port storm rate limiter for broadcast frames.

Syntax:

497
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS Port Storm Broadcast [<port_list>] [enable|disable] [<rate>] [kbps|fps]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable storm policing of broadcast frames

disable : Disable storm policing of broadcast frames

<rate> : Rate in kbps or fps (100-13200000)

kbps : Unit is kilo bits per second

fps : Unit is frames per second

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable multicast storm control in 2kbps

SFC4000T:/> QoS Port Storm multicast enable 2

QoS Port Storm Broadcast

Description:

Set or show the broadcast storm rate limiter.

The limiter will only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present in the MAC Address table.

Syntax:

QoS Storm Broadcast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]

Parameters:

enable : Enable broadcast storm control

disable : Disable broadcast storm control

<packet_rate>: Rate in fps (1, 2, 4, ..., 512, 1k, 2k, 4k, ..., 32768k)

Default Setting:

disable

498
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS QCL Add

Description:

Add or modify QoS Control Entry (QCE).

If the QCE ID parameter <qce_id> is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists, the QCE will be modified.

Otherwise, a new QCE will be added. If the QCE ID is not specified, the next available QCE ID will be used. If the next

QCE ID parameter <qce_id_next> is specified, the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list. If the next QCE ID is not

specified and if it is a new entry added, the QCE will be placed last in the list. Otherwise if the next QCE ID is not specified

and if existing QCE is modified, QCE will be in the same location in the list. To modify and move the entry to last in the list,

use the word 'last' for <qce_id_next>.

Syntax:

QoS QCL Add [<qce_id>] [<qce_id_next>] [<port_list>] [<tag>] [<vid>] [<pcp>] [<dei>] [<smac>] [<dmac_type>]

[(etype [<etype>]) | (LLC [<DSAP>] [<SSAP>] [<control>]) | (SNAP [<PID>]) | (ipv4 [<protocol>] [<sip>] [<dscp>]

[<fragment>] [<sport>] [<dport>]) | (ipv6 [<protocol>] [<sip_v6>] [<dscp>] [<sport>] [<dport>])] [<class>] [<dp>]

[<classified_dscp>]

Parameters:

<qce_id> : QCE ID (1-256), default: Next available ID

<qce_id_next> : Next QCE ID: "next_id (1-256) or 'last'"

<port_list> : Port List: "port <port_list> or 'all'", default: All ports

<tag> : Frame tag: untag|tag|any

<vid> : VID: 1-4095 or 'any', either a specific VID or range of VIDs

<pcp> : Priority Code Point: specific(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'any'
<dei> : Drop Eligible Indicator: 0-1 or 'any'

<smac> : Source MAC address: (xx-xx-xx) or 'any', 24 MS bits (OUI)

<dmac_type> : Destination MAC type: unicast|multicast|broadcast|any

etype : Ethernet Type keyword

<etype> : Ethernet Type: 0x600-0xFFFF or 'any' but excluding 0x800(IPv4) and 0x86DD(IPv6)

llc : LLC keyword

<dsap> : Destination Service Access Point: 0x00-0xFF or 'any'

<ssap> : Source Service Access Point: 0x00-0xFF or 'any'

<control> : LLC control: 0x00-0xFF or 'any'

snap : SNAP keyword

<pid> : Protocol ID (EtherType) or 'any'

ipv4 : IPv4 keyowrd

<protocol> : IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'any'

<sip> : Source IP address: (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'

<dscp> : DSCP: (0-63,BE,CS1-CS7,EF or AF11-AF43) or 'any', specific or range

499
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<fragment> : IPv4 frame fragmented: yes|no|any

<sport> : Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'any', specific or port range

<dport> : Dest. TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'any', specific or port range

ipv6 : IPv6 keyowrd

<sip_v6> : IPv6 source address: (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any', 32 LS bits

<class> : QoS Class: "class (0-7)", default: basic classification

<dp> : DP Level: "dp (0-3)", default: basic classification

<classified_dscp>: DSCP: "dscp (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43)"

QoS QCL Delete

Description:

Delete QCE entry from QoS Control list.

Syntax:

QoS QCL Delete <qce_id>

Parameters:

<qce_id>: QCE ID (1-256), default: Next available ID

QoS QCL Lookup

Description:
Lookup QoS Control List.

Syntax:

QoS QCL Lookup [<qce_id>]

Parameters:

<qce_id>: QCE ID (1-256), default: Next available ID

QoS QCL Status

Description:

Show QCL status. This can be used to display if there is any conflict in QCE for differnet user types.

Syntax:

500
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QoS QCL status [combined|static|voice_vlan|conflicts]

Parameters:

combined|static|voice_vlan|conflicts: combined : Shows the combined status

static : Shows the static user configured status

voice_vlan : Shows the status by Voice VLAN

conflicts : Shows all conflict status

(default : Shows the combined status)

QoS QCL Refresh

Description:

Resolve QCE conflict status. Same H/W resource is shared by multiple applications and it may not be available even

before MAX QCE entry. So user can release the resource in use by other applications and use this command to acquire

the resource.

Syntax:

QoS QCL refresh

501
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.14 Mirror Command

Mirror Configuration

Description:

Show mirror configuration.

Syntax:

Mirror Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Show mirror configuration.

SFC4000T:/>mirror configuration

Mirror Port

Description:

Set or show the mirror port.

Syntax:

Mirror Port [<port>|disable]

Parameters:

<port>|disable: Mirror port or 'disable', default: Show port

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Set port 2 for the mirror port.

SFC4000T:/>mirror port 2

502
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Mirror Mode

Description:

Set or show the mirror mode.

Syntax:

Mirror Mode [<port_cpu_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]

Parameters:

<port_cpu_list>: Port list or CPU or 'all', default: All ports and CPU

enable : Enable Rx and Tx mirroring

disable: Disable Mirroring

rx : Enable Rx mirroring

tx : Enable Tx mirroring

(default: Show mirror mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable the mirror mode for port 1-4.

SFC4000T:/>mirror mode 1-4 enable

503
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.15 Configuration Command

Configuration Save

Description:

Save configuration to TFTP server.

Syntax:

Config Save <ip_server> <file_name>

Parameters:

<ip_server>: TFTP server IP address (a.b.c.d)

<file_name>: Configuration file name

Configuration Load

Description:

Load configuration from TFTP server.

Syntax:

Config Load <ip_server> <file_name> [check]

Parameters:

<ip_server>: TFTP server IP address (a.b.c.d)

<file_name>: Configuration file name

check : Check configuration file only, default: Check and apply file

504
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.16 Firmware Command

Firmware Load

Description:

Load new firmware from TFTP server.

Syntax:

Firmware Load <ip_addr_string> <file_name>

Parameters:

<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string

<file_name> : Firmware file name

Firmware IPv6 Load

Description:

Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server.

Syntax:

Firmware IPv6 Load <ipv6_server> <file_name>

Parameters:

<ipv6_server>: TFTP server IPv6 address

<file_name> : Firmware file name

Firmware Information

Description:

Display information about active and alternate firmware images.

Syntax:

Firmware Information

Firmware Swap

Description:

505
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Activate the alternate firmware image.

Syntax:

Firmware Swap

506
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.17 UPnP Command

UPnP Configuration

Description:

Show UPnP configuration.

Syntax:

UPnP Configuration

Example:
Show UPnP configuration.

SFC4000T:/>upnp configuration

UPnP Configuration:

===================

UPnP Mode : Disabled

UPnP TTL :4

UPnP Advertising Duration : 100

UPnP Mode

Description:

Set or show the UPnP mode.

Syntax:

UPnP Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable UPnP

disable: Disable UPnP

(default: Show UPnP mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable the UPnP mode.

507
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SFC4000T:/>upnp mode enable

UPnP TTL

Description:

Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages.

Syntax:

UPnP TTL [<ttl>]

Parameters:

<ttl>: ttl range (1..255), default: Show UPnP TTL

Default Setting:

Example:
Set the value 10 for TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages.

SFC4000T:/>upnp ttl 10

UPnP Advertising Duration

Description:

Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration.

Syntax:

UPnP Advertising Duration [<duration>]

Parameters:

<duration>: duration range (100..86400), default: Show UPnP duration range

Default Setting:

100

Example:
Set value 1000 for UPnP Advertising Duration.

SFC4000T:/>upnp advertising duration 1000

508
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.18 MVR Command

MVR Configuration

Description:

Show the MVR configuration.

Syntax:

MVR Configuration

Example:
Show the MVR configuration.

SFC4000T:/>mvr configuration

MVR Configuration:

==================

MVR Mode: Disabled

Muticast VLAN ID: 100

Port Port Mode Port Type Immediate Leave

---- ----------- ----------- ---------------

1 Disabled Receive Disabled

2 Disabled Receive Disabled

3 Disabled Receive Disabled

4 Disabled Receive Disabled

5 Disabled Receive Disabled

6 Disabled Receive Disabled

7 Disabled Receive Disabled

8 Disabled Receive Disabled

9 Disabled Receive Disabled

10 Disabled Receive Disabled

MVR Mode

Description:
Set or show the MVR mode.

Syntax:

509
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MVR Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable MVR mode

disable : Disable MVR mode

(default: Show MVR mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable MVR mode.

SFC4000T:/>mvr mode enable

MVR VLAN Setup

Description:

Set or show per MVR VLAN configuration.

Syntax:

MVR VLAN Setup [<mvid>] [add|del|upd] [(Name <mvr_name>)]

Parameters:

<mvid> : MVR VLAN ID (1-4095)

add : Add operation

del : Delete operation

upd : Update operation

name : MVR Name keyword

<mvr_name>: MVR VLAN name (Maximum of 32 characters)

MVR VLAN Mode

Description:

Set or show per MVR VLAN mode.

Syntax:

MVR VLAN Mode [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [dynamic|compatible]

510
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<vid>|<mvr_name>: MVR VLAN ID (1-4095) or Name (Maximum of 32 characters)

dynamic : Dynamic MVR mode

compatible: Compatible MVR mode

(default: Show MVR VLAN mode)

MVR VLAN Port

Description:

Set or show per MVR VLAN port role.

Syntax:

MVR VLAN Port [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [<port_list>] [source|receiver|inactive]

Parameters:

<vid>|<mvr_name>: MVR VLAN ID (1-4095) or Name (Maximum of 32 characters)

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

source : MVR source port

receiver : MVR receiver port

inactive : Disable MVR

(default: Show MVR port role)

MVR VLAN LLQI

Description:

Set or show per MVR VLAN LLQI (Last Listener Query Interval).

Syntax:

MVR VLAN LLQI [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [mvr_param_llqi]

Parameters:

<vid>|<mvr_name>: MVR VLAN ID (1-4095) or Name (Maximum of 32 characters)

mvr_param_llqi :

-1 : Default Value (5)

0~31744 : Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of seconds

(default: Show MVR Interface Last Listener Query Interval

511
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MVR VLAN Channel

Description:

Set or show per MVR VLAN channel.

Syntax:

MVR VLAN Channel [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [add|del|upd] [channel] [channel_bound] [(Name <grp_name>)]

Parameters:

<vid>|<mvr_name>: MVR VLAN ID (1-4095) or Name (Maximum of 32 characters)

add : Add operation

del : Delete operation

upd : Update operation

channel : IPv4/IPv6 multicast group address

channel_bound : The boundary IPv4/IPv6 multicast group address for the channel

name : MVR Name keyword

<grp_name> : MVR Channel name. (Maximum of 32 characters)

MVR VLAN Priority

Description:

Set or show per MVR VLAN priority and VLAN tag.

Syntax:
MVR VLAN Priority [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [priority] [tagged|untagged]

Parameters:

<vid>|<mvr_name>: MVR VLAN ID (1-4095) or Name (Maximum of 32 characters)

priority : CoS priority value ranges from 0 ~ 7

tagged : Tagged IGMP/MLD frames will be sent

untagged : Untagged IGMP/MLD frames will be sent

MVR Immediate Leave

Description:

Set or show MVR immediate leave per port.

Syntax:

512
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MVR Immediate Leave [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable Immediate Leave

disable : Disable Immediate Leave

(default: Show MVR Immediate Leave)

MVR Status

Description:

Show/Clear MVR operational status.

Syntax:

MVR Status [<vid>] [clear]

Parameters:

<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095)

clear : Clear log

MVR Groups

Description:
Show MVR group addresses.

Syntax:

MVR Groups [<vid>]

Parameters:

<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095)

MVR SFM

Description:

Show SFM (including SSM) related information for MVR.

Syntax:

513
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

MVR SFM [<vid>] [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

514
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.19 Voice VLAN Command

Voice VLAN Configuration

Description:

Show Voice VLAN configuration.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN Configuration

Example:
Show Voice VLAN configuration.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan configuration

V oice VLAN Configuration:

=========================

Voice VLAN Mode : Disabled

Voice VLAN VLAN ID : 1000

Voice VLAN Age Time(seconds) : 86400

Voice VLAN Traffic Class :7

Voice VLAN OUI Table:

=====================

Telephony OUI Description

------------- -----------

00-30-4F SOLTECH phones

00-03-6B Cisco phones

00-0F-E2 H3C phones

00-60-B9 Philips and NEC AG phones

00-D0-1E Pingtel phones

00-E0-75 Polycom phones

00-E0-BB 3Com phones

00-01-E3 Siemens AG phones

Voice VLAN Port Configuration:

==============================

515
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol

---- -------- -------- ------------------

1 Disabled Disabled OUI

2 Disabled Disabled OUI

3 Disabled Disabled OUI

4 Disabled Disabled OUI

5 Disabled Disabled OUI

6 Disabled Disabled OUI

7 Disabled Disabled OUI

8 Disabled Disabled OUI

9 Disabled Disabled OUI

10 Disabled Disabled OUI

Voice VLAN Mode

Description:

Set or show the Voice VLAN mode.

We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN.

It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:
enable : Enable Voice VLAN mode.

disable: Disable Voice VLAN mode

(default: Show flow Voice VLAN mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable the Voice VLAN mode.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan mode enable

516
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Voice VLAN ID

Description:

Set or show Voice VLAN ID.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN ID [<vid>]

Parameters:

<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095)

Default Setting:

1000

Example:
Set ID 2 for Voice VLAN ID.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan id 2

Voice VLAN Agetime

Description:

Set or show Voice VLAN age time.

Syntax:
Voice VLAN Agetime [<age_time>]

Parameters:

<age_time>: MAC address age time (10-10000000) default: Show age time

Default Setting:

86400sec

Example:
Set Voice VLAN age time in 100sec.

SFC4000T:/>voice valn agetime 100

517
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Voice VLAN Traffic Class

Description:

Set or show Voice VLAN ID.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN Traffic Class [<class>]

Parameters:

<class>: Traffic class (0-7)

Default Setting:

Example:
Set 4 traffic class for voice VLAN

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan traffic class4

Voice VLAN OUI Add

Description:

Add Voice VLAN OUI entry.

Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process. The maximum entry number is (16).

Syntax:

Voice VLAN OUI Add <oui_addr> [<description>]

Parameters:

<oui_addr> : OUI address (xx-xx-xx). The null OUI address isn't allowed

<description>: Entry description. Use 'clear' or "" to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of

a contact. (only in CLI)

Example:
Add Voice VLAN OUI entry.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan oui add 00-11-22 test

518
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Voice VLAN OUI Delete

Description:

Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry.

Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN OUI Delete <oui_addr>

Parameters:

<oui_addr>: OUI address (xx-xx-xx). The null OUI address isn't allowed

Example:
Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan oui delete 00-11-22

Voice VLAN OUI Clear

Description:

Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry.

Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN OUI Clear

Example:
Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan oui clear

Voice VLAN OUI Lookup

Description:

Lookup Voice VLAN OUI entry.

Syntax:
Voice VLAN OUI Lookup [<oui_addr>]

519
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

<oui_addr>: OUI address (xx-xx-xx), default: Show OUI address

Voice VLAN Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode.

When the port mode isn't disabled, we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict

of ingress filter.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN Port Mode [<port_list>] [disable|auto|force]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

disable : Disjoin from Voice VLAN.

auto : Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the

Voice VLAN members automatically.

force : Forced join to Voice VLAN.

(default: Show Voice VLAN port mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Set auto mode for port 1-4 of Voice VLAN port mode.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan port mode 1-4 auto

Voice VLAN Security

Description:

Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all non-telephone MAC address in Voice

VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds.

Syntax:
Voice VLAN Security [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

520
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable Voice VLAN security mode.

disable: Disable Voice VLAN security mode

(default: Show flow Voice VLAN security mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable the Voice VLAN port security mode for port 1-4.

SFC4000T:/>voice vlan security 1-4 enable

Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol

Description:

Set or show the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol mode. It only work under auto detect mode is enabled. We should

enable LLDP feature before configure discovery protocol to 'LLDP' or 'Both'. Change discovery protocol to 'OUI' or 'LLDP'

will restart auto detect process.

Syntax:

Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol [<port_list>] [oui|lldp|both]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

OUI : Detect telephony device by OUI address.

LLDP : Detect telephony device by LLDP.

Both : Both OUI and LLDP.

(default: Show Voice VLAN discovery protocol)

Default Setting:

OUI

521
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.20 Loop Protect Command

Loop Protect Configuration

Description:

Show Loop Protection configuration.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Configuration

Loop Protect Mode

Description:

Set or show the Loop Protection mode.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable Loop Protection

disable: Disable Loop Protection

Default Setting:

enable

Loop Protect Transmit

Description:

Set or show the Loop Protection transmit interval.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Transmit [<transmit-time>]

Parameters:

Transmit time interval (1-10 seconds)

Default Setting:

522
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Loop Protect Shutdown

Description:

Set or show the Loop Protection shutdown time.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Shutdown [<shutdown-time>]

Parameters:

Shutdown time interval (0-604800 seconds)

A value of zero disables re-enabling the port

Default Setting:

10

Loop Protect Port Configuration

Description:

Show Loop Protection port configuration.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Port Configuration [<port_list>]

Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Loop Protect Port Mode

Description:

Set or show the Loop Protection port mode.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable Loop Protection

disable: Disable Loop Protection

523
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Loop Protect Port Action

Description:

Set or show the Loop Protection port action.

Syntax:

Loop Protect Port Action [<port_list>] [shutdown|shut_log|log]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

shutdown : Shutdown the port

shut_log : Shutdown the port and Log event

log : (Only) Log the event

524
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.21 IPMC Command

IPMC Configuration

Description:

Show IPMC snooping configuration.

Syntax:

IPMC Configuration [mld|igmp]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

IPMC Mode

Description:

Set or show the IPMC snooping mode.

Syntax:

IPMC Mode [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]

Parameters:
mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

enable : Enable IPMC snooping

disable: Disable IPMC snooping

(default: Show global IPMC snooping mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IGMP snooping

SFC4000T:/>ipmc mode igmp enable

525
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IPMC Flooding

Description:

Set or show the IPMC unregistered addresses flooding operation.

Syntax:

IPMC Flooding [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

enable : Enable IPMC flooding

disable: Disable IPMC flooding

(default: Show global IPMC flooding mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IGMP flooding

SFC4000T:/>ipmc flooding igmp enable

IPMC Leave Proxy

Description:

Set or show the mode of IPMC Leave Proxy.

Syntax:

IPMC Leave Proxy [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

enable : Enable IPMC Leave Proxy

disable: Disable IPMC Leave Proxy

(default: Show global IPMC Leave Proxy mode)

526
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IGMP Leave Proxy

SFC4000T:/>ipmc leave proxy igmp enable

IPMC Proxy

Description:

Set or show the mode of IPMC Proxy.

Syntax:

IPMC Proxy [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

enable : Enable IPMC Proxy

disable: Disable IPMC Proxy

(default: Show global IPMC Proxy mode)

Default Setting:
disable

Example:
Enable IGMP Proxy

SFC4000T:/>ipmc proxy igmp enable

IPMC SSM

Description:

Set or show the IPMC SSM Range.

Syntax:

IPMC SSM [mld|igmp] [(Range <prefix> <mask_len>)]

527
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

range : SSM Range keyword

<prefix> : IPv4/IPv6 multicast group address, accordingly

<mask_len>: Mask length for IPv4(4 ~ 32)/IPv6(8 ~ 128) ssm range, accordingly

IPMC VLAN Add

Description:

Add the IPMC snooping VLAN interface.

Syntax:

IPMC VLAN Add [mld|igmp] <vid>

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

IPMC VLAN Delete

Description:

Delete the IPMC snooping VLAN interface.

Syntax:

IPMC VLAN Delete [mld|igmp] <vid>

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

528
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IPMC State

Description:

Set or show the IPMC snooping state for VLAN.

Syntax:

IPMC State [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

enable : Enable MLD snooping

disable: Disable MLD snooping

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IGMP snooping state for VLAN 1

SFC4000T:/>ipmc state igmp 1 enable

IPMC Querier

Description:

Set or show the IPMC snooping querier mode for VLAN.

Syntax:

IPMC Querier [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

enable : Enable MLD querier

disable: Disable MLD querier

529
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Default Setting:

enable

Example:
Enable IGMP querier for VLAN 1

SFC4000T:/>ipmc querier igmp 1 enable

IPMC Compatibility

Description:

Set or show the IPMC Compatibility.

Syntax:

IPMC Compatibility [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [auto|v1|v2|v3]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

auto|v1|v2|v3:

auto : Auto Compatibility (Default Value)

v1 : Forced Compatibility of IGMPv1 or MLDv1

v2 : Forced Compatibility of IGMPv2 or MLDv2

v3 : Forced Compatibility of IGMPv3

(default: Show IPMC Interface Compatibility)

IPMC Fastleave

Description:

Set or show the IPMC snooping fast leave port mode.

Syntax:

IPMC Fastleave [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [enable|disable]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

530
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

enable : Enable MLD fast leave

disable: Disable MLD fast leave

(default: Show IPMC fast leave mode)

Default Setting:

disable

Example:
Enable IGMP fast leave for all port

SFC4000T:/>ipmc fastleave igmp 1-10 enable

IPMC Throttling

Description:

Set or show the IPMC port throttling status.

Syntax:

IPMC Throttling [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [limit_group_number]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

0 : No limit

1~10 : Group learn limit

(default: Show IPMC Port Throttling)

Default Setting:

Unlimited

Example:
Set the max. learn 10 groups for ICMP port throttling

SFC4000T:/>ipmc throttling igmp 1-10 10

531
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

IPMC Filtering

Description:

Set or show the IPMC port group filtering list.

Syntax:

IPMC Filtering [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [add|del] [group_addr]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

add : Add new port group filtering entry

del : Del existing port group filtering entry

(default: Show IPMC port group filtering list)

group_addr : IPv4/IPv6 multicast group address, accordingly

IPMC Router

Description:

Set or show the IPMC snooping router port mode.

Syntax:
IPMC Router [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [auto|fix|none]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

auto : Enable IGMP router mode auto

fix : Enable IGMP router mode fix

none : Enable IGMP router mode none

IPMC Status

Description:

532
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Show IPMC operational status, accordingly.

Syntax:

IPMC Status [mld|igmp] [<vid>]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

Example:
Show VLAN 1 IPMC operational status

SFC4000T:/>ipmc status igmp 1

IPMC Groups

Description:

Show IPMC group addresses, accordingly.

Syntax:

IPMC Groups [mld|igmp] [<vid>]

Parameters:
mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

Example:
Show VLAN 1 IPMC group addresses, accordingly.

SFC4000T:/>ipmc groups igmp 1

IPMC Version

Description:

Show IPMC Versions.

533
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

IPMC Version [mld|igmp] [<vid>]

Parameters:

mld|igmp:

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

Example:
Show VLAN 1 IPMC Versions.

SFC4000T:/>ipmc version igmp 1

IPMC SFM

Description:

Show SFM (including SSM) related information for IPMC.

Syntax:

IPMC SFM [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [<port_list>]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

IPMC Parameter RV

Description:

Set or show the IPMC Robustness Variable.

Syntax:

IPMC Parameter RV [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_rv]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

534
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

ipmc_param_rv:

-1 : Default Value (2)

1~255 : Robustness Variable

(default: Show IPMC Interface Robustness Variable

IPMC Parameter QI

Description:

Set or show the IPMC Query Interval.

Syntax:

IPMC Parameter QI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_qi]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

ipmc_param_qi:

-1 : Default Value (125)

1~31744 : Query Interval in seconds

(default: Show IPMC Interface Query Interval

IPMC Parameter QRI

Description:

Set or show the IPMC Query Response Interval.

Syntax:

IPMC Parameter QRI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_qri]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :
mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

535
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

ipmc_param_qri:

-1 : Default Value (100)

0~31744 : Query Response Interval in tenths of seconds

(default: Show IPMC Interface Query Response Interval

IPMC Parameter LLQI

Description:

Set or show the IPMC Last Listener Query Interval.

Syntax:

IPMC Parameter LLQI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_llqi]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

ipmc_param_llqi:

-1 : Default Value (10)

0~31744 : Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of seconds

(default: Show IPMC Interface Last Listener Query Interval

IPMC Parameter URI

Description:

Set or show the IPMC Unsolicited Report Interval.

Syntax:

IPMC Parameter URI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_uri]

Parameters:

mld|igmp :

mld : IPMC for IPv6 MLD

igmp: IPMC for IPv4 IGMP

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any', default: Show all VLANs

ipmc_param_uri:

536
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

-1 : Default Value (1)

0~31744 : Unsolicited Report Interval in seconds

(default: Show IPMC Interface Unsolicited Report Interval

537
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.22 sFlow Command

sFlow Configuration

Description:

Show global and per port sFlow configuration.

Syntax:

sFlow Configuration

sFlow Receiver

Description:

Set or show the sFlow receiver timeout, IP address, and UDP port.

Syntax:

sFlow Receiver [release] [<timeout>] [<ip_addr_host>] [<udp_port>] [<datagram_size>]

Parameters:

release : Release the current owner of the receiver.

The owner can either be "<none>" if the receiver is not currently owned by anyone, it can be

"<Configured through local management>" if it's currently set up by CLI or Web, or it can be anything

else if is set-up through SNMP. You can only (re-)configure the receiver if it is not currently owned by

anyone or owned by CLI or Web. If this argument is specified, the remaining arguments are ignored.
<timeout> : Receiver timeout measured in seconds. The switch decrements the timeout once per second, and as

long as it is non-zero, the receiver receives samples. Once the timeout reaches 0, the receiver and all

its configuration is reset to defaults. Valid range is 0 - 2147483647 seconds.

<ip_addr_host> : IPv4/IPv6 address or a hostname identifying the receiver.

<udp_port> : Receiver's UDP port. Valid range is 0 - 65535.

Use 0 to get default port (which is 6343).

<datagram_size>: Maximum datagram size. Valid range is 200 - 1468 bytes.

Default is 1400 bytes.

sFlow FlowSampler

Description:
Set or show flow sampler configuration per port.

When operational, the sampling rate 'N' is rounded off to the nearest supported value.

538
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

sFlow FlowSampler [<port_list>] [<sampling_rate>] [<max_hdr_size>]

Parameters:

<port_list> : Port list or 'all'. Default: All ports.

<sampling_rate>: Specifies the statistical sampling rate

The sample rate is specified as N to sample 1/Nth of the packets in the monitored flows. There are no

restrictions on the value, but the switch will adjust it to the closest possible sampling rate.

0 disables sampling.

<max_hdr_size> : Specifies the maximum number of bytes to transmit per flow sample.

Valid range is 14 - 200 bytes. Default: 128 bytes.

sFlow CounterPoller

Description:

Set or show counter polling interval configuration per port.

Syntax:

sFlow CounterPoller [<port_list>] [<interval>]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Default: All ports.

<interval> : Polling interval in range 0 - 3600.

Set to 0 to release this port's resources.

sFlow Statistics Receiver

Description:

Get or clear receiver statistics.

Syntax:

sFlow Statistics Receiver [clear]

Parameters:

clear: Clear statistics.

539
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

sFlow Statistics Samplers

Description:

Get or clear per-port statistics.

Syntax:

sFlow Statistics Samplers [<port_list>] [clear]

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Default: All ports.

clear : Clear statistics.

540
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.23 VLAN Control List Command

VCL MAC-based VLAN Configuration

Description:

Show VCL MAC-based VLAN configuration.

Syntax:

VCL Macvlan Configuration

VCL MAC-based VLAN Add

Description:

Add or modify VCL MAC-based VLAN entry.

Syntax:

VCL Macvlan Add <mac_addr> <vid> [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<mac_addr> : MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

Example:
Add 00-11-22-33-44-55-66 in VLAN 20 for all port

SFC4000T:/>vcl macvlan add 00-11-22-33-44-55-66 20 1-10

VCL MAC-based VLAN Delete

Description:

Delete VCL MAC-based VLAN entry.

Syntax:

VCL Macvlan Del <mac_addr>

Parameters:

<mac_addr> : MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)

541
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Example:
Delete 00-11-22-33-44-55-66 in MAC-based VLAN list

SFC4000T:/> vcl macvlan del 00-11-22-33-44-55-66

VCL Stasus

Description:

Show VCL MAC-based VLAN users configuration.

Syntax:

VCL Status [combined|static|nas|all]

Parameters:

combined|static|nas|all: VCL User

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add Ethernet II

Description:

Add VCL protocol-based VLAN Ethernet-II protocol to group mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 <ether_type>|arp|ip|ipx|at <group_id>

Parameters:

<ether_type>|arp|ip|ipx|at: Ether Type (0x0600 - 0xFFFF)

<group_id> : Protocol group ID

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add SNAP

Description:

Add VCL protocol-based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Snap <oui>|rfc_1042|snap_8021h <pid> <group_id>

Parameters:

<oui>|rfc_1042|snap_8021h: OUI value (Hexadecimal 00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF).

542
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<pid> : PID value (0x0-0xFFFF). If OUI is 00-00-00, valid range of PID is from 0x0600-0xFFFF.

<group_id> : Protocol group ID

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add LLC

Description:

Add VCL protocol-based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Llc <dsap> <ssap> <group_id>

Parameters:

<dsap> : DSAP value (0x00-0xFF)

<ssap> : SSAP value (0x00-0xFF)

<group_id>: Protocol group ID

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete Ethernet II

Description:

Delete VCL protocol-based VLAN Ethernet-II protocol to group mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Eth2 <ether_type>|arp|ip|ipx|at

Parameters:

<ether_type>|arp|ip|ipx|at: Ether Type (0x0600 - 0xFFFF)

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete SNAP

Description:

Delete VCL protocol-based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Snap <oui>|rfc_1042|snap_8021h <pid>

Parameters:

<oui>|rfc_1042|snap_8021h: OUI value (Hexadecimal 00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF).

543
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<pid> : PID value (0x0-0xFFFF). If OUI is 00-00-00, valid range of PID is from 0x0600-0xFFFF.

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete LLC

Description:

Delete VCL protocol-based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Llc <dsap> <ssap>

Parameters:

<dsap>: DSAP value (0x00-0xFF)

<ssap>: SSAP value (0x00-0xFF)

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Add

Description:

Add VCL protocol-based VLAN group to VLAN mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add [<port_list>] <group_id> <vid>

Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

<group_id> : Protocol group ID

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Delete

Description:

Delete VCL protocol-based VLAN group to VLAN mapping.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Delete [<port_list>] <group_id>

Parameters:

<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports

544
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

<group_id> : Protocol group ID

VCL Protocol-based VLAN Configuration

Description:

Show VCL protocol-based VLAN entries.

Syntax:

VCL ProtoVlan Conf

VCL IP-based VLAN Configuration

Description:

Show VCL IP Subnet-based VLAN configuration.

Syntax:

VCL IPVlan Configuration [<vce_id>]

Parameters:

<vce_id>: Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry

VCL IP-based VLAN Add

Description:

Add or modify VCL IP Subnet-based VLAN entry.

Syntax:

VCL IPVlan Add [<vce_id>] <ip_addr_mask> <vid> [<port_list>]

Parameters:

<vce_id> : Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry

<ip_addr_mask>: Source IP address and mask (Format: a.b.c.d/n).

<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)

<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports

545
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

VCL IP-based VLAN Delete

Description:

Delete VCL IP Subnet-based VLAN entry.

Syntax:

VCL IPVlan Delete <vce_id>

Parameters:

<vce_id>: Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry

546
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

6.24 SMTP Command

SMTP Configuration

Description:

Show SMTP configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Configuration

SMTP Mode

Description:

Enable or disable SMTP configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Mode [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SMTP mode

disable : Disable SMTP mode

(default: Show SMTP mode)

SMTP Server

Description:

Set or show SMTP server configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Server [<server>] [<port>]

Parameters:

<server>: SMTP server address

<port> : SMTP server port

547
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SMTP Auth

Description:

Enable or disable SMTP authentication configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Auth [enable|disable]

Parameters:

enable : Enable SMTP authentication

disable : Disable SMTP authentication

(default: Show SMTP authentication)

SMTP Auth_user

Description:

Set or show SMTP authentication user name configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Auth_user [<auth_user_text>]

Parameters:

<auth_user_text>: SMTP authentication user name

SMTP Auth_pass

Description:

Set or show SMTP authentication password configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Auth_pass [<auth_pass_text>]

Parameters:

<auth_pass_text>: SMTP authentication password

548
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SMTP Mail From

Description:

Set or show SMTP E-mail from configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Mailfrom [<mailfrom_text>]

Parameters:

<mailfrom_text>: SMTP E-mail from address

SMTP Mail Subject

Description:

Set or show SMTP E-mail subject configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Mailsubject [<mailsubject_text>]

Parameters:

<mailsubject_text>: SMTP E-mail subject

SMTP Mail to 1

Description:

Set or show SMTP E-mail 1 to configure.

Syntax:

SMTP Mailto1 [<mailto1_text>]

Parameters:

<mailto1_text>: SMTP E-mail 1 to address

SMTP Mail to 2

Description:

Set or show SMTP E-mail 2 to configure.

549
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Syntax:

SMTP Mailto2 [<mailto2_text>]

Parameters:

<mailto1_text>: SMTP E-mail 2 to address

550
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

7. SWITCH OPERATION

7.1 Address Table

The Switch is implemented with an address table. This address table composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the

address information of some node in network, including MAC address, port no, etc. This in-formation comes from the learning

process of Ethernet Switch.

7.2 Learning
When one packet comes in from any port, the Switch will record the source address, port no. And the other related information

in address table. This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.

7.3 Forwarding & Filtering

When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching, it will also check the destination address besides the source

address learning. The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address-table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will

be forwarded to all the other ports except the port, which this packet comes in. And these ports will transmit this packet to the

network it connected. If found, and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in, the Ethernet

Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address

table. But, if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in, then this packet will be filtered.

Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability

7.4 Store-and-Forward
Store-and-Forward is one type of packet-forwarding techniques. A Store-and-Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming
frame in an internal buffer, do the complete error checking before transmission. Therefore, no error packets occurrence, it is the

best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability.

The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet-header, searches the routing table pro-vided for the

incoming port and forwards the packet, only if required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers

directly to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. How-ever, the switch is most commonly used to segment

existence hubs, which nearly always improves overall performance. An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any

Ethernet network environment to signifi-cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters.

Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching, the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and

outgoing packet are stored in a routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address

is on the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall

load on the network.

The Switch performs "Store and forward" therefore, no error packets occur. More reliably, it reduces the re-transmission rate.

No packet loss will occur.

551
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

7.5 Auto-Negotiation
The STP ports on the Switch have built-in "Auto-negotiation". This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth

when a connection is established with another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detect the modes

and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of, both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX devices can connect

with the port in either Half- or Full-Duplex mode.

If attached device is: 100Base-TX port will set to:

10Mbps, no auto-negotiation 10Mbps.

10Mbps, with auto-negotiation 10/20Mbps (10Base-T/Full-Duplex)

100Mbps, no auto-negotiation 100Mbps

100Mbps, with auto-negotiation 100/200Mbps (100Base-TX/Full-Duplex)

552
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

8. TROUBLE SHOOTING

This chapter contains information to help you solve problems. If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the

Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual.

■ The Link LED is not lit

Solution:

Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch

■ Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port

Solution:

Please check the VLAN settings, trunk settings, or port enabled / disabled status.

■ Performance is bad

Solution:

Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch. If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half

duplex, then the performance will be poor. Please also check the in/out rate of the port.

■ Why the Switch doesn't connect to the network

Solution:

1. Check the LNK/ACT LED on the switch

2. Try another port on the Switch

3. Make sure the cable is installed properly

4. Make sure the cable is the right type

5. Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again

■ 100Base-TX port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular

Solution:

Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change

duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.

■ Switch does not power up

Solution:

1. AC power cord not inserted or faulty

2. Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly

3. Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly, check that the AC power source is working by connecting a

different device in place of the switch.

553
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

4. If that device works, refer to the next step.

5. If that device does not work, check the AC power

 While IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password –

To reset the IP address to the default IP Address “192.168.0.100” or reset the password to default value. Press the hardware

reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device is rebooted, you can login the management WEB interface

within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.

Reset

554
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

APPENDEX A

A.1 Switch's RJ-45 Pin Assignments

1000Mbps, 1000Base T

Contact MDI MDI-X

1 BI_DA+ BI_DB+

2 BI_DA- BI_DB-

3 BI_DB+ BI_DA+

4 BI_DC+ BI_DD+

5 BI_DC- BI_DD-

6 BI_DB- BI_DA-

7 BI_DD+ BI_DC+

8 BI_DD- BI_DC-

Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden,

is beyond the scope of this standard.

A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100Base-TX

When connecting your 10/100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is

necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any

Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ-45 receptacle/

connector and their pin assignments:

RJ-45 Connector pin assignment

Contact MDI MDI-X

Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant
Interface-Cross

1 Tx + (transmit) Rx + (receive)

2 Tx - (transmit) Rx - (receive)

3 Rx + (receive) Tx + (transmit)

4, 5 Not used

6 Rx - (receive) Tx - (transmit)

7, 8 Not used

555
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

The standard cable, RJ-45 pin assignment

The standard RJ-45 receptacle/connector

There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color

of straight cable and crossover cable connection:

Straight Cable SIDE 1 SIDE2

SIDE 1 1 = White / Orange 1 = White / Orange

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 = Orange 2 = Orange

3 = White / Green 3 = White / Green

4 = Blue 4 = Blue

5 = White / Blue 5 = White / Blue

6 = Green 6 = Green
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 = White / Brown 7 = White / Brown

SIDE 2 8 = Brown 8 = Brown

Crossover Cable SIDE 1 SIDE2

SIDE 1 1 = White / Orange 1 = White / Green

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 = Orange 2 = Green

3 = White / Green 3 = White / Orange

4 = Blue 4 = Blue

5 = White / Blue 5 = White / Blue

6 = Green 6 = Orange
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 = White / Brown 7 = White / Brown

SIDE 2 8 = Brown 8 = Brown

Figure A-1: Straight-Through and Crossover Cable

Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables

into your network.

556
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

APPENDEX B : GLOSSARY

A
ACE

ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.

There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE
also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.

ACL

ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify

individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific

traffic object access rights.

ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In

networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with

a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound
traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.

There are 3 web-pages associated with the manual ACL configuration:

ACL|Access Control List: The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way, highest (top) to lowest (bottom).

Default the table is empty. An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs.

The first matching ACE will take action (permit/deny) on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is

incremented. An ACE can be associated with a Policy, 1 ingress port, or any ingress port (the whole switch). If an ACE

Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the "Ports" web-page. There are

number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE. Read the Web page help text to get further information for

each of them. The maximum number of ACEs is 64.

ACL|Ports: The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port. This is useful to group ports to

obey the same traffic rules. Traffic Policy is created under the "Access Control List" - page. You can you also set up

specific traffic properties (Action / Rate Limiter / Port copy, etc) for each ingress port. They will though only apply if the

frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched. In that case a counter associated with that port is
incremented. See the Web page help text for each specific port property.

ACL|Rate Limiters: Under this page you can configure the rate limiters. There can be 15 different rate limiters, each

557
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

ranging from 1-1024K packets per seconds. Under "Ports" and "Access Control List" web-pages you can assign a Rate
Limiter ID to the ACE(s) or ingress port(s).

AES

AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard. The encryption key protocol is applied in 802.1i standard to

improve WLAN security. It is an encryption standard by the U.S. government, which will replace DES and 3DES. AES
has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128, 192, or 256 bits.

AMS

AMS is an acronym for Auto Media Select. AMS is used for dual media ports (ports supporting both copper (cu) and

fiber (SFP) cables. AMS automatically determines if a SFP or a CU cable is inserted and switches to the corresponding
media. If both SFP and cu cables are inserted, the port will select the prefered media.

APS

APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching. This protocol is used to secure that switching is done

bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group, as defined in G.8031.

Aggregation

Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for

higher availability.

(Also Port Aggregation, Link Aggregation).

ARP

ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical

address, such as an Ethernet address. ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet

address of its neighbors is known. Before using IP, the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet

address of the desired destination system.

ARP Inspection

ARP Inspection is a secure feature. Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to

Layer 2 networks by "poisoning" the ARP caches. This feature is used to block such attacks. Only valid ARP requests

and responses can go through the switch device.

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings
that can be shared by those devices for a link.

558
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

C
CC

CC is an acronym for Continuity Check. It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by
transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP.

CCM

CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message. It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it's peer MEP and

used to implement CC functionality.

CDP

CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol.

D
DEI

DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator. It is a 1-bit field in the VLAN tag.

DES

DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard. It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for

encrypting (enciphering) and decrypting (deciphering) binary coded information.

Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher. Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its

original form called plaintext. The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering
operations which are based on a binary number called a key.

DHCP

DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP

addresses to devices on a network.

DHCP used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default

gateway, subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server.

The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique, for example, no IP address is assigned to a second client

while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired). Therefore, IP address pool management is done
by the server and not by a human network administrator.

559
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than

requiring an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the
hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address.

DHCP Relay

DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not

on the same subnet domain.

The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when

forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets

when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client. The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP

address or other assignment policies. Specifically the option works by setting two sub-options: Circuit ID (option 1) and

Remote ID (option2). The Circuit ID sub-option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request
came in on. The Remote ID sub-option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit.

The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is "vlan_id" "module_id" "port_no". The

parameter of "vlan_id" is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID. The parameter of "module_id" is the third byte for

the module ID (in standalone switch it always equal 0, in stackable switch it means switch ID). The parameter of

"port_no" is the fourth byte and it means the port number.

The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length, and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address.

DHCP Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by

injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server.

DNS

DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System. It stores and associates many types of information with domain names.

Most importantly, DNS translates human-friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer-friendly IP

addresses. For example, the domain name www.example.com might translate to 192.168.0.1.

DoS

DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service. In a denial-of-service (DoS) attack, an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate

users from accessing information or services. By targeting at network sites or network connection, an attacker may be

able to prevent network users from accessing email, web sites, online accounts (banking, etc.), or other services that

rely on the affected computer.

Dotted Decimal Notation

Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators
between octets.

An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x.y.z.w, where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255.

560
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

DSCP

DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point. It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet

classification purposes.

E
EEE

EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802.3az.

EPS

EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU/T G.8031.

Ethernet Type

Ethernet Type, or EtherType, is a field in the Ethernet MAC header, defined by the Ethernet networking standard. It is

used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.

F
FTP

FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

and provides file writing and reading. It also provides directory service and security features.

Fast Leave

IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without

first sending out group specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the

multicast group specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth
management for all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously.

H
HTTP

HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the

World Wide Web (WWW).

HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted, and what actions Web servers and browsers should take

in response to various commands. For example, when you enter a URL in your browser, this actually sends an HTTP

command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page. The other main standard that
controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML, which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed.

Any Web server machine contains, in addition to the Web page files it can serve, an HTTP daemon, a program that is
designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive. The Web browser is an HTTP client, sending

requests to server machines. An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)

561
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

connection to a particular port on a remote host (port 80 by default). An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the
client to send a request message.

HTTPS

HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. It is used to indicate a secure HTTP

connection.

HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for

security-sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons.

HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape's Secure Socket Layer (SSL) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP

application layering. (HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer, TCP/IP.)

SSL uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of
encryption for commercial exchange.

I
ICMP

ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol. It is a protocol that generated the error response,

diagnostic or routing purposes. ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple

exchanges such as time-stamp or echo transactions. For example, the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet

connection.

IEEE 802.1X

IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based Network Access Control. It provides authentication to devices

attached to a LAN port, establishing a point-to-point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication

fails. With 802.1X, access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized

users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.

IGMP

IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communications protocol used to manage the

membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish

multicast group memberships. It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for unicast connections.

IGMP can be used for online video and gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these

uses.

IGMP Querier

A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link. This router is called the Querier.

IMAP

IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages

562
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

from a mail server.

IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers, and SMTP is the protocol used to
transport mail to an IMAP server.

The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4. It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3

(POP3), but offers additional and more complex features. For example, the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email

messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer. If you wish to remove your messages from

the server, you must use your mail client to generate local folders, copy messages to your local hard drive, and then
delete and expunge the messages from the server.

IP

IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol. It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network.

IP is a "best effort" system, which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in

the same condition it was sent. Each device connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) is

given an Internet Protocol address, and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices
connected to the extended network.

The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4, which has 32-bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in

excess of four billion unique addresses. This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking

addresses in large blocks, the bulk of which remain unused. There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new

version of the Internet Protocol, IPv6, which would have 128-bits Internet Protocol addresses. This number can be

represented roughly by a three with thirty-nine zeroes after it. However, IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of
the Internet.

IPMC

IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast.

IP Source Guard

IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic

based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings. It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks
when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host.

L
LACP

LACP is an IEEE 802.3ad standard protocol. The Link Aggregation Control Protocol, allows bundling several physical
ports together to form a single logical port.

LLDP

563
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

LLDP is an IEEE 802.1ab standard protocol.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol(LLDP) specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to

advertise, to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN, the major capabilities provided by the system

incorporating that station, the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of

those capabilities, and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those

management entity or entities. The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard

Management Information Base (MIB), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management

System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

LLDP-MED

LLDP-MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802.1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association

(TIA-1057).

LOC

LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network.

Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS

M
MAC Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds up a table that maps

MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to ( based upon the DMAC address in

the frame ). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network

administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address ( SMAC address ), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending

the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC

addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have
been seen after a configurable age time.

MEP

MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group (ITU-T Y.1731).

MD5

MD5 is an acronym for Message-Digest algorithm 5. MD5 is a message digest algorithm, used cryptographic hash

function with a 128-bit hash value. It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991. MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 - The
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm.

Mirroring

564
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic, the switch system can be configured to mirror frames

from multiple ports to a mirror port. (In this context, mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame.)

Both incoming (source) and outgoing (destination) frames can be mirrored to the mirror port.

MLD

MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6. MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast

listeners on a directly attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of

using a separate protocol.

MVR

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol for Layer 2 (IP)-networks that enables multicast-traffic from a source

VLAN to be shared with subscriber-VLANs.

The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core

network, instead the stream(s) are received on the MVR-VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have

requested it/them(Wikipedia).

N
NAS

NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server. The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected

source. A client connects to the NAS, and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client's supplied

credentials are valid. Based on the answer, the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource. An
example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802.1X.

NetBIOS

NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input/Output System. It is a program that allows applications on separate

computers to communicate within a Local Area Network (LAN), and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network (WAN).

The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a

different host name, provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)
model.

NFS

NFS is an acronym for Network File System. It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as

though they are local file systems.

NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network, providing authorized users
continuous access to them, which means NFS supports sharing of files, printers, and other resources as persistent
storage over a computer network.

565
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

NTP

NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems.
NTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.

O
OAM

OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance.

It is a protocol described in ITU-T Y.1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality. MEP functionality like CC
and RDI is based on this.

Optional TLVs.

A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs

For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame. These TLVs are known as

optional TLVs. If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame.

OUI

OUI is the organizationally unique identifier. An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by

IEEE. You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits
of a MAC address.

P
PCP

PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point. It is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame. It is also
known as User Priority.

PD

PD is an acronym for Powered Device. In a PoE> system the power is delivered from a PSE ( power sourcing

equipment ) to a remote device. The remote device is called a PD.

PHY

PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer

(IEEE-802.3).

566
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

PING

ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to

generate a response from that computer. The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the

packets. Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected.

ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets. The PING Request is the packet from the origin
computer, and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target.

Policer

A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames. It is located in front of the ingress queue.

POP3

POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from

a mail server.

POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it. However, some

implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time. POP can be
thought of as a "store-and-forward" service.

An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for

retaining e-mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server. IMAP can be thought of as a remote file
server.

POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e-mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

(SMTP). You send e-mail with SMTP, and a mail handler receives it on your recipient's behalf. Then the mail is read

using POP or IMAP. IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e-mail retrieval.
Virtually all modern e-mail clients and servers support both.

PPPoE

PPPoE is an acronym for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet.

It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly

with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain Metro

Ethernet networks (Wikipedia).

Private VLAN

In a private VLAN, communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted. A VLAN can be configured as a

private VLAN.

PTP

PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems.

567
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

QCE

QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry. It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID.

There are six QCE frame types: Ethernet Type, VLAN, UDP/TCP Port, DSCP, TOS, and Tag Priority. Frames can be
classified by one of 4 different QoS classes: "Low", "Normal", "Medium", and "High" for individual application.

QCL

QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List. It is the list table of QCEs, containing QoS control entries that classify to a

specific QoS class on specific traffic objects.

Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL. The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific

QoS class.

QL

QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source. This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality

of the clock received in the port.

QoS

QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service. It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual

applications or protocols.

A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data, including high-quality video and

delay-sensitive data such as real-time voice. Networks must provide secure, predictable, measurable, and sometimes
guaranteed services.

Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end-to-end business solution. Therefore, QoS is the
set of techniques to manage network resources.

QoS class

Every incoming frame is classified to a QoS class, which is used throughout the device for providing queuing,

scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS

class. There is a one to one mapping between QoS class, queue and priority. A QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest
priority.

R
RARP

RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a
given hardware address, such as an Ethernet address. RARP is the complement of ARP.

RADIUS

568
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service. It is a networking protocol that provides

centralized access, authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network

service.

RDI

RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication. It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect

detected to the remote peer MEP

Router Port

A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device.

RSTP

In 1998, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of STP: the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, which

provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. Standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 now incorporates

RSTP and obsoletes STP, while at the same time being backwards-compatible with STP.

S
SAMBA

Samba is a program running under UNIX-like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and

Microsoft Windows machines. Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows, IBM OS/2, and other SMB

client machines. Samba uses the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol and Common Internet File System (CIFS),

which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking.

Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms, including Linux, most common Unix platforms,
OpenVMS, and IBM OS/2.

Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in
Microsoft Windows "Neighborhood Network".

SHA

SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm. It designed by the National Security Agency (NSA) and published by

the NIST as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Standard. Hash algorithms compute a fixed-length digital

representation (known as a message digest) of an input data sequence (the message) of any length.

Shaper

A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames. It is located after the ingress queues.

SMTP

SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It is a text-based protocol that uses the Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service. SMTP transfers mail messages

between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail.

569
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

SNAP

The SubNetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) is a mechanism for multiplexing, on networks using IEEE 802.2 LLC, more

protocols than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service Access Point (SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying

protocols by Ethernet type field values; it also supports vendor-private protocol identifier.

SNMP

SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet

Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol for network management. SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network

management architecture. It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or

change notices from network devices implementing SNMP.

SNTP

SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer

systems. SNTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.

SPROUT

Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology. An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology

changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch. SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each

switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack.

SSID

Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802.11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach. A

client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs, and can

choose one to connect to based on pre-configuration, or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to

select one (wikipedia).

SSH

SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell. It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel

between two networked devices. The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an

insecure network. The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin, TELNET and rsh protocols, which did not provide

strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality (Wikipedia).

SSM

SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication.

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer-2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. The

original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP.

SyncE

SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet. This functionality is used to make a network 'clock frequency'

synchronized. Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized (IEEE 1588).

570
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

T
TACACS+

TACACS+ is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus. It is a networking protocol which

provides access control for routers, network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more

centralized servers. TACACS+ provides separate authentication, authorization and accounting services.

Tag Priority

Tag Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.

TCP

TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol

(IP) to exchange the messages between computers.

The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for

multiple connections by concurrent applications (for example, Web server and e-mail server) running on the same
host.

The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another. It is known as a

connection-oriented protocol, which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the

message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged. TCP is

responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets
back into the complete message at the other end.

Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, and File Transfer Protocol
(FTP).

TELNET

TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork. It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control

Protocol (TCP) and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client.

TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network. To start a Telnet

session, the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password. Then, the client user can
enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console.

TFTP

TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

and provides file writing and reading, but it does not provides directory service and security features.

ToS

ToS is an acronym for Type of Service. It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control. It is fully decoded to

571
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

determine the priority from the 6-bit ToS field in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully

decoded into 64 possibilities, and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4

ToS priority control bit (0~63).

TLV

TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value. A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information. Each of these

pieces of information is known as TLV.

TKIP

TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol. It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption

algorithm. TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP. The key used for

encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet.

U
UDP

UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to

exchange the messages between computers.

UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). Unlike TCP, UDP

does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams, and UDP doesn't provide reassembling and

sequencing of the packets. This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the

entire message has arrived and is in the right order. Network applications that want to save processing time because
they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP.

UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer. It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user
requests and, optionally, a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact.

Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System (DNS), streaming media applications
such as IPTV, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).

UPnP

UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to

simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing, communications, and entertainment) and in

corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components

User Priority

User Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.

V
VLAN

572
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

Virtual LAN. A method to restrict communication between switch ports. VLANs can be used for the following

applications:

VLAN unaware switching: This is the default configuration. All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and

members of VLAN 1. This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1, and the switch does not remove or
insert VLAN tags.

VLAN aware switching: This is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. All ports are VLAN aware. Ports connected to

VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames. Other ports are members of one
VLAN, set up with this Port VLAN ID, and transmit untagged frames.

Provider switching: This is also known as Q-in-Q switching. Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware,

members of one VLAN, and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID. Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN

aware, members of multiple VLANs, and set up to tag all frames. Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are

forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag. Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to
the provider port with a double VLAN tag.

VLAN ID

VLAN ID is a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs.

Voice VLAN

Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice

VLAN, we can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and

voice quality.

W
WEP

WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy. WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802.11 wireless

networks. Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio, so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired

networks. When introduced in 1999, WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional

wired network (Wikipedia).

WiFi

WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity. It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802.11 network,

whether 802.11b, 802.11a, dual-band, etc. The term is promulgated by the Wi-Fi Alliance.

WPA

WPA is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access. It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers

had found in the previous system , Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802.11i
standard, and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802.11i was prepared. WPA is

specifically designed to also work with pre-WPA wireless network interface cards (through firmware upgrades), but not

573
 User’s Manual of SFC4000T

necessarily with first generation wireless access points. WPA2 implements the full standard, but will not work with

some older network cards (Wikipedia).

WPA-PSK

WPA-PSK is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access - Pre Shared Key. WPA was designed to enhance the security of

wireless networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE

802.1X authentication server, which distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes less scalable

'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK mode, security

depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802.11i

standard (Wikipedia)

WPA-Radius

WPA-Radius is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Access - Radius (802.1X authentication server). WPA was designed to

enhance the security of wireless networks. There are two flavors of WPA: enterprise and personal. Enterprise is meant

for use with an IEEE 802.1X authentication server, which distributes different keys to each user. Personal WPA utilizes

less scalable 'pre-shared key' (PSK) mode, where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase. In PSK

mode, security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase. The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of

the IEEE 802.11i standard (Wikipedia)

WPS

WPS is an acronym for Wi-Fi Protected Setup. It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home

network. The goal of the WPS protocol is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless

network (Wikipedia).

WRES

WRED is an acronym for Weighted Random Early Detection. It is an active queue management mechanism that
provides preferential treatment of higher priority frames when traffic builds up within a queue. A frame's DP level is

used as input to WRED. A higher DP level assigned to a frame results in a higher probability that the frame is dropped

during times of congestion.

WTR

WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore. This is the time a fail on a resource has to be 'not active' before restoration

back to this (previously failing) resource is done.

574